Introduction International business involves business transactions taking place across national boundaries. The business involves large and small firms, as well as those with strategic alliances within the global market. However, there are several distinctions made depending on the nature of strategies applied by firms based on organizational and functional decisions comprising of financial, administrative, marketing, human resource management and operational decisions (World Trade Organization, 2009).
Liberalization of both trade and investment has contributed towards growth and development of international business within the last few decades. International business differs from domestic enterprises based on across borders strategies and systems of operations. These include unique government systems, taxes and duties, foreign currencies as well as different cultures amongst other systems (Allen and Raynor, 2004).
International business can be valued based on comparative advantage of various countries. Such aspects consider the fact that each nation specializes in production of some unique goods and services based on presence and abundance of factors of production (Allen and Raynor, 2004).
At the same time, firms are differentiated in terms of kind of resources available for utilization which guarantees them competitive advantage based on quality of products and services offered. Changes within resource needs, product life cycles and domestic markets create some need within firms to invest in international markets.
Outline explanation of the chosen international organization Levendary Café comprises of a chain of 3500 cafes including Denver soup, salad and sandwich restaurants. The Café operations were managed by Mia Foster serving at the capacity of being the new CEO. The company’s fundamentals are recognized as having stronger basis and, at the same time, performance based on objective management forecasts. Additionally, the company boasts of strong international brand despite being tapped out of domestic market. The restaurant entered the Chinese market with unique changes in their marketing strategies such as using different design of stores and menus for the purposes of appealing to local consumers.
Levendary Café is famous for its wholesome soups, salads, and sandwiches made of high-quality ingredients. The café has numerous operational centers within the United States with headquarters in Denver. These locations are characterized by comfortable and friendly environment. The company recruits highly skilled and professional staff and at the same time operates under attractive tagline and brand image which identifies the restaurant’s food the one that makes people feel rich.
Description of the global business environment the company operates considering the industry, main competitors, and the biggest challenges
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Competitive environments usually vary from country to country based on economic, political and cultural dimensions. Level of competition existing between firms in international markets varies depending on the country of operation (Bartlett and Ghoshal, 1987).
Good example can be derived from the scenario between two countries i.e. the US and China, whereby owners of a majority businesses in the US are private companies hence competition only arises within the private sector. This is contrary to business operations within People’s Republic of China where businesses were owned by the state hence making it difficult for multinational companies from the United States to compete favorably within Chinese market.
Chinese market provides potential base for business operations based on the population density. The country seems ripe for investment firms with the rising urban middle-class population. Chinese food services industry experiences growth due to increase in the number of women professional workforce and increasing trend of eating out.
However, the interest of the majority of population inclines towards their cultural beliefs making consumers more attracted to restaurants serving Asian food at affordable prices (Kogut and Singh, 1988). At the same time, Chinese consumers consume less diary products demanding that any foreign based restaurant such as Levendary should reduce supply of diary related products. This is contrary to the United States market where majority prefer diary products such as cheese soup.
Company’s major challenge revolves around low returns, competition from a wide variety of regional food suppliers, such as local restaurants. Major competitors within Chinese market include KFC which is considered as most successful foreign fast food restaurant in the Chinese market, because KFC entered the market through joint venture partnership which enabled them to adopt local management styles as well as become appealing to local consumers.
The other foreign competitor is McDonalds who penetrated the Chinese market through its unique menus, as well as affordable prices affordable for younger generation.
There is also Pizza Hut, operating in Chinese market through utilization of its uniqueness in satisfying the needs within high-end casual dining restaurants. Competition within the US food service industry comprises of various privately owned restaurants offering various food categories with services based on time, nature of dinning offered either casual or table dinning services.
We will write a custom Essay on International Business Transactions and Strategies specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More However, restaurant and contract food service industry is known to be very lucrative within international market depending on locations. The sector operates in over 9000 locations within the United States. At the same time, the industry is characterized by high level fragmentations amongst multi-unit restaurant concepts and also involves presence of independent operators and major operators such as McDonald’s and Starbucks.
According to analysis from the case study, Chinese taste is satisfied through Quick Casual categories of restaurants comprising of concepts such as Panda Express. Despite all these, Levendary café planned to operate more wholesome choices compared to other Quick service concepts. The industry’s cost structure appears to be relatively simple and sub-divided into occupancy, labor, food and supply costs that appear conducive within international market.
Describe the organizational structure of the company Lavendary Café operates based on complex organizational structure with headquarters in the United States. Various activities are represented within the organizational structure, with the structure comprising of Chief Concept Officer (CCO) assisting in the process of ensuring that the restaurant maintains top United States market concept.
The CCO ensures that food is developed to cater for various needs within different target markets and also focuses on satisfying upcoming trends through application of right market strategies such as upgrading food taste (Ghoshal and Bartlett, 1995). Marketing department reports to CCO, and are majorly involved in publicity of company’s outlets and franchise stores, this enables adequate creation of awareness amongst consumers.
Management team ensures proper running and planning within company’s premises which includes placement of menu boards, table tents as well as banners. Marketing team also indulges determination of pricing mechanisms (Kostova, 1999). The various pricing mechanisms which can be used by the company include; international, geographical and psychological pricing.
International pricing is where different prices are charged on same goods depending on region and nature of environment of operation. Such decisions are made based on various factors such as country’s economic conditions, marketing objectives and also consumer perceptions. Geographical pricing involves pricing goods and services based on geographical zones and Psychology pricing where consumers’ rate quality based on prices attached on goods and services provided.
Then there is also department comprising of fully scaled test kitchen and food science laboratory working under CCO. The food team is responsible for conducting various quality checks within all Levendary cafes ensuring food tastes change in accordance with cultural beliefs of the target market segment. Then there are store managers reporting to district managers manning operations within various regions, these managers report to area directors which ultimately operated under market vice presidents (Ghoshal and Bartlett, 1995).
The company’s organization structure ensures that strict operational standards, policies and practices are maintained. The same organization structure comprises of Chief Franchise Officer undertaking the responsibility of supervising franchised Levendary’s stores. Business development team ensures that right strategies are applied within international expansion processes and also endowed with responsibility of undertaking research licensing within new markets (Pothukuchi et al., 2002).
Not sure if you can write a paper on International Business Transactions and Strategies by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Explanation on various impacts of culture on business’s activities around the world From international business perspective, cultural environment comprises critical aspects with significant impact on market environments. This is since culture comprises of commonly held general beliefs and values amongst different groups of people within one nation.
Various models tend to explain impact of cultural values on businesses, these include individual dimension, degree of response towards risks, issues based on gender, as well as power dimensions. Nations enforce different individual values on citizens influencing their choice of goods. Response towards risks describes the degree of acceptance on uncertainties associated with introduction of new products within the country.
Power distance refers to the level to which a nation uses its power to manipulate and control business operations. Issues on gender revolve around respect for both male and female traditional values. Such models have proved necessary in the process of exploring management approaches appropriate for different cultures (London and Hart, 2004).
The company’s culture focuses on delighting consumers with their products and services. This was translated and incorporated within their local menus found in urban, suburban, as well as rural set-ups across all company branches. However, this is contrary to other multi-nationals such as McDonalds where one menu is created for entire company branches.
Various social and cultural practices within Eastern Europe and China seem to be quite different from that of Americans, original Levendary Café. Such differences usually affect level of sales within some regions. Major differences exist in religion and social lifestyles which affect demand levels of restaurant products and services since they dictate consumer buying patterns (Pothukuchi et al., 2002).
Some of the common cultural beliefs may, at some point, determine the branding nature of most companies based on the need to identify with consumers within target market. For example, market existing in Eastern Europe is usually known for diversified attitude towards food and beverage products from other regions, especially coffee products.
At the same time, marketing team from any multinational company needs to deal with issues surrounding language barrier. This is since effective communication is the key to successful marketing and sale of products (Pothukuchi et al., 2002).
There is need for Multinationals to consider granting natives of any market segment employment opportunities for the purposes of identifying and easily complying with native’s cultures. Such circumstances require complete change and approach within communication channels whereby products are ultimately linked to prevailing culture within various markets.
Operations management and marketing teams require strategies capable of dealing with cultural gaps within countries such as China since this ensures adequate penetration of foreign firms (Furrer et al., 2008). Varied cultural perceptions on western products within Asian and Far-East countries determine demand and level of sales. In some instances, they shy away from western products due to fear of alienation by western tastes, religion and ethnicity.
Highly populated regions like those of Eastern Asia present good market base for international products and services. Overall, sales are often affected by frequent political instability within such regions. However, US regions anticipate high urban population due to industrialization which has led to increase in consumer demands for products and services.
At the same time, various regions within Eastern Europe experience constant changes within their legal systems hence may adopt the kind of marketing strategies applicable in the United States. In some regions, media content are screened before releasing to consumers (Rowley, 2010).
Countries such as China operate under some forms of media restrictions since they have to conform to religious beliefs and cultural creativity. Kind of legal structures enforced determines consumers’ responses within domestic market segments (Kogut and Singh, 1988).
Another company that tries to employ strategic entrepreneurship is McDonald’s, a renowned firm in its industry that tries to employ global management, but acts significantly under the local context (McDonald’s, 2010). McDonald’s is an international food chain that has thousands of outlets across the globe.
This company provides products and services depending on consumer needs hence providing products that have considerable diversification in order to establish brand name, and at the same time, cater for prevailing cultural needs when it comes to supplying foodstuff across regions.
For instance, McDonald’s in India does not serve beef even if in its other outlets outside the country, since it has become its primary fast-moving product. This means that the firm eventually tries to seek the opportunity to cater for international market through trying to act within local domains (McDonald’s, 2010).
The company avoids undergoing certain moves capable of centralizing its production processes since there are many factors to be considered beforehand. These include culture and other relevant heritage associated with the existence of a prevailing culture within the society.
Operations within various market environments based on geographical set-up, population and other potential measures require much consideration. East European nations usually uphold principles of bureaucracy making it difficult for foreign multinationals to make significant penetration. This is since these nations are cautious of any form of colonization from any western nation through their business operations.
Additionally, manufacturers require elaborate considerations on marketing principles capable of capturing customers. Despite threats posed to multinationals, there is need to invest in substantial marketing processes through application of modern and available technology within such interior regions. At the same time, uniqueness of products and services offered by the Company acts as the best source of convincing power that can be utilized to attract consumers to company’s brand (London and Hart, 2004).
There is a necessity to use different strategy approaches within various regional markets. Similar strategies can only work in cases where destination markets share closely some cultural relations with countries of origin. In such cases, same management values and corporate cultures are applicable.
Products and services offered in Eastern Asia countries should have different tastes from those supplied in European countries. This prevents cases of incurring huge losses where management utilizes the use of similar strategies. Multinationals should encourage marketing strategies appropriate in these countries where majority of those within management team are employed from target destinations (Alden et al., 1999).
Identify the key management issues the chosen organization faces The company faces the challenge of balancing between strategic management and competitive advantage. It is evident from the case study that strategic management would always lead to competitive advantage (Rumelt et al., 1991). However, whether or not the concerned competitive advantage is sustainable, there are relevant proofs that are necessary in order to justify the claim that there is no such existence of sustainable competitive advantage because of the frequent presence of innovation (Bartlett and Ghoshal, 1987).
The competitive advantage of Levendary Café in the first place compares to other key players within the same industry based on brand name. However, their brand is unique, and one of its kind. The company’s strategic moves may not be that unique at all considering the fact that there are many key players trying to imitate what it has already built.
Aside from the fact that this firm establishes its name in the international context, it has the ability to promote the idea of trying to serve its target customers with the product they deserve under the local context. For this reason, this firm has the chance to serve its customers with appropriate product service offerings that they need and deserve.
Conclusion Global marketing at some point involves inclusion of International joint ventures which act as potential guides for foreign firms within local markets. This enables foreign companies to find easy access to local customers.
In addition, the firm’s image receives some uplift as many consumers require assurance of their local firms before associating with any foreign products. At times, it is referred to as third-party endorsement.
There are other ways in which foreign firms can access resources from destined markets. These include: getting a license, signing contracts, forming alliances amongst application of other market strategies. Joint ventures are mainly preferred because they perform better than privately owned multinational firms.
References Alden, D., Steenkamp, M.,
Leadership and Management Essay custom essay help
Introduction to Leadership Models Leadership has attracted massive attention of various scholars around the world. According to Huy (2002), a number of theories of leadership have been put forth by various scholars. Leadership is one of the most important factors that always dictate success or failure of an organization in the world today. Leadership has been in existence for as long as the history of humankind can be traced. As Adrianna and Lester (2009) put it, leadership goes beyond providing direction to followers.
It entails going into details to discover the potential of the followers. It involves engaging the followers in a way that would make them discover themselves. It involves helping followers develop the urge to achieve. It is the art of making people realize that they have a potential to achieve beyond their current capacity. Leadership requires a leader to challenge the followers positively in a way that would make them feel that they need to rediscover themselves.
According to Maak (2007), the current corporate world has become very challenging. New firms are coming into existence with new strategies that never existed before. Technology is changing the face of the earth. This poses serious challenge to firms operating in the current market. Firms are currently facing challenges from various corners.
The customer in the contemporary market has access to vast information, thanks to the advanced means of communication through the mass and social media. These consumers know that they have an array of options to choose from when they want to make any purchase. They are, therefore, very demanding. They are willing to pay less for a product whose quality has been improved. Maak (2007) says that customers are currently asking for more, but are willing to pay less. This reduces profitability of firms.
On the other hand, suppliers are now demanding for more for the supplies they make to such organization. Such suppliers cite increased standards of living, inflation among other factors as reasons for increasing the prices of their supplies (Adrianna
Computational Linguistics Research Paper college application essay help: college application essay help
Abstract This research paper evaluates whether people can communicate with people speaking in foreign languages through the mediation of translation applications. In a bid to perform this task, the paper makes a comprehensive analysis about the strategies that could be applied when translating. Furthermore, it will describe the mechanisms involved in facilitating the translation. It is, therefore, apparent that this research paper will concentrate on showing how translation application can mediate speaking to people with distinct languages.
Introduction Development of a language is an ability that must occur in everybody’s life. There are numerous procedures that can be applied to understand the development of languages (Hausser, 2001). One of these methods involves computational approaches. Computational linguistic is a broad concept derived from various disciplines (Hausser, 2001).
The concept utilizes statistical procedures in structuring natural languages through computing. Some of the fields that these genres arise from are philosophy, investigators, speech experts, and cognitive scientist among others that contribute to accumulation of computation language knowledge.
Literature Young learners are exposed to the concept of information acquisition at an early age. However, the society is biased when exposing the young learners. This is because it tends to favor positive information over negative information. In this process, learners are only aware about positive information.
This is evidenced through the knowledge provided when they are exposed to total blackout. It appears during matters relating to negative information. This fact, therefore, limits the application of language computational models. In addition, it has been a common practice that a language can be learnt by introducing the content in small bits first. This is followed by increasing it gradually to favor optimal learning process (Chan
“Trifles” by Susan Glaspell and Solidarity Between Women Essay (Critical Writing) college admissions essay help
In Susan Glaspell’s Trifles one of basic themes is solidarity between women. Mrs. Hale and Mrs. Peters show compassion towards Mrs. Wright, who is accused of killing her own husband. This points to an unconditional and sincere support of representatives of their gender.
While men treat Mrs. Wright as a cruel killer, women found a way to justified her from a solely woman’s position: “I might have known she needed help! I know how things can be — for women” (Glaspell 323). Moreover, the women decide to hide the evidence (a dead bird). When the men asked about the bird, women replied: “We think the — cat got it” (Glaspell 320), even though they knew that there could be no cat: “… she didn’t have a cat. She’s got that feeling some people have about cats — being afraid of them” (Glaspell 318).
Among the characters, I found Mrs. Hale very interesting. Mrs. Hale shows a rare ability to sense the emotions of other people; in addition, she is very compassionate and sentimental. Mrs. Hale even feels guilty of not helping Mrs. Wright when she needed her: “I wish I had come over to see Minnie Foster sometimes” (Glaspell 319).
One of the central issues opened in Ibsen’s A Doll House is confrontation of selfishness and altruism. Torvald, a personification of selfishness and narcissism, cares only about his reputation.
Thus, he fires Krogstad because he dares to “adopt a familiar tone with me” (Ibsen 190). In addition, he views himself as a savior and master of his wife, who is totally helpless without him. At the same time, Nora is fighting her own dissatisfaction with her life, and is even ready to sacrifice it in the name of her husband’s reputation, which is a paramount example of altruism.
Undoubtedly, Nora is the most important character of the play, as the whole story is connected to her inner world, her emotions and discoveries. The culmination of the play, when Krogstad’s letter to Torvald is revealed, is also a culmination moment of Nora’s life, as she realizes the true nature of a person she spent her life with: “It was tonight, when the wonderful thing did not happen; then I saw you were not the man I had thought you were” (Ibsen 249).
The Importance of Being Earnest is one of the most popular works ever written by Oscar Wilde. One of the themes discussed in this incomparably ironic play is the issue of hypocrisy.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Two young men, Jack and Algernon, have true feelings for women and sincere intentions to win their hearts, but these benevolent principles compel them to behave not honest enough to even reveal their true names. Jack’s attempt to catch Algernon lying points to his pretentious honesty and morality: “My dear Algy, you talk exactly as if you were a dentist. It is very vulgar to talk like a dentist when one isn’t a dentist.
It produces a false impression” (Wilde 261). In fact, at the end of the play it occurs that revealing one’s nature and being himself is the only condition needed for reaching the target. As for the character that I found very interesting, it is Gwendolen, Jack’s fiancé. Her elitism, arrogant tone and whims prevented Jack from showing his real face. She always points to the class differences: “I am glad to say that I have never seen a spade.
It is obvious that our social spheres have been widely different” (Wilde 295); “Cake is rarely seen at the best houses nowadays” (Wilde 310). Even in the end, when Jack’s true identity is revealed, the only condition of Gwendolen’s love to him is him being named Earnest (another whim). All in all, I think Gwendolen is a special and well-designed character.
A Raisin in the Sun is a play written by Lorraine Hansberry, which discusses a number of themes. From my point of view, one of the most important issues covered by the play is the conflict of expectations.
Thus, Walter expects to become a successful businessman and provider of his family: “I want so many things that they are driving me kind of crazy” (Hansberry 479), but his dreams are juxtaposed to Mama’s wish to live a stable and honest life. Beneatha wants to become a doctor, but this expectation is confronted by the racial prejudices and financial hardship, which makes her sarcastic and disappointed: “…forgive me for ever wanting to be anything at all!” (Hansberry 482).
As for the most important character in the play, I believe it is Mama. She is a personification of wisdom, rationality, and care. She tries to find a balance between her obligations in the family, her own dreams, and the dreams of other family members. She also seems to be the only character in the play who realizes that money does not hold the key to all human needs: “Money is life. Once upon a time freedom used to be life – now it’s money” (Hansberry 471).
Works Cited Glaspell, Susan. Trifles. In:The Seagull Reader: Plays. 2nd ed. Ed. Joseph Kelly. New York: W. W. Norton
Sustainable Horticulture and Community Development Research Paper custom essay help: custom essay help
Table of Contents Planning
Managing Sustainable Vegetation
Managing Sustainable Water
Managing Sustainable Soil
Sustainable horticulture makes of use farming systems that promote the health of community by taking care of the natural resources and balancing them with the needs of the prevailing market conditions. This paper discusses the advantages and disadvantages of sustainable horticulture with a case study of New South Wales (NSW).
Horticulture farming in this area is a good source of fresh vegetables for the surrounding community. Therefore, horticulture plays a significant role in strengthening the economy in the region where the farm gate value is more than $1 every year and creates many job opportunities in the region. Horticultural farming involves many human activities, which destroy the natural environment and introduces harmful chemicals to the nearby water bodies exposing human beings to unhealthy water.
Nowadays, there is increased awareness about sustainability in this sector and managers of the farms are realizing the importance of protecting the natural resources that are directly linked with horticulture as well as preserving the winder environment to promote community health (Iles 83-88).
Many small-scale and large-scale farmers have always failed to address the effect of their poor farming methods on the health of community members. Statistics have shown that such degradation resulting from poor systems costs the state $700 million per year because of poor production.
Therefore, industries dealing with horticulture are facing current and future challenge of implementing sustainability by reducing the effects of the farming methods used on the natural resources and surrounding environment. Another challenge is to improve the damages already caused by past practices that are considered unsustainable to the landscapes in Australia and other parts of the world practicing horticultural farming (Bohn, Howe and Viljoen 57-64).
The first step towards achieving this objective is ensuring the farming systems used are viable economically in order to promote continuity of both local and international markets for fruits and vegetables.
Some of the adverse effects of horticultural farming that require immediate address include soil acidity due to the fertilizers used, high water tables that have risen with time, washing of the top nutrients in the soil, poor landscape due to soil erosion and removal of residues from the soils, which have accumulated with continued application of pesticides (Iles 83-88).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Efficient measures are required immediately to protect, rehabilitate and improve natural resources that horticultural farming relies on. It is important for the horticultural industries to have high understanding of good farming methods. This will help farmers in the industry continually to adopt better practice management that focuses to supply foodstuffs that are healthy at sustainable costs while preserving both the immediate and winder environment (Brown 1-5).
Horticultural farming would be sustainable if farming methods that reduce impact on the environment are adopted. These include environmental management systems, which are being adopted for sustainable farming methods. The management approaches have various important elements that relate to horticultural farming.
Planning This requires considering holistic views of the farming at every stage of horticultural farming right from individual farmers to the level of large-scale farming. In order to determine the effect of horticultural farming on large-scale, the industries must analyze several generational systems to establish the long-term effects on the health of the consumers of the products. The industries must avoid focusing on approaches that are not long-term as they have less power to increase sustainability of horticultural farming (Iles 83-88).
Managing Sustainable Vegetation This is a key element to promote sustainable horticultural farming as it affects biodiversity, prevents soil erosion, and maintains as well as reduces water tables to optimal levels. Good planning for natural vegetation should be carried out when designing the layout for the farm for both small-scale and large-scale farming.
It is important to preserve native vegetations as they impact positively on the landscape. Native vegetation is a good habitat for birds and serves as good method to control pests in the farm thus reducing cost that would be incurred through use of artificial methods. In addition, natural vegetation acts as windbreakers and minimizes the unnecessary need for irrigation (Brown 1-5).
Managing Sustainable Water The community health largely depends on healthy water, which is a basic need and therefore the source of water serving the horticultural industries must be healthy. Productivity of the farms also directly depends on healthy water. However, most rivers flowing through horticultural regions have become contaminated with chemicals used in the farms serving the upper regions, which mixes with more chemicals downstream.
This is hazardous for both plants and human consumption. Contamination of water has become an increasing problem as the needs for healthy water has continued to rise over the past decades. In the recent past, the government has introduced reforms to control water pollution by ensuring continuous flow of rivers to enhance ecological processes and have the industries treat their wastewater before releasing it into the water bodies (Bohn, Howe and Viljoen 57-64).
We will write a custom Research Paper on Sustainable Horticulture and Community Development specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Managing Sustainable Soil The health of the soil is a key factor to be considered by any farm dealing with horticultural farming, as it is the primary requirement for high and healthy production. The soil must be fertile, structurally good and able to retain the optimum amount of water for the best drainage and sufficient level of water table.
Once the top soil is lost, a considerable time is needed for it to form again and therefore must be retained through a continuous process. The community must be taught on the factors that lead to soil degradation as well as how to identify the soil that has degraded and the effects of such soils to their horticultural productions. Farmers must put measures to prevent soil erosion that is caused by water or wind as well as control the chemicals entering the soil through farm inputs such as fertilizers and pesticides (Barham 49-360).
In order for sustainable horticultural farming to succeed, farmers must have continuous desire to make their farms productive now and in future. The farmers must also be made aware about what the community expects from their farming, which is healthy food and safe environment.
This objective is possible through good planning and reliable management approaches used by modern enterprises (Brown 1-5). Native vegetation requires protection to promote increased biodiversity and secure environment. Water sources and fertile soils must also be appropriately managed, as they are scarce resources that directly affect the horticultural production. Pests and diseases need to be well managed through chemicals.
In addition, natural methods should be emphasized for pest control while maintaining high productivity. More management plans should be developed to help farmers to practice sustainable and profitable farming through introduction of premium products needed in the market (Brown 1-5).
Works Cited Barham, Elizabeth. “Toward a theory of values-based labeling.” Agriculture and Human Values, 19.4 (2002): 349-360. Print.
Bohn, Katrin, Howe Joe and Viljoen André. New Cities with More Life: Continuous Productive Urban Landscapes: Designing Urban Agriculture for Sustainable Cities, New York: Architectural Press, 2005. Print.
Brown, Martha. “The Alan Chadwick Garden at UCSC.” Journal of the California Garden and Landscape History Society, 13.3 (2010): 1-5. Print.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Sustainable Horticulture and Community Development by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Iles, Jeremy. (2005). The Social Role of Community Farms and Gardens in The City. In A. Viljoen (Ed.), Continuous Productive Urban Landscapes: Designing Urban Agriculture for Sustainable Cities (83-88.), New York: Architectural Press, 2005. Print.
Dancing in September Essay scholarship essay help: scholarship essay help
The film depicts the struggle the black community faces to change the status quo through film. Tommy is an incredible playwrite with ‘Just us’ being pitched by his childhood friend George. After its test pilot is approved they celebrate their creativity by depicting the characters as positive, warm and humane something which doesn’t play out well with the directors.
With the falling ratings the pressure is piling on Tommy to change the script to the ordinarily predictable African American stereotype. Even after their demeaning efforts, the show is cut off leaving George and Tommy where they were hinged on a retrogressive system.
They face the forces of negativity in their work and fuel it by believing they had failed in their quest for equality. Discrimination is rife in their society since even the audience loses belief in the show by not tuning in causing the ratings to drop.
The film gives us a flashback of when Tommy and George were young and they used to watch ‘roots’ a show which focuses on how a young African warrior is stolen from Africa and sold as a slave is able to create a family which generations later is able to be free from slavery. It tries to outline the importance of freedom and people charting their own paths in life by breaking the monotonous cycle .
The story pans out in today’s society where a clique doesn’t allow for dynamic shifts in the mindsets of people to be expressed through the media. The portraying of black people as criminals doesn’t serve the purpose the show was meant to undertake since it short-changes the viewers and the writers as well.
George and Tommy also take up an important role in the film as the main actors through their interactions to see the show through. Though they are faced with a myriad of challenges they managed to end up as people who added value to society through their show. They also had challenges of balancing their professional and private lives.
Personal values also play a part in the film through Tommy being prone to manipulation by the network executive to appease their thirst to retain the status quo.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More It hasn’t been easy for black entertainers to leave their mark in television with some of them getting either demeaning or ‘lesser roles’. The most common catch phrases that have been used by black characters were either given to us by the white man during the slavery days and are now used by black people while referring to each other.
This in turn begs the question does it really matter to us that we insult each other and how does it help us? Some may argue that it helps in lessening the stigma against us with others not paying attention to the words which faded after the independence of all Americans.
To white characters it gives them an edge over black Americans since they feel superior due to their power over the mindset of black Americans. To blacks, it neccesitates for a change of attitudes and mindset. It is a shame that some blacks still think that the only way out of poverty is through crime or drug dealing.
Black-cast dramas have been a revelation when it comes to cable channels because of the way the stories are able to resonate with the audience. Although they haven’t been rampant as expected the growth of the shows has created a buzz in the industry. The industry is very bureaucratic and rigid with any show that doesn’t bring instant success through ratings being shot down.
Compounded with the fact that AfricanAmericans are a minority their needs are not seen to weigh much when it comes to demanding shows because of the low returns compounded with other factors such as being unfairly associated with gangs and drug dealing. With competition from other cheaper to produce shows such as Mexican soaps the average African American will have to wait a little bit longer before they can get their own shown on cable networks.
The promotion of black-cast shows has not been forthcoming with all parameters in cable networks turning a blind eye on the importance of a balanced viewership by audiences. With the storylines of other kinds being recycled over and over again the networks have deliberately looked the other way instead of tapping the unharnessed potential of all the stories that could be changed into stars.
This in turn has led to the formation of a network for black-cast viewing, BET (Black Entertainment Television). It exclusively airs black content while creating awareness of the deliberate attempt by rigid forces to lock out the stories of minorities.
We will write a custom Essay on Dancing in September specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More My ideal African American show would have to be The Fresh Prince of Bel-Air. The show is about a young Will who moves to West Philadelphia to live with his aunt and uncle in Bel-air (Diaz, 2011). This contrasts with his previous lifestyle.
The show’s premise is all about how Will was able to surplus all the pressure of maintaining his ‘hood’ past and concentrate on the lessons to learn from his experience. The central conflict plays out such that Will is against society. He is placed in an unfamiliar setting where he is found wanting in most of his actions such as his etiquette. This leads to him learning the ropes anew while also using his past experiences to move past hurdles he encounters daily.
The person who I feel would be able to capture and own the position of Will would have to be Eddie Griffin while Will’s uncle would have to be Denzel Washington. Eddie would be able to capture the humor while also charm his way out of trouble if need be. I felt the underprivileged boy would be better played by a person who would look the part which Eddie would comfortably do. On my decision to cast Denzel I thought he would suit the wealthy uncle while also looking the part as well.
The film maker should ensure the script is well represented on the screen through cinematography to encompass the theme of the show. He /she is charged with creating the scenes scripted in a manner that captures the audience best while its main purpose would be to evoke emotions.
The film maker is also charged with the moral responsibility of not creating biased works where a certain storyline must be observed to create a balance in the story to bring out the story in its entirety without fear or favor. But it goes without saying that all this is within reach and the only limitation to anything is where minds reach their creative end.
Works Cited Diaz, Evelyn. “Fresh Prince of Bel-Air Star Slams Will Smith | News | BET.” Celebrities, Music, News, Fashion, Entertainment, TV Shows and Video | BET. 28 Dec 2011. Web.
Ethics in Philosophy: Discussing Theories, Evaluating Key Concepts. In Search for the Truth Essay essay help free
Introduction: The Complex Issues of Ethics in Philosophy It is hard to overestimate the significance of ethics in philosophy. Since the latter often poses a number of moral dilemmas to solve, it is important that there should be certain standards that a philosopher could live up to or at least base his/her judgments on (Rachels 651).
Although not all philosophical movements might actually follow the basic principles of ethics, each philosophy still uses these principles as the guidance in defining the good and the evil, which means that ethical principles should be considered the building blocks for a specific philosophical movement (Shafer-Landau 444).
Taking a closer look at the existing philosophical movements will help define the role of ethics in philosophy and at the same time observe the ways in which ethical principles manifest themselves in specific philosophical movements.
A. J. Ayer and His Defense of the Form of Compatibilism: Explanation Point
Since the dawn of times, people have been trying to figure out whether the future has been predetermined by some sort of the highest creature, whether it is God, Allah, the providence, or any other creature of the highest authority, or whether there are millions of options, and by making their choice, people work their way into the future on their own. However, before compatibilists offered their interpretation of future, no one had ever thought of combining the two approaches.
Adding determinism to free will, Ayer broke completely new grounds in philosophy by stating that there are three conditions that are required for making a choice fully based on the principle of free will in the light of the determinist theory postulates (Stace 224). As it has already been mentioned, Ayer considered that free will was possible in the determinist environment as long as three key conditions were met (Pereboom 204). According to Ayer, tone must draw the line between the notions of free will and responsibility.
Therefore, the first condition of free will that Ayer considers necessary is that as long as one has to act in a specific way due to the specific circumstances, it cannot be considered as taking responsibilities. Hence, the first condition is that the circumstances should not shape one’s course of actions; otherwise, these actions are not going to be based on free will in the sense that determinism presupposes (Stace 223).
Taking the case of two states starting a war, one can possibly consider the practical application of Ayer’s theory. In the situation described above, both parties should make a decision based on their strengths and weaknesses.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More However, if one of the states makes political or military decisions based on what is being dictated by the patronizing country, the condition is not fulfilled, since the actions of the state in question are shaped by the patronizing state. Another condition clarified by Ayer concerns the reconciliation of determinism with free will.
In other words, according to Ayer, it is necessary to make sure that what an individual is certain of is true. For example, after a child steals a toy from his friend, one can persuade the child to give the toy back, yet as long as the child fails to understand his fault, his actions (giving the toy back to its owner) cannot be regarded as the action of free will. Finally, the third condition demands that an individual should have the right to be true and not to act under constraint.
For example, when facing a choice between either solving the conflict with his/her friends or relatives or breaking the relationships, it is essential that the individual should understand that there is no wrong choice in this situation. Finally, it is crucial that the course of actions should not be chosen under the pressure of any third party. Once these conditions are met, Ayer assures, a choice based on free will becomes possible in the determinist setting.
Concerning the Arguments Against Free Will in Determinism: What Chisholm Has to Say
Chisholm has made it clear that there are two basic kinds of causation, i.e., the transeunt and immanent one. The former stated that determinism denies any possibility of one being responsible for his/her actions due to the interference of a specific event that causes another event, while the latter presupposed that a man cannot be possibly responsible for his actions, since it is always a specific agent causing a specific event.
Hence, Chisholm’s key point was that people are unable to make a decision and, therefore, change something in the course of events due to the interference of agents or events. Therefore, it can be considered that Chisholm’s argument against the possibility of free will in determinism setting is based on the idea that events and agents other than people shape the outcome of any event, while people can only follow the trail blazed according to the determinist principles.
Frankfurt and His Counterargument in Ayer’s Support: The Key Difference between People and Animals
It is noteworthy, however, that Ayer’s arguments are rater debatable. As it has been stated above, Chisholm argues that Ayer is wrong, since a person would have done otherwise if (s)he could, but (s)he cannot, since various agents or events do not allow a person to make a choice on his/her own. In his turn, Frankfurt argues back, claiming that Chisholm never explains an important point concerning the basic difference between people and animals in terms of free will (Rachels 95).
Frankfurt’s key argument against Chisholm’s theory concerning people’s inability to take actions in accordance with their own needs and wants is based on the fact that these are not people, but external factors that shape the further events (Rachels and Rachels 303). Frankfurt, however, made it clear that, in contrast to animals, people have intellectual capacity and, therefore, can decide what is best for them; therefore, they have the privilege to enjoy free will.
We will write a custom Essay on Ethics in Philosophy: Discussing Theories, Evaluating Key Concepts. In Search for the Truth specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More My Own Opinion: Where the Line between Free Will and Determinism Lies
Both philosophers offer a plethora of arguments and very profound ideas to support their points of view and prove their opinion. Therefore, making the choice between the two concepts basing solely on the arguments that Chisholm and Ayer have to say is very hard.
Therefore, it will be necessary to incorporate my vision of the universe as well too come up with a conclusion concerning the veracity of each theory and choose the one that fits my vision of the world best. Personally, I think I would select the theory that presupposes at least some elements of free will; i.e., I would follow the concepts suggested y Ayer.
Even though Chisholm also has a very valid point, it seems that his idea of causation concerns the recognition of necessity rather than stripping the concept of free will to one doing whatever one wants. Having the ability to think and analyze, people, therefore, recognize the existing options, choosing the one that seem the most reasonable in the given setting. Once a person recognizes the necessity to act in a specific way, though there are other possible options, a person makes a choice based on what (s)he considers the best choice.
Hence, a person is free to choose between the existing options. An animal, on the contrary, follows its instincts, which offer only one possible way of acting. Hence, people can enjoy free will in determinist settings, since recognizing the wrong option and making a conscious choice already means that a person acts according to his/her common sense instead of instincts.
Conclusion: Philosophical Concept of Ethics as a Thing in Itself Hence, it can be concluded that ethics not only works in the realm of philosophy as a single unit, but can also exist on its own as moral philosophy.
However, that does not mean that ethics can be viewed from different aspects and, therefore, its key tenets can be bent according to the specifics of a certain philosophical movement. On the contrary, ethics seems to be both an integral part of every philosophical movement and at the same time the element that cannot be changed or bent according to the key postulates of these movements.
Ethics poses a number of questions, and answering these questions is never easy; to make the matters worse, often it seems that it is impossible to find the only correct answer; every option will necessarily have its downsides and positive aspects, satisfying either one or another side of the argument. That being said, one must admit that ethical issues remain some of the most disputable elements of philosophy.
Works Cited Pereboom, Deck. “A Defense of Free Will.” The Elements of Philosophy. Ed. Tamar Szabṓ Gendel, Susanna Siegel and Steven M. Cahn. Oxford, UK: Oxford University Press, 2008. 203–221. Print.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Ethics in Philosophy: Discussing Theories, Evaluating Key Concepts. In Search for the Truth by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Rachels, James. “Active and Passive Euthanasia.” The Elements of Philosophy. Ed. Tamar Szabṓ Gendel, Susanna Siegel and Steven M. Cahn. Oxford, UK: Oxford University Press, 2008. 650–653. Print.
Rachels, James and Stuart Rachels. “The Debate over Utilitarianism.” The Elements of Philosophy. Ed. Tamar Szabṓ Gendel, Susanna Siegel and Steven M. Cahn. Oxford, UK: Oxford University Press, 2008. 302–315. Print.
Rachels, James. “The case Against Free Will.” The Elements of Philosophy. Ed. Tamar Szabṓ Gendel, Susanna Siegel and Steven M. Cahn. Oxford, UK: Oxford University Press, 2008. 94–124. Print.
Shafer-Landau, Russ. “Ethical Relativism.” The Elements of Philosophy. Ed. Tamar Szabṓ Gendel, Susanna Siegel and Steven M. Cahn. Oxford, UK: Oxford University Press, 2008. 443–449. Print.
Stace, Walter Terence. “Compatibilism Defined.” Ed. Tamar Szabṓ Gendel, Susanna Siegel and Steven M. Cahn. Oxford, UK: Oxford University Press, 2008. 222–228. Print.
Reward Management Model in Firm and Staff Relationship Proposal best essay help: best essay help
Introduction For any firm to achieve its goals, the firm’s top management must cultivate a relationship between the firm and the staff members and establish a reward management model, which will assist the firm to meet the dynamic needs of both the staff members and the top management.
The company trains and expects the staff members to work for a long time in the company as they perform their tasks in an efficient way as agreed in their performance contracts. The firm expects the staff members to work with minimum supervision, to innovate and diligently learn necessary skills in the course of their work.
On the other hand, the staff members expect the employer to grant them favorable pay, proper working environment and just treatment at all times as agreed by the two parties and as guided by any regulations or statutes relating to employer-employee relation.
Air Arabia started its operations in 2003 following a directive from His Highness Doctor Sheikh Sultan Bin Mohamed Al Qassimi (Air Arabia). The firm later became a company limited by liability through incorporation. Air Arabia has two hubs with one of the hubs in its headquarters in Sharjah International Airport in the United Arab Emirates while the other hub is in Casablanca, Morocco (Air Arabia).
The firm has more than 57 destinations specifically in Middle East, North Africa, Asia and Europe (Air Arabia).
Problem of the Study
The reward management model is a crucial part of any modern company’s infrastructure since the company must operate through making maximum use of the employees (Ignited Thrust towards Accelerated Growth). As such, staff satisfaction and the reward model are crucial factors for a company to realize its goals.
The model is a systematic method of gathering and analyzing data concerning jobs with the aim of achieving internal equity (Smith).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Air Arabia has had a very high staff turnover. Such staff turnover is detrimental to the firm since the firm uses resources to train its staff. It affects the smooth running of the firm. Staff turnover disrupts continuity and this translates into financial and reputational losses. As such, the company must do everything possible to avert such high staff turnover.
The study relies on the believe that Air Arabia can avert such staff turnover and boost the morale of its employees by putting in place a proper reward system that will cater for the needs of the employees. The following are the research questions: How does reward model assist to achieve organizational goals and avert high staff turnover? Are rewards within a company able to boost employees’ performance? Lastly, which is the best reward model for an organization?
The study will include both qualitative and quantitative approaches to ensure that all the necessary information is in place for thorough analysis to yield informed conclusions. There will be a review of available literature on reward systems backed by the findings of this study. The study will administer questionnaires to acquire quantitative data while face-to-face interviews will yield qualitative data.
Limitations of the Study
It will be hard to approach all Air Arabia employees because of the nature of their work. In addition, the staff members work in numerous countries and this presents a difficulty in reaching them.
The study will provide reasons for the high turnover of staff and recommend to the firm the necessary steps required to avert such staff turnover in the future. The analysis from this study and the available literature will enable the researcher to make objective conclusions and recommendations to the firm.
Conclusion Reward strategies are a prerequisite to good performance by any firm. As such, the management must fully understand the reward model and the needs of the staff members to retain them for longer in the firm.
Works Cited Air Arabia. “Background”. 2013. Web. .
We will write a custom Proposal on Reward Management Model in Firm and Staff Relationship specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Ignited Thrust towards Accelerated Growth. “Reward Management Model”. 2013. Web.
Smith, Robert II. “Models of Reward Management”. 2013. Web.
Phenomenology Of Mind: Upholding The Philosophy Essay college application essay help
Introduction Hegel’s interpretation of the world in his Phenomenology of Mind focuses on the ‘idealist form’. He asserts that his concept of idealism requires a subject to assume an identity of both thought and being in order to acquire an understanding of the world. This reasoning capacity possessed by the subject creates an innate knowledge that is known as ‘absolute idealism’. This paper supports Hegel’s argument based on three premises.
First, the notion that man is reduced to self-consciousness and that the human consciousness is identified with objectivity is brought to fore. Secondly, the author of this paper agrees with Hegel on the issue that it is actually the role of philosophy to resolve the differences within the human consciousness through Absolutism. Finally, the fact that the course of negation ensures that the free will of existence paves way for a conventional correlation with other selves in an effective unity.
Objection To The Notion That Man Is Reduced To Self-Consciousness Hegel maintains that consciousness is not affronted by mere alienated objectivity but rather by ‘objectivity as such’ with the result that the consciousness itself becomes estranged from that objectivity. Karl Marx on the other hand seeks to preserve the thought of estrangement in a more determinate logic. According to Marx, what brings about the alienated objectivity surrounds the circumstances in which the particular alienation has occurred.
It is therefore not as a consequence of nature of objectivity as such that it has assumed the ‘peculiar’ eminence. Marx’s contention has elicited some reactions from his fellow philosophers regarding the notion brought to fore by Hegel. Consciousness is affronted by objectivity as such. According to them, it equates entities to something alien or ‘other’. The advancement of the phenomenology portrays the exclusion of such objectivity.
Hegel states that in progressing towards its true being, consciousness will eventually eliminate the facade of being burdened with something alien. Therefore, it is contended that Hegel’s objectivity is as a result of consciousness as an alien or ‘other’ hence something that is inherently ‘alienated’. There is also the connotation that Hegel’s phenomenology is antagonistic to objectivity. The connotation relies on the assertion by Hegel that consciousness is affronted by objectivity as such.
Reply To The Objection That Man Is Reduced To Self-Consciousness The problem with the above objection is the fact that it comes to an erroneous conclusion from this contention about Hegel’s opening argument.
The fact that objectivity is seen to start at the beginning as alien does not necessary imply that eliminating the façade of being burdened with an alien entity gives way to the obliteration of objectivity as such. It is actually possible that the burden is eliminated without getting rid of objectivity as well. Marx himself does not expressly contend that the ultimate solution to entities from which we are alienated is by only getting rid of them.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Rather, the alienation can be conquered and as a result brought to an agreement with the entities in question. For example, in his early works, Marx illustrates how individuals have become alienated from their property as a result of privatization. His solution is to reinstate the individuals’ cherished connections to their property in a rather rational manner. Why is Hegel faulted in his attempt to treat alienation in that same manner?
That is, as something to be conquered without necessarily having to eliminate the other. The only obvious distinction between the two philosophers is that Marx on the one hand presupposes that a non-alienated situation precedes the alienation such that the prior notion of harmony seems to be the only acceptable and genuine solution.
For Marx therefore, he probably assumes that for Hegel’s consciousness to be burdened with something alien, it means that Hegel actually believes this alienation to be intrinsic in objectivity as such. Nonetheless, though it seems that Hegel implies that objectivity is actually a problem, this is not the case. Taking objectivity and alienation as primarily coextensive does not necessarily mean that objectivity and alienation should be treated as such.
The course taken by consciousness to eliminate the façade of being burdened with something ‘other’ as contended in the objection is also considered. In the phenomenology of Mind, this course assumes the structure of cognition that leads to and becomes a component of ‘absolute knowledge’. This appears to be somewhat logical. Entities will appear alien precisely to the point that they become rationally incomprehensible to us.
Therefore, for this alienation to be conquered, it is not of necessity to eliminate the entities but rather familiarize ourselves with them. Such knowledge safeguards the objectivity of what is actually ‘known’ despite its primary peculiarity. Taken this way, it is therefore imperative to argue that phenomenology does not in itself encourage the connotation raised in the objection.
The main issue with the objection is the fact that it actually considers Hegel to be furnishing us with common information of how consciousness correlates to objectivity. As a matter of fact, Hegel believes that consciousness only correlates to the theistic objectivity. Therefore, by overcoming the entity of consciousness, Hegel refers only to religious consciousness. Therefore, this response supports Hegel’s conclusion that man is reduced to the notion of self consciousness.
Objection To The Notion That Philosophy Reconciles Human Consciousness On the issue of idealism, Hegel maintains that resistance and separation need to be reconciled and that the role of reconciliation falls on philosophy by inception of Absolute. Kant argues that pure concepts cannot be taken as the components of reality. For him, he attributes the importance of pure concepts to epistemology rather than metaphysics. According to him, he states that knowledge entail the sensory component, in which he argues that the mind remains inactive, and the rational component that consist of an active synthesized mind.
We will write a custom Essay on Phenomenology Of Mind: Upholding The Philosophy specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Therefore, our knowledge is influenced in part by the mind and thought. Kant’s transcendental idealism entail considering the fact that the mind is only aware of only phenomena that inherently appear within it and cannot be acknowledged at first hand. He seeks to bridge rationalism and empiricism. Rationalism allows knowledge to be obtained solely by reason before an experience while empiricism provides that knowledge is achieved through senses only after an experience.
It is therefore his contention that whilst the sensory experience allows us to be aware of what is going on around us, it is also possible to ascertain the structure that they must assume before that particular experience. According to him, there exist ‘things in themselves’ other than mere awareness and thoughts in our minds.
Kant’s proponents argue that Hegel’s disagreement with Kant’s epistemology emanates from Kant’s comprehension of consciousness as a sense of mind. If consciousness is taken to be a sense of mind, then it would result to the assessment of its own sense leading to an infinite degeneration. Instead, Hegel maintains that consciousness is obviously progressive and an idea in itself. The notion that consciousness occurs from some meticulous substance that is present in our representation is thereby discarded.
It is contended that self-consciousness is not as a result of associating each and every representation with consciousness. Rather, the same is achieved if the representations are systematically adjoined to each other on the one hand and being conscious of their fusion on the other. Hence, it is only through the combination of various representations in a single consciousness that leads to the depiction of identity of consciousness.
Accordingly, it is contended that space and time are the pure structures of intuition. If diverse structures of intuition are achieved, then the experiences of the human being will have to compose a harmonious universe so as to attain self consciousness.
Further, the question that arises on the concept of the finite and infinite is whether the two can be enjoined without disbanding each other. The gap that seem to separate the two concepts inevitably tends to amalgamate and in the process reduce one of them. This tends to deny the significance of each other.
Reply To Objection That Philosophy Reconciles Human Consciousness The objection raised above is generally weak and cannot be fathomed. The mind associates itself with resistances, disagreements and separation while reason seeks to conquer these in various cultural-historical epochs. The Absolute therefore gives way to consciousness.
In Schelling view, if Absolute is to be transformed, the reflection of the predicament must be put into consideration. He poses that the reflection acts as a perceptive and therefore brings out resistance and separation. Perception should therefore be enjoined with transcendental intuition. By distinguishing oneself from Schelling view, it is important to note that transcendental intuition does not necessarily mean supernatural intuition. It is based on reason.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Phenomenology Of Mind: Upholding The Philosophy by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Through the explanation of human reason, Hegel creates a clear definition of both nature and spirit. This is what Hegel refers to as the ‘philosophy of right’. Through this philosophy, an interrelationship between the subjects through a mutual recognition is achieved.
This concept seeks to verify the quest for human reason in a bid to understand their subjective existence within an object. Further, Hegel takes different approach from his predecessors by emphasizing the need to understand the notions of reality and practicability hence solidifying his argument.
The concept of idealism that Hegel brings out is well articulated and his argument on the same is fully supported. It is not in doubt that the purpose of integrating a philosophical query and knowledge is to generate an idea. His argument that various concepts and phenomena need to be explained and that the explanation is given in form of science is upheld.
Philosophy is therefore equated to science. This is justified in the fact that it is important to create a valuable hierarchy of things that validates the origin of each and every object and subject. His argument also brings to fore the concept of teleological explanation that develops the idealism approach.
The idealism approach explains the various types of consciousness that explains the phenomena of mind. The concept of idealism that Hegel brings out is well articulated and his argument on the same is fully supported. It is not in doubt that the purpose of integrating a philosophical query and knowledge is to generate an idea. It is for this reason that various concepts and phenomena need to be explained and the explanation given in form of science.
Philosophy is therefore equated to science. This is justified in the fact that it is important to create a valuable hierarchy of things that validates the origin of each and every object and subject. This assertion brings to fore the concept of teleological explanation that develops the idealism approach. The idealism approach therefore explains the various types of consciousness that explains the phenomena of mind.
Objection To The Notion That Negation Is The Producing Principle Though Hegel is commended for portraying negativity as a self-sufficient positive, his argument is said to be conventional and ideally stuck at the juncture of the ‘negation of the negation’. Marx argues that Hegel fails to keep his own promise of ensuring a true notion of negation of the negation. This is attributed to the fact that the notion in itself is lacking and therefore inadequate.
The speculation and self-substantiation inherent in the negation of the negation is a speculation that is in itself uncertain and one that is still distraught with its opposing self. That is, the notion in itself seeks some kind of verification that is not obtainable through its own subsistence. This line of argument is of particular concern as it permits a more optimistic elucidation in Hegel’s argument.
The problem of Hegel’s notion of negation is therefore attributed to atheism. The trouble with atheism is that as an inference to human race, it is still integrated with the theism that that is so against. According to Marx, the thought of the Supreme Being (God) is the original negation and atheism negates this negation. What is then required is to precede atheism to achieve the constructive consciousness.
Reply To The Objection That Negation Is The Producing Principle The objection raised to the effect that atheistic humanism should be rejected as it is infatuated with its opposite does not hold water. Consciousness is in itself self-motivating and regularly conceives a dissimilarity that attempts to conquer that same dissimilarity. In the event that consciousness, in the process of this self-assessment, comes to the realization that the two moments cannot match up, it becomes obvious that it has to modify its data in order to achieve its precision.
Nevertheless, the two moments are so intertwined such that the modification of one automatically modifies the other. Thus, both the principle and knowledge becomes unsuccessful hence creating a new substance. The substance created is said to portray itself as ‘not in-itself’. Though the substance is acknowledged, consciousness perceives it as being ‘not in-itself’ hence the principle fails.
The unsuccessful nature is what is known as the negation of consciousness. This particular negation is what Hegel calls the determinate negation. The fact that consciousness perceives itself as fictitious does not necessarily render it a negative process. The negation therefore becomes a negation in itself. The new creation of consciousness therefore highlights the nature of total knowledge itself.
The Theoretical Observation One of the main theoretical observations evident in Hegel’s discussion is the notion of self-consciousness. He equates phenomenology to the discipline of consciousness. It is observed that Hegel commences with natural intuitive consciousness and then identifies its dialectical progression until it attains absolute knowledge. According to Hegel’s Phenomenology of Mind, self-consciousness assumes the structure of desire.
He observes that the ‘self’ interests itself with the exterior entities but assumes some kind of satisfaction through the distinctiveness of desire. However, this approach of desire disintegrates when other selves are involved. The occurrence of the ‘other’ therefore becomes important in creating self-consciousness. A developed self-consciousness can only be achieved when the ‘self’ identifies itself and other selves.
The occurrence of the other self thus serves as a provision for self-consciousness. Reason is also brought to being by a fusion of consciousness. He develops the concept of reason through a sequence of dialectical stages. In the first stage, reason achieves an indication of its own likeness in nature. Secondly, the science of formal logic and pragmatic psychology is implanted in it and finally, as a manifestation in itself in various aspects of the universe.
This argument takes a significant approach in explaining the power of consciousness through reason in the society. This self-consciousness embodies the concept of free will that acts as a unifying factor. To understand Hegel’s argument, it is better to dwell on how most things are often defined. All definitions, it is argued, rely on the dichotomy of words. Hegel takes a different approach.
In his phenomenology of spirit, he examines the concept through the notion of self-consciousness. In his argument, he contends that humans are able to learn more about themselves based on their relationships and continues to equate self-consciousness to desire. He asserts that self-definition should be taken as a consummation of self acceptance as opposed to a restraint against each other. What Hegel contends here is that definition is based on the freedom of self-transcendence.
Hegel draws the progression of consciousness from the barbaric form that fails to meet the threshold of ‘realism’. For example, the society is placed under the leadership of a master and his servants. Each and every one of them needs to possess a kind of consciousness in order to coexist. The master therefore assumes mastery self-consciousness.
This consciousness helps him to draw some kind of attention to himself hence bringing with it a kind of fear to the outside world. The servant who assumes the servant self-consciousness is obedient in nature and learns to endure all the hardship that comes with his position.
Significance Of The Argument The dialectic of master and slave is an important aspect in towards the achievement of self-conscious liberty. This dialectic depicts the account of the self consciousness achieved through interpersonal affiliations experienced in the course of labour. The argument plays a significant role in building the social and individual development that brings to light the need of a civil society policy. This policy is created in order to manage the predisposition towards alienation and poverty in the modern society.
Hegel’s assertion gives an option to the rising disagreements and disasters of market societies in the current state. His argument confronts the eccentric and ahistorical assumptions of the contemporary laissez-faire convention. A clear understanding of Hegel’s theory furnishes us with a practical idea for future labour system. It integrates an evaluation of the current catastrophic Classical liberalism and modern market.
Conclusion The Phenomenology of mind is considered to be one of the greatest works done by Hegel. This paper supports the argument presented in his work and relates the said arguments to our present lives. His notion of creating an ‘ideal’ model is based on logical science. His central purpose in this work is to establish a ‘determinate being’ through positive means as opposed to negation of self-consciousness. He therefore upholds the notion of freedom to act as a justification to our fundamental beliefs in matters of equality and reason.
St. Aquinas and Averroes Essay essay help site:edu
Table of Contents Introduction
Introduction Summa Theologica, is one of greatest literature written by St. Thomas Aquinas. He focused on issues concerning philosophy and religion. Despite the fact that he cited principles from many religions, Summa Theologica is highly associated with Catholic belief. Decisive Treatise, was written by Averroes and focused on outlining Islamic laws based on philosophy.
Averroes acknowledged teachings of Aristotle, but criticized works of Plato. Notably, Decisive Treatise has been described as a commentary that is not in complete agreement with Islamic laws.
The essay will focus on comparing Summa Theologica with Decisive Treatise. Nature of doctrine, names of God and His existence are among the questions that will be analyzed in Summa Theoligica. On the other hand, Decisive treatise will attempt to answer why religious scriptures are not interpreted to majority.
Discussion According to Aquinas, sacred doctrine is essential in life of a person, since salvation is based on divine revelation. There are critics that, scriptures advice people not to worry themselves over what is beyond their reach. According to teachings by Aristotle, theology is founded on the intellectual reasoning and reflection on beings and God, the same concepts emphasized in philosophy. In this regard, there is no need for further knowledge on Philosophy.
However, Aquinas states that men are guided by God who reveals to them hidden truth. There are postulations that sacred doctrine is not a science, since it lacks material evidence. Further, it talks of individual actions like in instance of Abraham while sciences talk of general issues. Aquinas states that sacred doctrine is a science, since it presents moral principles that are practical. He talks of sacred doctrine being higher science and not guided by human reason.
Contrary to this perception, Averroes argues that religion dictates on the use of reason and intellect to study the unknowns using the known. While Aquinas argues that knowledge about God can only happen within the level of human understanding, Averroes believes that with an understanding of the existing demonstrations about God, man can acquire all knowledge about the Originator. Concept used by Aquinas and Averroes, is to make people comprehend essence of eternal life (Leaman 45).
In addition, there are postulations that sacred doctrine cannot be described as one science, since it talks of different objects that are not in same category. According to Aquinas, sacred doctrine is one science since it talks of God or objects related to Him. Aquinas states that, sacred doctrine is a practical and speculative science.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More As a result, sacred doctrine is more complex than other sciences. Religious scriptures advise believers to act according to divine teachings. Notably, divine law entailed in doctrine shows that it encourages believers to be practical and not only theoretical.
Aquinas postulates that, existence of God is self evident. He provides two meanings of self evidence. First version is that we may be aware of existence of something, while on second account we may not be aware at all. In this regard, the fact that we do not acknowledge or know that God exists does not mean that He is not there. Further, Aquinas states that we can demonstrate existence of God through effects-causes mechanism.
In this regard, every situation is caused by something that cannot be infinite. We can use effects to trace causes, which cannot be infinite. He uses various ways to prove that God exists. Motion present in organisms is triggered by something that is not in a potential state. Further, he uses possibility-necessity model to prove that there can never be a time when nothing ever existed (Etienne 43). In this regard, things would not come out of nowhere and begin existing.
The two philosophers differ when it comes to the concept formation. According to Averroes, concept develops from interaction with either a particular object or its likeness. He argues that for an individual to understand about the existence of God, the concept of the artisan has to be applied at which man has to appreciate art in order to appreciate the products of art, leading to appreciation of the artisan.
He therefore argues that in intellect reasoning, man needs to have a starting point, and that is to understand other beings. His idea of concept formation believes in the presence of a known, in order to understand the unknown. However, Aquinas argues that there is no need of the known to understand more about the unknown. He argues that within human comprehension, what is known about God is the same as what is unknown, meaning that man must live within the divine truth revealed at his level of understanding.
He states that God is self evident, despite the fact that we know it or not. The fact that names of God are given based on his operations and not his nature, opinion about him can be structured by not necessarily possession of knowledge about him, but rather by nature that is made known to us.
Further, Aquinas states that we can give a name to God. Despite the fact that there are perceptions that some scriptures forbid us to give God names, words symbolize ideas. Aquinas states that, names given are likely to lack divine meaning but are based on human reasoning within their levels of understanding. Despite the fact that we fail to understand role of God, we can describe him based on nature available.
We will write a custom Essay on St. Aquinas and Averroes specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More On the controversial issue of whether names given to God are substantial, Aquinas gives in depth explanation. Negative names given to God are not substantial, in that they do not degrade Him but rather show that person involved is a weak believer. Further, positive references do not necessarily describe spiritual essence of God. However, Aquinas states that despite the fact that names given are likely to underestimate spiritual essence, they display human reason of divine interpretation.
Aquinas talks of names given to God as failing to apply to Him in literal sense. Despite the fact that names give to God result from relationship between him and creatures, God is perfect while creatures are imperfect. Further, names given to God come from nature which means that they cannot apply to him literally.
Notably, names given by creatures to Creator are based on their reasoning capacity and fit God more than they can describe them. In this regard, names given to God can be referred to as belonging to him but failing to literally apply to him. He states that names given to God are not synonymous, since they are formed based on human reasoning (Etienne 24). Divine knowledge is less known by humans, which means that they are not in a position to come up with names that could be used in place of spiritual ones.
Aquinas rules out the possibility of equity between God and man. The issue is presented by concerns in certain citations from scriptures. For example, the fact that man is made of God’s image makes him similar to him. Aquinas, states that God cannot be univocal to creatures.
Despite the fact that names used to refer to him are used in praising human beings, He can never be equal to them. It should be noted that, names used by creatures are limited to power of reason. In this regard, the word wise could be used to show interpretation based on human essence and not divine knowledge (Etienne 29).
Averroes refers to Islamic law as being a doctrine that teaches true practice and true science. In this regard, he agrees with Aquinas who describes sacred doctrine as being a science that is speculative and practical. True science is described as knowledge of eternal happiness and sorrow.
He talks of Islamic law being a practical science, which can involve body activities or soul issues like honesty. In this regard, the law is practical since it either bans or upholds practices of believers. Both philosophers concur on the ability to have scientific interpretation of theology in order to have a better understanding of God (Leaman 64).
According to Averroes, divine law is based on demonstrative, rhetorical and dialect arguments. Notably, Aquinas acknowledges that sacred doctrine is a matter of argument.
Not sure if you can write a paper on St. Aquinas and Averroes by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More According to him, different sciences adopt different principles in explanation of their theory, Aquinas states that, argumentative nature of sacred doctrine is meant to explain occurrence of other sciences that are limited to human reason. Averroes uses two approaches in teaching of divine law.
The use of dialogue in Aquinas reasoning takes the form of argumentation, at which he presents some objections in figurative form, and later developing responses to each of the objections in a series of proofs.
This approach makes it easier for Aquinas to explain meaning of scriptures and the existence of God. Notably, dialogue mechanism used by Averroes can be compared with issue of names given to God in Summa Theologica. For instance, concept and concurrence of argumentative reasoning are crucial in determining names given to God.
Averroes acknowledges the fact that demonstration is essential in divine law. Notably, Aquinas states that we can be able to demonstrate that God exists. According to Averroes, interpretations of scriptures should not be done to majority since not all possess rhetoric, demonstrative and dialectal skills (Leaman 67).
Despite the fact that divine law should be taught to all, caution should be taken to ensure that the chosen few are not compromised. Since majority lack possession of three main ways of argument interpretations, teaching is done in a way that both concept and concurrence are maximized.
According to Averroes, dialect and rhetorical approaches are widely used in divine laws, since they have highest level of concept formation and concurrence. Focus is on real objects, as opposed to images and interpretation of scriptures is highly discouraged. In fact, those who interpret such scriptures are regarded as unbelievers, since conclusions are drawn on issues that are accepted.
In all methods of law applied, those who interpret scriptures are minority since they possess demonstrative skills. In this regard, majority are expected to take teachings as presented by minority. There is a significant inconsistency between the arguments presented by the two philosophers. While Averroes justifies scriptural interpretations on pure intellect, Aquinas cites God’s intervention in theological scientific interpretations, since humans cannot exceed their reasoning capacities.
Conclusion Summa Theologica and Decisive Treatise, acknowledge essence of divine law in science of philosophy. There are instances where there are similarities, while in others there are differences. Despite the different religions, both scholars have attempted to cite information from many religious books. Revelation or divine intervention has been found to be essential in relationship between God and his creatures.
People require understanding of divine meaning, on issues that are limited by power of reason before practice of divine law. Focus is on ensuring that concept is formed in a way that will boost level of concurrence. In fact, Averroes focuses on encouraging true practice and science by ensuring that majority are taught divine law. Scripture interpretation is not given to majority, to reduce incidence of rejection. On the other hand, Aquinas advocates for necessity of divine intervention that will increase essence of salvation.
Works Cited Etienne, Gilson. The Christian Philosophy of Saint Thomas Aquinas: Summa Theoligica, Notre Dame: University of Notre Dame Press. 1994. Print.
Leaman, Olivier. An Introduction to Classical Islamic Philosophy: Decisive Treatise, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. 2002. Print.
Physician Assisted Suicide Essay essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu
Table of Contents Introduction
PAS and moral, ethical and religious considerations
The Case for PAS
The Case against PAS
Introduction In the recent past there have been calls to legalise Physician Assisted Suicide (PAS). There are several arguments given to justify this course of action. In this paper I will outline why it is morally wrong to advocate for the legalization of PAS. I will then analyse the arguments given by the proponents of PAS. Finally I will show why the arguments supporting PAS are not sufficient to warrant such acts.
PAS and moral, ethical and religious considerations There are three types of PAS. In voluntary PAS, the patient explicitly asks the doctor to end their life. There is also involuntary PAS, where the patient does not want to die and the doctor performs the act without their knowledge. There is also non-voluntary PAS where the patient’s wishes are unknown due to the person’s unconscious state so the family decides what is best for the patient. PAS is only legal in the State of Oregon. It has not been legalized in other States in the country despite the great arguments advanced by different scholars.
For a doctor to participate in PAS, it will require him to break the Hippocrates oath taken when they start medical school. As per the oath, the individual is required to be a healer. He or she is expected to prescribe medical solutions that will prolong life and provide relief to the patient. Legalizing PAS will create issues of trust between the doctors and patients. The patients may become fearful in situations where the expenses of the hospital are high. They may feel that the doctors may take the lives of patients as a cost cutting measure.
Legalizing the procedure will also cause the family and friends of the patient to have great moral and ethical dilemmas. What will the caretakers do when the doctor is not around and the patient requests for assisted suicide? If the legal dose is administered and death does not come quickly, the caregiver may resort to more aggressive means like putting a paper bag over the person’s head and suffocating them.
Such individuals will suffer great guilt and remorse and will take longer even to grieve the death of their loved one (Emmanuel, Fairclough and Emmanuel, 2462). From a religious point of view, life is viewed as a gift of God. It is considered to be a sacred gift. No individual should take the place of God to decide the point at which life should end.
Individuals should only be given a choice when it comes to accepting medication or surgery which is unlikely to provide a cure and in addition will cause a great financial burden to the family or the community. Caring for the sick should be seen as a great opportunity for young people to give back to the family and the community.
The aged and elderly should have their needs addressed. Their needs are not just physical needs but also emotional and psychological needs. There should be the development of a strong bond where there is a lot of nourishment and compassion given to the terminally ill.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The Case for PAS There are arguments that the terminal patients who request for PAS are suffering from intense pain that cannot really be treated. They therefore feel it is better if they died than continue living on. It is argued that individuals have different thresholds for pain. There are those who have to take massive doses of opium while others would be relieved with only adequate doses of acetaminophen. There are the patients who suffer from severe pain and there is no medication that can lessen the pain (Gill, 32).
The terminal diseases also destroy the organs of the body and someone ends up looking like a ghost of their former selves. In certain types of cancer, the toes of the individual become darker and at times fall off. There may also be secretions from the face and neck. There are also physiological conditions such as shortness of breath, choking, diarrhoea and nausea which cannot really be treated by using the available medicines in the market. They are recurrent symptoms.
There are also terminal diseases where there is no cure or hope of recovery. The doctors have already informed them that they will die in the next six or eight months. If death is inevitable for the patients, then the patients should have the right to choose a “good” death. Death that arises out of the extreme symptoms of certain terminal diseases cannot be classified as a natural death.
There are patients who have lost the ability to perform some of their basic functions. They have involuntary bowel movements. They cannot do anything by themselves. They have to utterly depend on someone to do everything for them. The inability to have independence is not only physical but it extends to economic situations. The terminally
ill find that they cannot work therefore they do not have any income stream to support themselves. They therefore feel that they are a burden to their caretakers emotionally and financially. They feel that the time of active contribution to their homes and the society is over.
In research studies carried out, it was discovered that even in hospitals where there was great palliative care a significant percentage of the patients had taken certain medications with the hope of hastening their deaths. They have therefore made a choice that they do not want to continue living. This shows that the PAS requests are not based on the fact that the end of life care administered is substandard. Even where quality care is administered the patients have made a conscious decision about their future.
Another argument advanced is that an individual has the right to choose whether they want to die in dignity or not. They do not want to become completely dependent on their family and friends. They do not want to watch their bodies getting disfigured every day from diseases which are incurable.
We will write a custom Essay on Physician Assisted Suicide specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More They know that they will lose their mental faculties and even functional abilities. They will also be vulnerable since they will not have control over their external environments. They will not be able to perform basic functions. They will have no control of their bowel movements. In light of all these conditions, the proponents of PAS argue that people should be allowed to have choice and autonomy in their lives.
Finally, it is argued that the decision of PAS is done between two consensual adults. There is no coercion. The doctor and patient are not being forced to do anything. It is two adults who know the matter being discussed. It is voluntary PAS therefore it should not be termed as wrong whether on legal or moral grounds.
The Case against PAS The arguments supporting legalization of PAS are hollow. The truth of the matter is that the requests for PAS usually come from patients who are depressed. It stems out of psychological distress rather than physical stress. Depression is one of those conditions where the patient may desire for an early death. The elderly frequently find themselves in positions where they are neglected causing them to feel lonely and neglected. The caregivers may also make them feel that they are a burden.
It would be better for doctors to find ways of detecting depression and treating it instead of looking for ways to legalise PAS. These are self-destructive wishes of the patients which need to be addressed adequately. If the patients were in an environment where they are receiving competent care, the requests for PAS would be minimal (Foley, 54) .
There is also the slippery argument against PAS. There is the danger that if PAS is legalized, it would now become the norm instead of being used for only exceptional cases. It would eventually be used for the disabled, the chronically ill and the psychological depressed. There are healthy individuals who do not want to continue living. They have lost hope and want to die.
If the argument that an individual should have access to PAS due to individual choice and autonomy suffices, then it would mean that PAS would be administered even to the mentally unstable. It may be argued that in Oregon before PAS is administered, a
psychological evaluation is carried out to rule out patients suffering from depression. It is however a risk that should not be ignored since they are patients who have different forms of depression and it may not be detected.
If we look at the intensity of pain argument, there are patients who have conditions where they suffer from extreme pain. Will these patients also be eligible for PAS? What will be the criterion used to include certain patients and exclude others?
Not sure if you can write a paper on Physician Assisted Suicide by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More There are patients who do not want to be a financial or emotional burden to their family and friends. They are frustrated with the fact that they cannot work and do their basic activities without the support of someone. They want to be allowed to die. Is it only terminal ill patients who experience such frustrations? They are people suffering from severe forms of disability. They have to be assisted to do almost everything by their caregivers. Their hospital visits are costly.
If PAS is allowed for the terminally ill patients, the doctors will be placed in a tough position since their predictions on life expectancy is what may be used as a yard stick. There are times the predictions are true however there have been situations where the patient’s body proves resilient and the patient ends up living for longer periods. Looking at the arguments for PAS based on physical, physiological and mental grounds, they do not provide sufficient justification at all for the legalization of PAS.
Conclusion I began by outlining the moral, ethical and religious arguments against PAS. Doctors are employed to provide medical care and relief. They have taken an oath to do so. Life
is sacred and no one should be allowed to play God. I have highlighted the arguments supporting PAS and shown why they are weak and unacceptable. Experts should be looking for medical solutions for suicidal depression and severe pain. PAS is a shortcut and refusal to deal with the problems facing the terminally ill.
Works Cited Emmanuel Ezekiel, Dianne Fairclough and Linda Emmanuel. “Attitudes and Desires Related to Euthanasia and Physician Assisted Suicide among Terminally Ill Patients and their Caregivers.” Journal of the American Medical Association, 284(2000): 2460-2468. Print.
Foley, Kathleen. “Competent Care for the Dying Instead of Physician-Assisted Suicide.” New England Journal of Medicine 336(1997):54-58. Print.
Gill, Michael. “Is the Legalization of Physician-Assisted Suicide Compatible with Good End-of-Life Care?” Journal of Applied Philosophy, 26.1(2009): 27–45. Print.
The Value of Liberal Arts Education in College or University Essay college essay help near me
Table of Contents Introduction
The Value of Liberal Arts
Introduction A key component of our modern society is its educational system. Through this system, individuals are provided with the tools necessary to play a part in the growth and ultimate advancement of the society. Citizens and governments all over the world have recognized the value of education.
The number of institutes of higher learning in the country has increased significantly and efforts have been made to ensure that more students attend college and university. However, the cost of higher education has risen significantly and students are pressured to focus on courses that promise high returns. The demand for career-related education has led to the undervaluing of Liberal Arts Education by most parents and governments.
Instead, emphasis has been given to science and business related courses, which have an obvious economic payoff. This paper will argue that liberal arts education should be encouraged since it adds value to society by offering the ideal college experience that promotes intellectual growth, personal development, and the acquisition of a wide range of skills by the student.
The Value of Liberal Arts Liberal arts promote the development of higher-order intellectual skills in students. The student acquires intellectual capacities such as the ability to solve problems with multiple solutions, critical thinking, and skillful use of technology. Good thinking habits are acquired by the student and he/she is able to identify and grasp new concepts.
The ability of an individual to engage in problem solving activities is sharpened by liberal arts education. Harris documents that a liberal arts education assists the student to think in an ordered fashion therefore increasing his/her ability to do intellectual work (1). An important fact is that this skill can be used in a wide range of settings since the knowledge of organized solutions is not confined to any specific discipline.
Liberal arts education helps students avoid the narrow vision that overemphasizes specialization causes. Career driven education often leads to compartmentalization as students are made to focus entirely on their expert courses.
This specialization is caused by the idea that students only need to undertake the courses that lead to work and money. This habit leads to the development of narrow world-views and a tunnel vision (Kazanjian 59). Students who are subjected to this form of education lack the fundamental skills that can make them ready for new challenges that might arise in their profession.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Hart asserts that employers are against education that only instills specialized skills and knowledge in the college graduates (1). Instead, they prefer education that is well rounded in nature and enhances the intellectual skills of the student. Liberal arts education provides this well-rounded education since it recognizes that a student might have to deal with issues that are not related to his/her area of specialization.
A liberal arts education offers practical intellectual foundation necessary for students to be successful in the modern work environment. Today’s workplace is complex in nature and the worker is required to have some critical knowledge and skills in order to be more productive.
Forest demonstrates that managers in major corporations are looking for employees who can communicate efficiently, solve problems independently, and show effective use of technology (402). This wide range of traits cannot be acquired through education that only focuses on career driven courses. A liberal arts education provides the student with all these desirable traits therefore making them competitive in the work environment.
The liberal arts education gives the student a global perspective and promotes effective citizenship. The knowledge of human cultures provided by this education is especially significant in today’s globalized world.
The career-driven education provided to most students does not prepare them to be successful in the global economy. Research by Hart indicates that most recent college graduates lack the skills necessary to operate at the level of global economy (6). The liberal arts education offers the solution to this by providing college and university students with global competence.
A liberal arts education enhances innovation and creativity in the students. A key characteristic of liberal arts is providing knowledge in a wide variety of subjects. Harris asserts that the wide range of knowledge stimulates creativity in the student (3). Students are able to come up with ideas inspired by a wide range of materials.
The knowledge on many subjects also acts as motivation for the students to be creative. For this reason, graduates who have a liberal arts education program are more likely to contribute to innovation in the workplace environment. Hart suggests that employers are keen to find such innovative graduates (7).
We will write a custom Essay on The Value of Liberal Arts Education in College or University specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Liberal arts education promotes happiness and the enjoyment by life. This education recognizes that life is rich and that education can be a source of pleasure for the student. It therefore encourages students to appreciate art and see beauty in humanity. By studying poetry, literature, and historical characters student develops a deep appreciation of life.
Harris demonstrates that the enjoyment and happiness fostered by liberal art education are beneficial to the individual and the society (6). Happier individuals are more satisfied with their lives and are more likely to engage in activities for the good of their community. Happiness also contributes to higher work productivity since a happy person will have lower rates of depression and mental illnesses.
Liberal arts education helps in the development of good communication skills by the individual. Effective communication is the foundation of all relationships since it is the means through which human beings interact.
Good communication skills enable people to properly communicate their ideas and relate with others. Kazanjian asserts that for an organization to achieve its goals workers must learn how to communicate with each other effectively and treat each other with respect (62). The acquisition of good writing and reading skills is deemed integral to the future success of the individual. Students in liberal art programs are required to develop skills in writing and making oral presentations.
Forest reveals that students are helped to acquire the needed self-confidence to communicate effectively (402). Such students are better equipped to handle different situations in the real world environment. Hart declares that employers are looking for graduates who have good communication skills that will promote success in the work setting (7). These are the kind of graduates that liberal arts education produces.
Liberal art education enhances social skills of the individual and these social skills are integral in all social settings and work environments. Forest notes that liberal arts makes an emphasis on the significance of human relationships in all settings (402). Students are taught to demonstrate respect in all relationships.
This leads to the development of good personal and work relationships. Forest reveals that students with a liberal art education background show greater sensitivity to their fellow human beings and co-workers (Kazanjian 62). The liberal arts also encourage the individual to develop a sense of social responsibility. Exposure to a wide range of cultures promotes the appreciation of diversity.
Students are taught to not only respect differences but also appreciate them. By learning about various cultures and traditions, students develop an appreciation of diverse cultures. The moral standing of the individual is also promoted by the liberal arts. By studying the early philosophers, the sense of ethics and integrity in the student is promoted.
Not sure if you can write a paper on The Value of Liberal Arts Education in College or University by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Conclusion This paper is set out to argue that a liberal art education provides value to the student and the society. It began by noting that the perception that a liberal arts education leaves a student with few career options has contributed to the negative view of the value of this education by many members of the public.
The paper has demonstrated that liberal art education promotes the intellectual growth of the individual and encourages creativity. Contrary to popular belief, liberal arts education equips the student with the skills needed in the modern work place. The paper has revealed that liberal arts education is not concerned with developing skills that are focused on a particular career.
Instead, the education offered leads to the development of a well-rounded individual who has general knowledge and the intellectual skills necessary to function in a wide range of environments. The education also promotes personal growth and development of the student. Considering the many positive values of liberal art education, the public and governments should promote these programs in all institutes of higher learning.
Works Cited Forest, James. Higher Education in the United States: An Encyclopedia. NY: ABC-CLIO, 2002. Print.
Hart, Peter. Should Colleges Prepare Students To Succeed In Today’s Global Economy? Washington, DC: Peter Hart Research Associates, Inc., 2006. Print.
Harris, Robert. On the Purpose of a Liberal Arts Education. 14 Mar. 1991. Web.
Kazanjian, Michael. Learning Values Lifelong: From Inert Ideas to Wholes. Amsterdam: Rodipi, 2002, Print.
Leadership in General Electric Case Study a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Importance of Leadership at GE
Impact of Good Leadership at GE
The Best Leadership Styles at GE
Introduction General Electric (GE) is a large company that operates from the United States. According to Forbes Magazine, it is the second largest company in the world after JPMorgan Chase. Forbes compared the performance of GE with that of other companies in certain aspects like sales, market value and assets.
GE has different segments among them capital finance, energy infrastructure, consumer, technology infrastructure and industrial segments. In order to achieve its goals and remain competitive, GE requires sound leadership because without good leadership, the company would not be able to achieve its business goals. This essay focuses on leadership at GE.
Importance of Leadership at GE It is agreeable that the importance of leadership in any organization cannot be overlooked because organizations require collective effort to achieve their goals. Human nature is characterized by confusion and disagreements in the absence of a competent leader. This makes it difficult for organizations to achieve their goals.
Since GE is a company that is comprised of many workers who work towards achievement of a common goal, some form of leadership is essential. Although the need for leadership in organizations has been in existence for many years, its importance has increased due to changes in business activities. For instance, production methods have become complicated while specialization has increased.
A good and effective leader at GE would be like a dynamo. Such a leader would be responsible for generating energy that would enable workers to achieve organizational goals with ease. The success that GE has achieved so far is largely attributable to good leadership. Dynamic leadership is important because it plays an important role in boosting the morale of employees and ensuring that they achieve organizational goals (Nelson 4).
GE relies on good leadership to encourage workers to increase their performance through continuous efforts. The organization fully understands that forceful or authoritarian means are not suitable methods of achieving organizational success. Good leadership supports authority by creating influence and inspiring workers to take certain actions. It plays an important role in different managerial levels in the organization because without sound leadership, it is impossible for management to perform its functions.
While organizational structures play an important role in ensuring that organizations achieve set goals, they do not offer all relationships that are required by workers in an organization. Employees who have common interests are not bound by formal relationships because they aim at achieving organizational goals.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More As a result, informal relationships effectively regulate and control the behavior of workers. Good leadership ensures that there is cooperation between management and workers. This enhances beneficial collaboration, which is aimed at achieving organizational goals.
To achieve successful leadership, leaders should involve their subordinates in all decision making processes. This is because involving them in decision making processes makes them feel that their value in organizations is recognized. However, it is important for leaders to employ necessary powers in order to ensure that implementation of policies that have been designed is effective. Leaders should be able to give clear and understandable instructions to their subordinates in order to ensure that organizational goals are achieved.
Impact of Good Leadership at GE Good leadership at GE would impact the organization in different ways. The first way through which good leadership would impact GE is that motivation of workers would be increased. Good leaders have the ability to inspire the people they work with. This is because they have a solid understanding of business activities that an organization performs and things that motivate workers.
Good leaders use information about workers to design appropriate messages, meetings and other interactions to ensure that the workers work hard to achieve high results. This type of motivation helps organizations to achieve set goals because messages that are designed take into account workers’ needs (Iqbal 45).
The second impact of good leadership at GE is that the organization would experience a decrease in conflicts. Groups that lack effective leaders are characterized by persistent conflicts.
Employees engage in constant power struggles as they try to test the competence of leaders that are in charge of different operations. Effective leaders enjoy respect from other employees and this reduces unnecessary conflicts. In addition, good leaders possess excellent interpersonal communication skills, which enable them to resolve organizational conflicts.
The third impact of good leadership at GE is that the ability of the organization to retain its employees would be increased. Good leaders communicate transparently and constructively and this enables them to develop trust among their employees.
We will write a custom Case Study on Leadership in General Electric specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This would give employees at GE a voice and make them feel valued. As a result, the organization would reduce employee turnover since they would be satisfied. Effective leadership is among the most important things that employees consider before they build their loyalty to specific organizations. High employee turnover is harmful to organizations hence it should be avoided through effective leadership.
The fourth impact of good leadership at GE is that it would facilitate development of talent among employees. Good leaders identify ways of expanding their organizations through talent development. As a result, they strive to nurture employees who have talents in different fields.
They evaluate them thoroughly and provide constructive criticism, after which they initiate mentoring programs for those who portray potential for growth. This equips employees with adequate leadership skills, which makes it easy for a smooth organizational transition, when some leaders leave their leadership positions.
The fifth impact of good leadership is that GE would achieve better organization of different tasks and activities. A good leader is able to see a big picture of an organization and work hard to ensure that the organization succeeds. This helps him/her to conduct a keen evaluation of how things are done. A good leader notices problems and weaknesses in an organization and comes up with suitable solutions. Good leadership would therefore enable GE to achieve better organization of different tasks.
The Best Leadership Styles at GE There are different leadership styles that GE can use to achieve its objectives. The first type of leadership style that GE should adopt is democratic or participative leadership style. This is a type of leadership style that involves employees in decision making processes. Democratic leaders encourage employees to exercise creativity.
Democratic leadership style would be suitable at GE because it would increase job satisfaction among employees since they would take part in decision making processes. In addition, it would make it possible for them to enhance their skills in different areas.
Employees feel motivated, when they take full control of their destinies, and this makes them more productive. Although it might take longer to make decisions under democratic leadership style, the results are usually impressive. It is appropriate in team environments because quality is of great importance (Dereli 25).
The second type of leadership style that can be applied at GE is Laissez-Faire leadership style. Leaders who adopt this type of leadership give their employees an opportunity to perform their duties on their own without interference. They also allow them to perform their duties with utmost freedom and even determine deadlines. Leaders offer team support only by advising workers.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Leadership in General Electric by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More They do not involve themselves in what the workers do. A higher level of success is achieved, when individual workers have adequate experience and skills. The most important reason why this leadership style would be beneficial is that it would create job satisfaction among employees at GE because they enjoy autonomy. This would increase productivity and guarantee achievement of organizational goals.
The third leadership style that GE should adopt is task-oriented leadership style. This type of leadership style focuses on ensuring that tasks are completed in good time. Task-oriented leaders clearly define tasks that should be accomplished, create necessary structures, organize, plan and continuously monitor every task.
They also carry out other important tasks like developing and ensuring that performance standards are followed by workers. Task-oriented leadership style would be beneficial because it would ensure that there is effective time management in order to meet set deadlines.
The fourth leadership style that GE should adopt is transformational leadership style. This is one of the best leadership styles that organizations should apply in order to achieve their goals. Transformational leaders work towards achievement of the best results through inspiring other workers. This ensures that high productivity is achieved since all workers are fully involved. However, organizations should be careful, when using transformational leadership because sometimes transformational leaders need experts to give them advice.
This implies that GE should apply both transformational and transactional leadership styles. Transactional leaders are responsible for ensuring that routine tasks are completed in the right manner while transformational leaders focus on developing initiatives that enhance organizational performance (Leadership Styles 5).
The final leadership style that GE should adopt in order to achieve its goals is relationship-oriented leadership style, which is also known as people-oriented leadership style. In this type of leadership style, leaders focus on supporting and organizing workers to help them to perform their tasks effectively. It is participatory in nature and encourages employees to work as teams and apply their creativity. People-oriented leaders handle workers respectfully without discrimination.
They are approachable and respond to the needs of all workers in good time. When team members need them, they are always available. This leadership style is suitable because it would enable GE to develop a strong team that workers would like to be part of. They would be ready to engage in activities that are considered risky because their leaders would be available to assist them, when they need assistance.
Conclusion Leadership is very important in any organization because without good leaders, organizational goals cannot be achieved. Good leaders build strong teams that play an important role in achieving organizational goals. Since GE is among the world’s largest companies, it should apply suitable leadership styles in order to achieve its goals. This essay has discussed some of the best leadership styles that GE can apply. The essay has also discussed the importance of leadership at GE and the impact of good leadership.
Works Cited Dereli, Mahce. Leadership Styles. New York: VDM Publishing, 2010.Print.
Iqbal, Talha. The Impact of Leadership Styles on Organizational Effectiveness. New york: GRIN Verlag, 2011.Print.
Leadership Styles 2013 Web. .
Nelson, Lauren. The Effect of Good Leadership. 2013. Web. .
William Butler Yeats Essay essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu
William Butler Yeats played an influential role in shaping modern literature through his use of innovative and figurative poetry. For Yeats, symbolism was not an artistic feature for embellishing his poetry, rather a means of effective and innovative expressing his thoughts on different themes.
In the poem ‘Leda and the Swan’ Yeats presents the brutal rape of Leda a human, by a swan. The swan is actually Zeus, the Greek God in disguise, who assumes the different form only to rape Leda. The poem is a powerful presentation of the rape, which is a destructive act by a divine creature, Zeus, the Greek God.
Symbolism and vivid imagery have been used throughout the poem. The swan, a symbol of peace, innocence and purity has been used to conduct a ghastly, destructive and evil act. Yeats’ use of symbolic words and evocative language present the reader with the clear image of the bizarre act – a swan raping a human. In the following paragraph from the poem “Leda and the Swan”, W. B. Yeats vividly and symbolically expresses the cold and brutal act of Leda’s rape by the swan (Zeus).
“A sudden blow: the great wings beating still Above the staggering girl, her thighs caressed By the dark webs, her nape caught in his bill, He holds her help less breast upon his breast.” (1-4)
These opening lines of the poem present a vivid and terrifying picture of the aggressive violent rape of Leda by the Greek God Zeus, who has transformed into a swan to preserve his identity. Yeats introduces the reader to the aggressive and horrific act creating a sense of urgency with the words, “A sudden blow: the great wings beating still”. The line prepares and initiates the reader into the violent act of rape which is about to occur.
Leda is a “staggering girl”, a helpless victim of rape by a swan with “the great wings”. The wings of the swan symbolize the strength, speed and power of the bird. Words such as “blow” “beating” “staggering” “dark webs” symbolize the atrociousness and the force of the act of rape. The term “great” symbolizes the divinity of Zeus who is the soul within the swan.
Leda is taken by surprise by the attack. It is almost suddenly that she finds “her thighs caressed by the dark webs” of the swan. The act of rape is in itself a presentation of the divine force, Zeus (the swan), attacking the weak human spirit Leda.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Zeus is divine as compared to Leda who is human; Zeus has “great wings” and “dark webs” while Leda is a weak “staggering girl”, a clear picture of helplessness with her neck “caught in his bill”. Zeus uses his might and force to control Leda as he yields a “sudden blow” to her.
These descriptive words lend a contrasting sense of power and obscurity to the swan, which is actually a symbol of peace, purity and elegance.
According to Greek mythology, Zeus, the Greek God takes the form of a swan to rape Leda. The bird, a swan is actually a symbol of peace, purity and beauty. Zeus disguises himself as a swan and gives it a frightening and destructive appearance with the horrific act. Yeats presents the swan symbolically to contrast Zeus’ ghastly act with the elegance and purity a swan represents. The swan has been used by Yeats as a symbol of violence and terror in contrast with the more popular motif of peace and beauty.
Telemedicine and Its Classification Research Paper college admission essay help
Telemedicine has indeed transformed the manner in which healthcare services are delivered to patients who may be located in remote locations. It deploys the knowledge obtained from information and telecommunication. It has assisted in eradicating the barrier created by distance in the delivery of healthcare services (Kontaxakis et al 1096).
In addition, emergency situations and critical care cases have significantly benefited in the technology derived from telemedicine. Oratier Technologies in Pakistan is one of the global companies that spearheaded the development of telemedicine in the Middle East.
The latest advances that have been made in the fields of information and communication technologies are instrumental in necessitating the application of telemedicine (Hoffman 1). As such, medical staff and patients can now communicate quite easily and confidentially due to limited hindrance. In addition, telemedicine has made it possible for healthcare professionals to transmit health informatics, imaging and general medical information to various locations.
The contemporary telemedicine has been integrated with modern diagnostic methods and advanced video-telephones. Moreover, home care in remote or distant locations has been facilitated using server applications mounted on the modern Information Technology (IT) infrastructures (Kontaxakis et al 1094).
Telemedicine is a broad application in the field of medicine. This explains why it has been subdivided into three key areas. To begin with, telemedicine offers real time interactive healthcare services to patients. Under this category, patients may be visited in their homes by healthcare staff.
They may also be engaged in fruitful conversations through online portals or phone calls. There are myriads of activities that may be carried out during such interactive sessions. These include ophthalmology assessments, physical examination and reviewing past medical records of patients (Hoffman 1).
It is prudent to note that such interactive clinical services are relatively cheaper than physical visits to a healthcare establishment. MedPhone Corporation was the first American company to design a system that could use interactive telemedicine. This machine was specifically meant to resuscitate patients suffering from cardiac arrests. A cellular version in form of a mobile telephone was introduced one year later by the same company.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The second classification of telemedicine deals with the storage and subsequent transmission of medical data to the respective medical experts. Some of the information that can be handled using this method includes bio-signals and medical images (Kontaxakis et al 1097). Therefore, the concerned medical experts are supposed to work on such data while they are offline.
This implies that the simultaneous presence of both the patient and medical expert is not required when this method is used. Asynchronous medical attention can therefore make use of specialties such as pathology and dermatology when this method is applied.
The third category of telemedicine is remote monitoring. Quite a number of medical devices can be used by medical professionals to assess patients who are located in remote locations (Kontaxakis et al 1093). This method is also referred to as self-testing.
Although it is a common form of telemedicine, it is most appropriate when there is need to assess and control chronic infections such as asthma and cardiovascular diseases. Remote monitoring may offer the required satisfaction to healthcare recipients compared to traditional clinical visits. Improved outcomes have also been reported when this method is used to monitor long term infections even in locations that cannot be easily accessed by medical experts.
Works Cited Hoffman, Jan. When Your Therapist Is Only a Click Away. 25 Sept. 2011. Web.
Kontaxakis, George et al. Integrated Telemedicine Applications and Services for Oncological Positron Emission Tomography. Oncology Reports 15 (2006): 1091– 1100. Print.
Gender Identity Essay writing essay help: writing essay help
Introduction Gender refers to the state of being either male or female, which is distinguished by factors such as gender roles, social and economic status, perceptions, and ideals and values (Lee, 2005). Gender has been described as a psycho-sociocultural aspect. In contrast, sex is a biological concept that is determined by factors such as hormones and genetic make-up (Lee, 2005). Gender is also understood as evaluation of behavior based on individual perceptions and societal expectations.
Gender identity is defined as personal concepts and perceptions of self that are based on gender (Lee, 2005). This paper will explore determination of gender identity based on connections between hormones and behavior. In addition, it will scrutinize how biological and environmental factors affect gender identity. It will also explore current arguments on gender identity.
Interaction between hormones and behavior Research studies have revealed that hormones have great influence on behavior. For example, hormonal processes contribute towards hostile and aggressive behaviors (Lee, 2005). Studies associate certain behaviors with certain hormones. For example, testosterone is associated with aggressiveness. Studies on effect of hormones on behavior are based on the net effect of hormones on emotions. They cause varying level of moods or behavior depending on their concentrations.
For example, in adults, estrogen causes positive moods while lack of estrogen causes depressive moods (Lee, 2005). This is the same effect testosterone has on moods and behaviors. Some hormones affect behavior directly while others affect behavior indirectly. For example, hormones that determine body size affect behavior indirectly. Big-sized people are domineering and usually rough towards small-sized people. Abnormal activity of glands can also influence behavior directly.
Hormones respond by combining with specific cell receptors to form behavior. Puberty and prenatal periods are the most critical periods in human development that hormones have the greatest impact (Lee, 2005). During the prenatal period, any anomaly in production of hormones results in anomalies in gender identity.
For example, a study conducted on 25 androgenized girls found out that even though they were raised as girls, they exhibited masculine attitudes, sexuality, and grooming (Lee, 2005). After the development of Money’s theories on gender identity, several studies followed that established connections between gender identity and environmental factors.
Current arguments on sexual identity Current arguments on sexual identify claim that is mainly determined by biological factors rather than environmental factors (Lee, 2005). This argument is based on lifestyles such as homosexuality and lesbianism. These arguments claim that people who adopt these lifestyles were born that way because of interaction between different biological factors.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Other arguments claim that such lifestyles can be caused by environmental factors. If an individual gets exposure to one of these lifestyles early in childhood, then he/she would adopt a similar lifestyle owing to influence of the environment (Lee, 2005). However, research has established that these lifestyles are mainly caused by influence of biological factors and further augmented by environmental factors.
Biological influences on gender identity and sexual differentiation The influence of biological factors on gender identity can be explained by considering functions of hormones and cerebral lateralization of the brain (Lee, 2005).
Gender is determined before birth by biological factors. Studies have revealed that brain lateralization and hormonal functions contribute in determination of gender. Males and females contain sexual and reproductive hormones in varying quantities. This is observed from childhood through adulthood although in each stage of development certain changes take place. During puberty, gender characteristics become more pronounced because attraction towards the opposite sex develops (Lee, 2005).
Brain lateralization follows different systems of development in males and females. For example, in females the left side of the brain is more developed compared to males whose right side is more developed. Variation in brain lateralization accounts for high performance by males in sciences and mathematics and better performance in languages by girls.
Environmental influences The first environmental child experiences after birth is the family (Lee, 2005). Mothers dress newborn babies in clothes that depict their gender. As they go through different development stages, children learn to discern their gender from how they are treated. Fathers influence boys and mothers influence girls.
Absence of a father in the family affects discernment of gender identity significantly. Other environments outside the family also play critical roles. Television, music, movies, and books depict different genders in different ways (Lee, 2005). Children pick gender cues from these environments and incorporate them in their gender identity discernment processes.
Environmental factors have the greatest influence on gender identity compared to other factors. Environments such as family and classrooms have the greater influence on gender identity compared to biological and psychological factors (Lee, 2005).
We will write a custom Essay on Gender Identity specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Conclusion Gender differs from sex in that it is psycho-sociocultural while sex is biological. Aspects such as social and economic status, roles, and personal perceptions determine gender. Gender identity is influenced and determined by biological, psychological, and environmental factors.
The environment has the greatest influence compared to other factors. From childhood to adulthood, people interact with different environments that influence how they discern and define gender identity. According to the foregoing discussion, nurture has greater influence on gender identity than nature. Each of the three factors plays a different role in determination of gender identity.
Reference Lee, J. (2005). Focus on Gender Identity. New York: Nova Publishers.
The Salt March in India Research Paper a level english language essay help
Introduction The Salt March was a civil disobedience movement in India. Mahatma Gandhi and his followers led the movement in 1930 (Kuhn 162). Gandhi decided to mount a highly visible campaign against British policies in the salt trade by marshalling thousands of his supporters to walk with him on a 230-mile journey that started from his hometown of Gujarat to the Indian coastal town of Dandi (Kuhn 162).
Initially, Gandhi only had a few dozen followers who started the journey with him from his hometown of Gujarat. However, when Gandhi passed through several Indian villages, he talked to the people and explained to them the nature of the British salt tax and its disadvantages to the poor people. Through his march, he managed to convince more people to join his movement. Many people heeded his call and the crowds around him grew bigger.
Gandhi led his followers on the 230-mile journey to the Indian coast, and when he reached the coastal town of Dandi, he picked salt from the ground, thereby breaking the salt tax law that prohibited people from producing salt (by picking salt from the ground, he had technically broken the salt law) (Hazarika 5).
His followers did the same, thereby breaking the salt laws too. At first, the government did not do anything to Gandhi. Gandhi therefore continued with his movement for almost one month before he attracted widespread attention that forced the government to react. The colonial forces later arrested Gandhi and about 60,000 more people who took part in the movement (Kling 937). However, his arrest only created more chaos in India as thousands of more people joined the salt march (Kuhn 91).
Gandhi’s arrest also sparked a series of more protests that targeted British establishments (like shops and Mills). Therefore, even though the protest organizers initially intended the march to be peaceful, it resulted in the loss of property and life as police officers engaged the protesters with violence as they marched through the streets of India.
Indeed, since many of the protestors were unarmed, they could not protect themselves from the force of the government. Many protestors died instantly (Ahmed 20). The march to Dharasana was the most violent (Kuhn 162). Nonetheless, after the march, moderate political and social reforms occurred in India. More specifically, the march started a wider national movement of independence in India.
Comprehensively, the Salt march movement was an effective demonstration of how peaceful means of conflict resolution introduced social and political change. The adherence to the principle of non-violence as a peaceful resolution principle supports this claim. Therefore, the salt march movement contributed to the independence movement of India and the replication of similar non-violent movements around the world.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Civil Disobedience – Definition The act of civil disobedience is a deliberate effort to contravene existing laws of governance to bring social or political change. Analysts see civil law as a non-violent way of achieving this goal, but this may not always be the case (Thoreau 7). In the context of the Indian movement, Gandhi intended the civil disobedience movement to be a form of respectful disagreement (Hutcheon and Hutcheon 718).
However, the violence that descended on the protestors by the British forces undermined this goal. Nonetheless, many questions exist regarding what actions involve breaking the law and civil disobedience. Another issue that arises in this context is the moral justification for acts of civil disobedience.
Possibly among the oldest depiction of civil movement is Siophocle’s play, Antigone. The play depicts the story of the daughter of a former King (Antigone) who feels constrained from burying her brother (by the laws of the land) (Hughes 59). Antigone defies the King after she gave a long speech stating why she believes her conscious is greater than the laws of the land.
She also seems to be undisturbed by the threats on her life, if she defies the king. Eventually she defies the king after she says that she is more afraid of her conscious rather than the consequences of breaking the law (Hughes 59). In an essay, written in 1848, Thoreau (7) also offers a literary insight into the concept of civil disobedience.
He says people are often responsible for the actions of their aggressors because they fail to protest unfair laws and actions, even when these actions are enshrined in the law (Thoreau 7). Referring to this idea, Thoreau (7) says, “If I devote myself to other pursuits and contemplations, I must first see, at least, that I do not persuade them to sit on another man’s shoulder. I must get off him first, that he may pursue his contemplations too” (Thoreau 7).
Acts of civil disobedience started earlier in history when Egyptians resisted British invasion in 1919. The Velvet revolution in East Germany and the Apartheid fight in South Africa also provide other examples of the civil disobedience in the world (Hutcheon and Hutcheon 718). Similar civil disobedience movements have happed in other parts of the world. Relative to this assertion, Brownlee 1) says,
“The Boston Tea Party, the suffragette movement, the resistance to British rule in India led by Gandhi, the US civil rights movement led by Martin Luther King Jr., Rosa Parks and others, the resistance to apartheid in South Africa, student sit-ins against the Vietnam War, to name a few, are all instances where civil disobedience proved to be an important mechanism for social change” (Brownlee 1).
We will write a custom Research Paper on The Salt March in India specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The main issue that arises in a civil disobedience movement is the unwillingness of authorities to respect the opinions and rights of the majority. Therefore, civil disobedience movements protest unfair laws (as the case in India’s Salt March) (Hutcheon and Hutcheon 718).
Causes of the Salt March The Salt March was a direct action campaign in India to protest a “salt tax” that was imposed by the British rule (Kuhn 162). The 1930 movement saw Mahatma Gandhi lead thousands of Indians in breaking the salt laws that prevented anybody from producing or selling salt India.
Since salt was a commonly consumed commodity in India, it affected almost everybody because it gave the British colonialists almost absolute power to control the salt business. The British therefore enjoyed an absolute monopoly on the salt trade by requiring all Indians to purchase salt from them at a fee (Kuhn 13).
The Indians were therefore at the mercy of the colonialists who imported expensive salt, from overseas, and sold it to poor Indians at very high costs. Since the salt laws made it illegal for any Indian to collect or process salt from the coast, many Indians had to buy the commodity from the British at exorbitant prices. This issue caused a lot of dissatisfaction among Indians regarding the existence of the salt taxes and its impact on the people. Gandhi therefore led his people to demand for a change of this law.
Planning The planners of the Salt March movement never meant for the protests to be of a violent nature (Kuhn 130). Instead, Gandhi and his colleagues organized the movement as a peaceful demonstration against colonial policies of the salt trade. This is why Gandhi wrote a letter to Lord Irwin, the Viceroy, to inform him of their intentions to solve this issue amicably (without violence) (Kuhn 97).
This letter was an effort by Gandhi and his colleagues to find a peaceful solution to the salt tax issue. However, Lord Irwin refused to listen to Gandhi by saying that the government would not change its policies regarding the trade. From this stand, Gandhi and his followers had no other option to engage the government except through a peaceful defiance of existing laws. This defiance emerged as a civil disobedience movement.
Ensuing Mass Civil Disobedience When Gandhi first picked his handful of salt at the Indian coast, millions of Indians around the country followed his move and started to break the salt laws by producing and purchasing illegal salt. With this move, the sale of illegal salt started to spread along the Indian coast.
One month after the march, the British government started to arrest thousands of people who participated in the civil disobedience. The government arrested about 60,000 people (Szczepanski 4). The arrest of these people quickly fueled further civil disobedience by evolving the salt march from a simple Salt Satyagraha to a massive Satyagraha (Satyagraha was the infamous term of a non-violent civil disobedience movement) (Szczepanski 4).
Not sure if you can write a paper on The Salt March in India by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Before, the march broke out into violent attacks against British establishments; Gandhi led millions of Indians to boycott British goods and merchandise. The boycotts also led to other civil disobedience movements such as the defiance of unpopular forest laws throughout most Indian provinces (Szczepanski 4). The defiance of forest laws was however selective on a few provinces and towns in India, which had suffered a long history of colonial aggression through these laws.
From the start of the legal defiance of existing forest laws, many Indian peasants also started to defy tax laws by refusing to comply with them. The Gujarati peasants formed one such group of Indians who blatantly refused to respect tax laws. They mainly feared the possibility that the colonial masters would take their crops and land away from them. Midnapore and some Bengazis also participated in similar tax law defiance. In their defiant spirit, they refused to pay the chowkidar tax (Szczepanski 4).
The colonial government did not relent in its quest to suppress the civil disobedience movement by introducing new suppressive laws that strived to introduce censorship and the criminalization of Congress (Szczepanski 4). However, contrary to their expectations, these measures did not suppress the civil disobedience movement.
In the middle of the 1930 civil disobedience movement, other students of Gandhi started to lead small groups of activists to support the salt march movement. Through this support, notable Gandhi students like Pashto (a Muslim student of Gandhi) led small groups of non-violent followers in Peshawar to support Satyagraha.
Indeed, when Gandhi strolled along India’s west coast to strengthen his salt march movement, the influence of his other students started to emerge in the east coast. For example, his close student, Rajagopalachari, led a parallel salt movement in the east coast to support Gandhi’s movement in the west.
When his movement became stronger, the government arrested Gandhi for contravening the existing salt laws (Kling 937). The government later responded by introducing a shoot-to-kill order against unarmed civilians. This order led to the death of about 250 non-violent civilians (Kuhn 97). Guided by the teachings of non-violent protests, tens of protesters lined up against firing soldiers who shot at them indiscriminately.
The civil disobedience movement also marked the start of female participation in Satyagraha. Indeed, large groups of women came from small and big villagers to protest the government’s policies in the salt trade (Hardiman 113).
The participation of women in the movement was against Gandhi’s wish because he believed women would not have such a strong impact on the movement (Hardiman 113). However, many women participated in the illegal manufacture and sale of salt throughout most parts of the country. To demonstrate the participation of women in the salt march, another Gandhi student, Usha Mehta, said
“Even our old aunts and great-aunts and grandmothers used to bring pitchers of salt water to their houses and manufacture illegal salt. And then they would shout at the top of their voices – We have broken the salt law” (Hardiman 113).
Indian women also engaged in early morning protests, which they disguised, as religious worship. The authorities were therefore reluctant to stop their activities because they feared the citizenry would accuse them of infringing on the religious rights of the women (Hardiman 113). This movement strengthened the Salt March.
The increased participation of women in the salt march movement was a new and powerful phenomenon that shocked the British government. Moreover, the involvement of women in the protests made it more difficult for police to clamp down on the protestors. This movement evolved to be a fight for independence.
When the mass civil disobedience started to receive extreme opposition from the government, the movement slowly gained a violent twist, especially after violence broke out in some of India’s major cities of Kolkata, Karachi, and Gujarat (Hardiman 116). At this point, Gandhi developed a hard-line stance against the government by motivating more of his followers to protest non-violently (but at the same time, acknowledging the hundreds of lives that were lost in the movement).
Some historical excerpts show that the civil disobedience movement significantly disrupted the activities of the government by creating a lot of confusion regarding if it was right to continue with the violent clampdowns on the protestors, or to jail Gandhi (Kuhn 162).
Effectiveness of the Salt March Albeit there were no immediate effects of the Salt March movement, the 1930 protest brought global attention to India and its quest to find peaceful means for stopping colonial aggression. Indeed, many photographers and journalists scrambled to cover the movement and its effects, especially since it was a significant part of India’s history.
Since the salt March was a peaceful protest, many protestors did not engage in any violent means to end the conflict. Moreover, even as the government violently clobbered the protestors, they never tried to defend themselves (Ahmed 20). Images and videos of the government bashing the heads of innocent protestors (to stop the protests) therefore beamed throughout the world, thereby attracting a lot of sympathy for India’s quest to gain independence from the colonialists (Ahmed 20).
Certainly, even while some critics fault the effectiveness of the Salt March in unifying all religions against the salt tax, the salt march movement still managed to unify many Hindus and Sikh Indians against British rule (Szczepanski 9). This development fueled the demand for independence from all Indians.
Albeit some historians say the salt march did not significantly change British policies in India, many historians believe that the movement demonstrates, for the first time, how people could use civil disobedience to introduce social and political reforms (Friffiths 518).
Certainly, the effectiveness of civil disobedience in introducing political and social reform emerged in other parts of the world, such as, America where Martin Luther King equally used the method to fight for African American civil rights. Through the contributions of Gandhi in the salt march movement, King (478) said,
“Like most people, I had heard of Gandhi, but I had never studied him seriously. As I read, I became deeply fascinated by his campaigns of nonviolent resistance. I was particularly moved by his Salt March to the Sea, and his numerous fasts.
The whole concept of Satyagraha (Satya is a truth which equals love, and agraha is force; Satyagraha, therefore, means truth force or love force) was profoundly significant to me. As I delved deeper into the philosophy of Gandhi, my skepticism concerning the power of love gradually diminished, and I came to see for the first time its potency in the area of social reform” (King 478).
Another notable effect of the salt march movement was the growing global acceptance of the need for India to get its independence from Britain. Indeed, even though the British colonialist still maintained dominant control over India, the world was increasingly starting to understand the legitimacy of Gandhi’s claim that the British colonialists were oppressing Indians (Szczepanski 9).
Moreover, through the movement, the colonialists remembered that their continued control over India entirely depended on the consent of the Indians. The 1930 Salt March was the first show from the Indians about the eroding legitimacy of British colonial rule (Szczepanski 9). Referring to this outcome, Johnson (37) said that the salt march was the first real attempt by Indians to gain respect from the colonialists.
The salt March was also the first attempt by the Indians to be less reliant from the British government. Indeed, the movement had a strong impact on the government because it marked a turning point in its history of governance as the citizenry became more defiant and courageous enough to question any policy they did not like about the government (Johnson 37).
Since the arrest of Gandhi forced thousands of protestors to throng the streets of India to demand for his release, India was able to establish its legitimacy as “the ultimate power” of the land when they forced the government to release everybody that the government arrested in the salt movement. Indeed, soon after Gandhi’s release, he met with Lord Irwin and struck a deal that would see all prisoners who took part in the movement freed (Kuhn 108). In exchange, Gandhi would end his civil disobedience movement (Kuhn 108).
Albeit Gandhi was able to find a peaceful solution to the conflict, the salt march movement gave him unrivaled influence in India. Besides securing a position as a representative in Congress, he was able to affirm the effectiveness of non-violent disobedience in the Indian society (Kuhn 108).
Not only did Gandhi affirm the effectiveness of a peaceful solution to conflicts, he created examples of peaceful people who also pursued similar methods of peaceful resolution mechanisms. For example, even as the British beat the protestors before arresting them, the protestors never responded with violence too (Ahmed 20). This way, Gandhi was able to introduce useful social and political changes in his society without harming other people (Ahmed 20).
Adherence to the Principle of Nonviolence Albeit the salt march movement started as a non-violent protest, there were pockets of violence in some Indian cities. Mainly, the violence was an offensive effort from the British forces to stop the protests (Ahmed 20). Historical excerpts show that the marchers were largely peaceful, even when ruthless British soldiers beat them (Weber 46). Indeed, there was minimal or no resistance at all to British aggression (Ahmed 20). An excerpt from a correspondent, who reported he Salt March, said,
“No protestor tried to raise an arm to fend off the blows. They went down like tenpins. From where I stood, I heard the sickening whacks of the clubs on unprotected skulls. The waiting crowd of watchers groaned and sucked in their breaths in sympathetic pain at every blow. Those struck down fell sprawling, unconscious, or writhing in pain with fractured skulls or broken shoulder. The survivors without breaking ranks silently and doggedly marched on until struck down” (Ahmed 20).
To this extent, it is correct to say that the movement adhered to the principle of non-violence.
Symbolism of the Salt March The salt march movement was one among a series of other protests that Gandhi had planned to be part of his civil disobedience action. It was his basic idea that a foreign government cannot come to dictate how people in other places live, especially by imposing draconian laws (like the salt tax) (Szczepanski 9). Salt was a strategic symbol of Gandhi’s quest to introduce social and political justice in India because many Indians could easily relate with the commodity.
Gandhi also cleverly understood that his rally to abolish the salt tax could resonate with millions of people in the country, regardless of their religious affiliation, creed, or race (most people used salt) (Szczepanski 9). This rally was in sharp contrast to other political reform movements that would often fight for constitutional reforms, or land reforms, because such issues were complex and many ordinary Indians could not relate to them (Szczepanski 9).
The salt march movement was therefore Gandhi’s stepping-stone to undertake similar protests to reduce land rates, military spending, and foreign cloth tariffs (Szczepanski 9). These ambitions forced the British government to detain Gandhi without any trial as he planned to raid a salt factory in his native hometown. The protests however occurred when his wife and some of his followers led tens of Indians to participate in the protests. The government later arrested and jailed the protagonists.
Conclusion The salt march was a product of Gandhi’s principles of non-violent civil disobedience that aimed to introduce social and political change. Starting from small march that included only a few dozen people, the salt March movement grew into a national movement that included millions of people and confused the British government, especially when they had to decide how to react to the protest.
The nonviolent nature of the conflict was a key feature of this movement that enabled it to withstand the credibility of its objective. Indeed, through the nonviolent means that the protesters used to advance their objectives, the government did not know how to react to this movement. This was Gandhi’s main objective because it was unfounded for the government to engage in violent means of quelling the protests, while the protestors were peaceful.
Nonetheless, the reaction of the government (through violent means) cemented the effectiveness of the salt march because through the actions of the government, the salt march movement was able to show to the world how the British government did not respect its subjects, who were the custodians of their legitimacy to rule the colony.
Indeed, through the violent reaction of the government, the effectiveness of the salt march movement transcended its previous objectives of abolishing the salt laws, to fueling the quest for independence.
Similarly, through the global attention that the Salt March movement attracted, other leaders around the world saw and understood the power of peace in solving social and political conflicts. The influences of the conflict on other world leaders demonstrate this power. Nonetheless, the Salt March movement elevated the profile of Gandhi as the chosen leader for steering Indian independence, thereby forcing him to receive the global recognition as a respected humanitarian and a lover of peace.
Works Cited Ahmed, Talat 2009, Gandhi: The Man behind the Myths. Web.
Brownlee, Kimberly. Civil Disobedience. Web.
Friffiths, Percival. “Gandhi And Civil Disobedience (Book Review).” International Affairs 53.3 (1977): 518. Print.
Hardiman, David . Gandhi in His Time and Ours: The Global Legacy of His Ideas, New York: C. Hurst
Florida Young Employee Health Project Essay college admissions essay help
This project is a product of the university of Miami and it is charged with analysis of various behaviours, especially the risky ones that are related to the young employees who hold specific jobs in the country. Hence, after the analysis the people running the project always ensure that they are able to avail results to younger employees and their employers.
They also avail the information to their families and parents so as to ensure that the necessary guidance is taken. The information is usually a combination of the causes of the risks being experienced by younger employees and the ways in which they can be able to deal with them so as to avoid living a risky lifestyle and adapting risky behaviours at work.
This project was started by the university after several events occurred that involved newly employed youths who were engaging in risky activities at work thus exposing them to a harmful life. They engaged in such events due to curiosity and the sudden availability of surplus money earned from their employment.
The project was thus started as a means of ensuring they are well guided on how to behave and deal with the new found status. They are also to be taught how to deal with work related stress. Another problem that leads to risky living is the use of alcohol at work that may make the young employees lose focus and concentration and thus behave in a risky manner when at work.
The information got from this project is able to prevent the young workers from living a risky life. This is because if they follow the advice correctly, they are able to live a harmless career life. The project’s mission is to ensure that information is shared to promote the health, wellness and work safety of the workers especially younger employees who work in Florida.
The project derives its objectives from its vision that entails letting the youth and their parents to be able to understand the risks of some behaviours in the workplace. It also endeavours to promote a means through which the research is able to reach the whole community and collect information from the new entrants especially younger employees in the job market. The methods used to carry out research during the project phase are usually presentations, posters and independently reviewed peer articles.
The flye empowers the society and the youth who are entering the job market. This involves educating the youth on their rights, the responsibilities that they should bear when at work and the responsibilities of the employers in ensuring that their employees don’t engage in risky behaviours at work.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This will ensure that the employees are safe to work and thus able to provide quality services in their workplaces. The project ensures that the community members have resources at their disposal. These resources are in the form of downloadable information and articles such as brochure, posters and educational materials.
The project also has a website that provides information to the young employees such as their employment terms, the means to have fun and at the same time stay safe and the correct job for the employees. Finally, workplace guidelines that protect the workspace against child labour and mistreatment of employees are also provided. The flye is located in the clinical research building in Miami, Florida 33136 fourteenth street room number 991, 1120 NW.
A Representation of Chinese Women the Post-1949 Literature on the Status of Women Essay essay help online free: essay help online free
Introduction Chinese women faced difficult moments during the period before 1949. China was a feudal society that transformed into a semi colonial state. Furthermore, the country became a semi feudal society. Chinese women underwent massive challenges because of the male dominated society. They had undergone oppression, deprivation, and belittlement.
Chinese women fought against these challenges. The leaders of the Communist Party of China made life unbearable for women. The formation of the People’s Republic of China started transforming the society. Women started having an enabling environment to participate in their emancipation efforts. The party declared that women enjoyed the same rights in the society just as men did. The declaration hinted that women enjoyed equal opportunities associated with human rights.
The rights included the participation of women in political, economic, traditional, social, and the creation of families. This development transformed the representation of Chinese women in literature after 1949. The literature started capturing the issues involving women in a positive manner. The writers attempted to show the contribution of women in the society as well as how this influenced their status. This paper discusses how literature represented the Chinese women since 1949.
Transformation in the Rights of Women that have increased their Status
Several writers captured the increased economic status of Chinese women. The improvement in the financial status of women played a critical role in changing the way people perceived women’s sexuality. Women started gaining employment opportunities, which increased their economic status (Wen 7).
However, men continued to see employed women as prostitutes and sexual objects. Indeed, prostitution was still ongoing in the country. Furthermore, the discussions about sexuality were explicit between different people such as their fathers and daughters (Wen 9). Women also started providing for their basic needs and supported their parents with sleeping spaces (Wen 11).
Literature indicates that women yearned for economic power. Women felt that this could enable them to fulfill other obligations such as paying bills. They also yearned to have huge amounts of money, which they could comfortably spend. Since that time, the participation of women in employment areas has escalated significantly (Wen 10).
Women gained work opportunities in both the rural areas and the urban centers. The government facilitated employment opportunities for through diverse programs including economic restructuring programs. It is notable that women have enhanced their ability to contribute to economic Improvement through self-respect and self-strengthening.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Marriage and Family
The status of women in the society has also escalated in terms of marriage and family life. Men demeaned women to in marriages largely failing to provide them with their basic needs and demeaning their sexuality. For example, the author states, “your mother does’t even know I’m with you.
You mean to say, we’re both free as each other? Of course, we are just two men together” (Wen 12). In the movie Red Sorghum for example, women were married at a tender age. Furthermore, the movie shows that people known to women raped them. This trend has continued to date. On the contrary, some people also appreciated women beauty within the society (Kao 8).
Participation in Public Matters
The literature also indicates that women participated in different matters of public importance (Kao 12). The engagement in political activities started with the emergence of the People’s Republic of China, which had made a declaration about the rights of women to participate in political affairs.
Furthermore, women took up leadership roles in the political parties. Women also participated in the administration of social affairs in the country through employment in the government. The political parties encouraged the participation of women in different government activities.
Increased Status in the Society The literature also indicates that the status of women improved in the society. The transformation efforts of China have also presented opportunities for women to escalate their participation in diverse societal activities (Wen 34). Woman status has increased in matters such as culture, education, and social services. Women also received training that was critical to eliminating illiteracy among them (Kao 8). In addition, women have continued to make significant contributions to the society through working as teachers.
The literature also indicates that women have played a critical role in improving social morality. It is notable that women have also enhanced social setting and stability (Deke 3). This has taken place because women started participating in community groups that are applicable in mediating village disputes. It is notable that women played a critical to the creation of enabling environments in the community through active participation the important decision making structures (Kao 12).
Conclusion From the ongoing discussions, it is evident that women in China during the
periods before 1949. Women suffered diverse aspects of inequalities. The women were inferior to men. However, the People’s Republic of China started making different transformational activities that improved the society for women. Therefore, the period post 1948 has seen women make great achievements in terms of enhancing their status. Literature indicates that women started having economic power that increased their social status in the community.
We will write a custom Essay on A Representation of Chinese Women the Post-1949 Literature on the Status of Women specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Works Cited Deke, Michael. World of Modern Chinese Fiction. New York, NY: M.E. Sharpe, 1991. Print.
Kao, George. Wandering in the Garden, Walking from a Dream: Tales of Taipei. Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1982. Print.
Wen, Zhu. I Love Dollars. London: Columbia University Press, 2007. Print.
Philosophical Hobbes’ Intentions Essay essay help site:edu
Political debates and thoughts have been inevitable both in the past and in the present. Out of these debates, hundreds of philosophical thinkers have emerged. Among these philosophers are Plato, Aristotle, Descartes, Locke, Karl Marx, Machiavelli, and Thomas Hobbes.
These philosophers have explored the nature and character of political activities. As depicted in these philosophers’ studies, political thoughts aim at tackling issues related to political life. As such, political thoughts focus on several social issues such as social standards, moral codes, and principles.
This paper focuses on Hobbes’ intentions. Initially, the paper will draw attention to Hobbes’ intentions as a means of putting moral and political philosophy onto scientific basis. Secondly, the paper will focus on Hobbes’ intentions as a means of establishing civic peace and disposing of humankind toward fulfilling their civic duty.
Thomas Hobbes was born in the year 1588 in Malnesbury (Morgan 576). To date, the English philosopher has become famous for his contribution to the social contract theory. On the other hand, the philosopher became infamous for asserting that individuals should surrender to the authority of total sovereign power. His contributions have influenced the advancement of political philosophy and the expansion of additional logical philosophical positions.
His contributions towards moral philosophy have not been influential compared to his contributions towards political philosophy. Notably, his theories of moral philosophy have been ambiguous to most individuals. This ambiguity results from the discrepancies that emerge when analyzing the application of his laws of nature.
Hobbes’ intentions as a means of putting moral and political philosophy onto scientific basis Before the 17th century, moral philosophy and political philosophy were thought to be independent of natural sciences. It was believed that the two fields of philosophy were not related to any natural science but rather on human experiences. However, after reading through Hobbes’s works it became apparent that the philosopher intended to put moral and political philosophy onto scientific basis.
Through our everyday activities, we discover the principles of the two fields of psychology. Equally, I noted that proofs in political philosophy are related to the proofs exhibited in the natural sciences. In this regard, it is clear that Hobbes’s intentions were towards putting moral and political philosophy onto scientific basis.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In his works, the philosopher believes that moral philosophy is part of motion of science. Through this argument, the philosopher states that moral philosophy studies motions of the mind just in the same way physics focuses on activity of physical entities. I believe that through this argument, the philosopher was trying to substantiate the validity of his moral principles from a scientific basis.
It is true that our minds exist in different states such as jealousy, greed, and self-centeredness. By relating these changes to the science of motion, the philosopher managed to associate moral philosophy with sciences of motion. In his analysis of moral philosophy, the philosopher emphasizes that political philosophy is all about the study of persons and motion of their parts.
According to Leviathan, the philosopher claims that the motions of external physical objects have an effect on our sense organs (Morgan 580). Through this theory, he claims that our mental experiences resulting from these effects. Hobbes characterized these effects as appetites and aversions. As such, an appetite is described as an undertaking that causes an individual to search for a specific entity.
On the contrary, an aversion is an undertaking that causes an individual to keep away from a particular entity. In addition, I believe that Hobbes intended to put moral and political philosophy onto the scientific basis to attain knowledge and to illustrate his findings to others. Before him, philosophy never drew conclusions based on scientific facts but rather on everyday experiences. Being a pioneer, Hobbes exploited is scientific knowledge about coming up with philosophical conclusions.
Similarly, after analyzing his work I believe that Hobbes achievements in political philosophy became a success because of him putting this field of philosophy onto scientific methods. In agreement with these methods, he referred to as resolutive-compositive, I believe that the philosopher was able to affirm all disputable conception of politics as political facts.
Through scientific knowledge, the philosopher was able to reduce these disputes into elements. Thereafter, the philosopher reconstructed these disputes. For instance, he was able to break the commonwealth into its primary parts in the same way the motion of the mind was done (Morgan 582). Thereafter, he was able to reconstruct commonwealth by allowing it to be in its original state prior to its formation.
By studying the behavior of individuals in this state, the philosopher was able to identify the causes of the commonwealth. Similarly, through this approach, he was able to affirm that moral philosophy was part of physics. Similarly, I believe that through this approach, the philosopher was able to come up with basic ethical principles that enabled us to deduce philosophical conclusions.
We will write a custom Essay on Philosophical Hobbes’ Intentions specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Contribution to the establishment of civic peace and disposing of humankind toward fulfilling their civic duty After analyzing Hobbes’ studies, I believe that his intentions were also geared towards the establishment of civic peace and disposing of humankind toward fulfilling their civic duty. As such, he argues in the social contract theory that earlier philosophers with the exception of Machiavelli had failed because they founded their political philosophies on humankind’s ambitions. By opposing earlier philosophers’ thoughts, he was able to come up with a code that bonded and determined the purpose of the society.
Hobbes argues that in the state of nature, institutions such as the government and the armed forces are not in existence. In this state, all individuals have equal needs. Despite the fact that some individuals are more powerful than others are, less powerful individuals can gang up to subdue the stronger individual. In addition, the state of nature allows individuals to have competing interests.
Therefore, in the bid to prevent conflicts from escalating, Hobbes urged economic and political organizations to use every means to ensure that the society is held together. For this to be achieved, the philosopher stated that the citizens must be ready to surrender equal rights as they expect other individuals to surrender.
Equally, through this approach, the philosopher argued that citizens must be able to form a social contract. According to the philosopher, the social contract was not to be signed between the citizens and the elites but among the citizens. In the contract, citizens were to sign a contract accepting to be ruled by a centralized government. Through this approach, the minority was supposed to accept the majority decision.
Based on the above analysis, it is apparent that Hobbes believed that without the state individuals would be at war with each other due to the differences of interests. Therefore, through his studies he aimed at illustrating to the masses the importance of civic peace. Notably, during his era the theory of social contract was underdeveloped. In this regard, I believe that the society then exhibited some of the traits he described in the state of nature. Therefore, due to the need to uphold civic peace he formulated the social contract theory.
In general, Hobbes’ arguments about the state of nature affirm his intentions. In the sate on nature’s laws, the philosopher argues that everyone should seek peace with other individuals unless these individuals are not willing to make peace. I believe that through these arguments Hobbes was after instilling peace in his audience.
In the first part of the law of nature, he argues that if individuals uphold the state of peace they will meet their yearning for self-preservation. However, it should be noted that peace could only be attained through the agreement of two or more parties. If the other parties refused to seek peace, the philosopher in the second part of the law of the state of nature argues that individuals are free to resort to violence.
If people seek peace through the means argued above, it is apparent that they will ultimately be disposed towards fulfilling their civic rights. To escape the situations illustrated in the state of nature, individuals will be required to give up some of their liberties. These liberties may include liberty to steal, liberty to assault, and many more. Thereafter, social institutions will be required to enforce the social contract.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Philosophical Hobbes’ Intentions by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More By enforcing the social contract, these institutions will ensure that any individual who will go against the contract is punished in accordance with the existing laws. Since Hobbes envisioned these situations in his works, it is obvious that he intended that through his works human beings could be disposed toward fulfilling their civic rights.
I believe that the governments and other social institutions have fulfilled Hobbes’ forecasts. As such, in the modern society we have submitted to be governed by the existing governments. This implies that as citizens we have signed a social contract with our fellow citizens to uphold peace for the benefit of everyone.
Equally, I believe that citizens have several roles to play both in the government and in the civic life. These roles are categorized into social roles, economic roles, and political roles. By approving to play the above roles, we have all agreed to be governed by the existing states. In response, the governments have ensured that we all co-exist peacefully among ourselves by ensuring that any individual who compromises on the peaceful co-existence is charged accordingly.
In conclusion, it should be noted that Hobbes’ contribution to philosophy is immense. He became the first philosopher to put moral and political philosophy onto scientific basis. Through this, he was able to substantiate his theories.
Equally, I believe that compared to other philosophers Hobbes contributed most to the development of social contract theory, which is now exhibited in the social institutions. To date, his theories are still applicable in our political systems. This implies that his intention of establishing civic peace and disposing of humankind toward fulfilling their civic duty has been achieved.
Bibliography Morgan, Michael L.. Classics of moral and political theory. Indianapolis: Hackett Pub. Co., 1992 . Print.
What HP Is Doing Right And Why? Essay college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help
Hewlett and Packard (HP) is an American technology company that provides technology services to large enterprises, individual customers, and small and large businesses. It is the leading manufacturer of personal computers and associated accessories in the world.
It has experienced tumultuous times in past years that have affected it adversely. However, it has changed its strategy and is pursuing reinvention strategies and initiatives. It is currently engaging in several projects and initiatives that will steer it back to prosperity in different field away from manufacture of computers. These initiatives include high-impact research, acquisition of Autonomy, a British software company, cloud services, corporate strategic overhaul, and management change.
HP has increased its efforts of doing research in order to find solutions to problems facing the technology industry. As a result, they have established research labs in seven different locations around the globe. The labs will focus research on eight areas that are central to technology.
These include information management, content transformation, cloud, digital commercial print, intelligent infrastructure, analytics, sustainability, and immersive interaction. The main objective of the project is to shift its focus to cloud computing and EaaS, which are key areas of emerging technologies.
HP has also acquired Autonomy, a British software company. The acquisition has brought wrangles in the corporation leading to exit of the chairman, Raymond Lane. The main objective of acquiring the company is to diversify their service delivery to focus mostly on software development and compete with other software development companies. HP intends to exit the personal computer market and explore the more profitable software market. This is in an effort to reinvent the company after many years of failed business operations.
Recently, HP announced its corporate and strategic overhaul plan that had an adverse effect on its share price. The overhaul is intended to push HP into profitable market segments such as software, connectivity, and cloud services.
Their strategy includes doing away with its Webos mobile devices and exiting the PC market that is not as profitable as it was in past decades. Its Webos devices include the Veer Smartphone and the Touchpad tablet. In addition, it is looking for alternatives to its Personal Systems Group (PSG). This might include separating operations of PSG form those of HP.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Another recent HP initiative is exploration of cloud services. HP has devised ways to provide cloud services to enterprises, consumers, and small and medium sized businesses. It has developed customized cloud services for each of the three groups of consumers.
Services offered to each group offers solutions to problems that present challenges in the modern world where technology is an important aspect of achieving goals and objectives. The initiative’s main objective is to revamp HP’s service business in order to guarantee stability and high profit margins. This is a positive move because cloud services are under high demand and HP could seize the opportunity to reinvent itself.
HP has also elected a new interim chairman, Ralph Whitworth after exit of Raymond Lane. He left after fallout with the corporation’s top management regarding acquisition of Autonomy Corporation. This move is an effort by the management of the corporation to avoid cases of past wrangles that cost it dearly. The new interim chairman has been serving at HP in the capacity of Board member for approximately two years. Lane said that he stepped down because he did not want to disrupt HP’s reinvention efforts.
The new interim chairman is known for reviving failed corporations by introducing change. The election of Whitworth is a move towards adopting leadership that embraces change, a factor that is synonymous with their recent initiatives and corporate overhaul strategy.
Employee Attraction and Retention in the Australian Resource Sector Report (Assessment) essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu
The article presents three arguments to the reader. First, it argues that organizational practices and changes in certain external factors affect attraction and retention of employees. The main challenges faced by organizations are due to changes in laws that govern industrial relations.
Secondly, it argues that good organizational practices are important in attraction and retention of skilled employees. Thirdly, the article argues that it is necessary for organizations to diversify their workforce and address issues regarding balance between work and life for employees in order to attract and retain them.
These arguments are built upon using a research study conducted in 2009. The study provides responses from employees concerning challenges they face at their workplaces, strategies that managers use to attract and retain employees, and challenges managers face in attracting and retaining employees.
The research also investigated how employees in the resource sector in Australia perceive the influence of changes in legislation. The article uses evidence of examination of strategise that can help to attract employees to advance the arguments. Such strategies include good employment practices and employee involvement in the resource sector. Finally, the article uses evidence form literature on attraction and retention of employees and good employment practices to further the arguments.
The arguments presented in this paper are convincing because the evidence they present to build on them are reliable and valid. The survey presents data obtained from employees’ responses to questions whose answers validated the arguments. For example, the literature reviewed by authors of the article included past studies conducted by government agencies and professional writers. The article cites information from the Commonwealth Scientific and Industrial Research Organization (CSIRO).
There are also citations from various writers such as Crawford, Frith, Cooper, Bailey et. al, and Knox who are professional and reliable writers. Information obtained from Australian Mines and Metals Association (AMMA) and The Construction, Forestry, Mining and Energy Union (CFMEU) gives reason to believe that the information is accurate and applicable.
The authors also cite literature from different professional authors who have studied the subject of employee attraction and retention for many years. They have also conducted several studies relating to the topic in past years.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More For example, they cite the works of Vanderberg et al., Guest, Boxall, and Mackay that studies the role of high involvement work systems in retention of employees. In addition, they cite the works of Beauregard
The external environments effected in the planned merger between the American Airlines argumentative essay help
Industry definition The merger of companies has become one of the most desirable competitive strategies that are used by companies in the international business industry today. The case of mergers as a competitive strategy also applies to the US Airlines industry. The airlines industry in the United States provides transportation for people and cargo. Airline companies provide transportation services on regular schedules over given specified routes.
The industry is classified into two: network carriers and regional carriers. Network carriers make use of at least a single hub to operate a given portion of their flights. Connection of flights is done on a spoke system. On the other hand, regional carriers offer transportation services from the smaller cities and towns within the United States. They use smaller planes and jets. The main aim of the regional carriers is to feed the network carriers with passengers.
They also give support to the spoke systems. There are also airline companies that deal with the transportation of the mails within the United States. Such companies are classified under the regional carriers. There are also a number of international airline companies in the United States. The international airline companies are quite competitive and deal with the transportation of passage from the US into other regions of the world and back (Samadi, 2010).
Industry analysis The US airlines industry is one of the most dynamic industries in the United States. The industry has a wide number of commercial airline companies. The number of major airline companies that operate in the industry makes the industry tenser in terms of competition and rivalry amongst these companies.
The pace at which the commercial airline industry in the United States has evolved is quite high. The industry is capital intensive, labor intensive and is usually affected by the changes in the business cycles. The industry is also subjected to regulation, as well as the deregulation of business activities.
The industry plays an expanded role in connecting the US to the global economy (Global Airline Industry Program, n.d.). The deregulation of the industry in the later years of the 20th century has been behind the increase in the number of airline companies in the United States. The regulation of the industry is done by the federal government. The regulation is meant to ensure that there is adherence to high standards of operation in the company, as well as the assurance of passenger safety.
Mergers and acquisition is one of the common tendencies in the industry, with most companies in the industry struggling to ensure that they gain a competitive ground on which to compete. With globalization, the number of travels has increased, denoting an increase in the opportunities that prevail in the US airlines industry (Samadi, 2010).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Political factors and their interplay in the US Airlines Industry The main shift in the approach of management in the US airlines industry was witnessed in the year 2001, when a terrorist attack was executed through the hijacked planes. The event was critical to the airline business inside and outside the United States. It denoted a significant drop in business, as well as a significant drop in airline travels due to the fear of security.
However, it is important to note that a significant number of political decisions have been developed and enforced in order to ensure that there is sustainability in the airlines industry (Borenstein, 1992). The last one decade saw the rise in the airlines security across the globe with no major incidents of terrorism or attack being reported in the industry. This has been a positive sign in the industry and has been patterned with the developments in the global political economy, thus promoting business in the industry.
This is supported by the fact that the airlines industry is the major enhancer of business in the United States. It promotes the flow of people and goods from the country and into the country. The important question that can be asked at this point concerns the nature of political developments in the contemporary times and how they shape business advancements in the US Airlines industry (Vedder, 2008).
Recent times have seen the enforcement of deregulation policies, which have aided in opening up the industry. This implies that the number of airlines companies has gone up in the recent years. The main political factor that has an impact on the performance of the Airlines industry in the United States is the regulation and deregulation of the industry by the government. Federal and local taxes on the industry have been demeaning firms in the US airlines industry from maximizing profits.
A higher tax on air transport is a discouraging factor in the industry. When the taxes are high due to higher rates of taxation, most people shun from the air travel since they cannot meet the cost of air travel. This results in the drop in demand for air travel. Thus, the current government’s proposal to raise airline taxes is not a welcome move in the industry (Jenkins, Marks
Advertising and Consumer behavior Essay argumentative essay help: argumentative essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Introduction The purpose of research as per Zain-UL Abideen and Patrick George is to investigate the relationship between television advertisement and consumer behavior, which includes attitudes, emotions and the actual buying behavior.
The studies in both reports are longitudinal but in different countries and economies. Zain does his research in Pakistan while Patrick focuses on the U.S. They both come to a conclusion that there is a relationship between television advertisement and the buying behavior of consumers. People tend to buy brands that are appealing to them emotionally.
Summary Advertising highly influences the behavior of potential customers. Due to a highly competitive market, companies have adopted various advertising strategies as a way of attracting customers. The aim of business institutions and companies is to ensure that customers get to know about their products and services in the most effective manner so that they can respond positively.
Although there are companies that opt to introduce new products as a way of attracting customers, most companies advertise their products to attract more customers (Patrick, Page 15). Advertising is the most effective way of attracting customers since it creates an appealing image and it also entertains consumers. Television advertising is extremely effective when it comes to influencing customer behavior. This paper will focus on the analyses of customer behavior in relation to television advertising.
Discussion Television advertising plays a vital role in buying behavior of customers. Being one form of communication, it reaches a wide coverage. Television advertising is both audio and visual and thus it has a lot of impact on customer behavior.
The main aim of television advertising is either convincing customers to buy a certain product, informing customers about a new product in the market, or making a product more familiar to the customers (Zain-UL-Abideen,Page 67). Television advertising influences the awareness, buying behavior and the attitude of prospective customer.
Television advertising is crucial in providing the customer with information that creates a better market, which is accompanied by an appealing image amongst prospect buyers so that they easily make effective decisions regarding whether to buy the product or not. Television advertising also highly alters the feelings and attitudes towards a product and it also affects their buying behaviors especially because it visually provides the primary information about a product.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More There are various processes that are involved when a customer is making the decision of buying a product or not. The steps include identification of a problem, search for the necessary information, making an informed decision on the choices available, making a final decision and finally purchase of the product (Patrick, Page 45).
These are crucial steps that are always affected by various advertisements aired on televisions. Television advertising also has a major impact on the behavior of teenagers and children. Their values, attitudes and behaviors sometimes lead to socialization behaviors that are not so desirable like making choices that are not rational, making decisions that are impulse-oriented and developing strong materialistic values (Zain-UL-Abideen,Page 123).
On the contrary, television advertisements also create positive customer impacts on teens such as creating greater knowledge about products. Television advertisement has helped many businesses in creating a positive image for their products and positively influencing the buying behavior of many prospects.
Conclusion From the discussion, it is fais to stress that advertising, as a promotional strategy, plays very important role in creating awareness about the existence of the product and influencing on a behavior of the customer. Customers are able to make informed decisions about products, especially after coming into contact with television advertisements, which are not only informative, but also appealing and entertaining.
Television reaches the masses making marketing more effective. It influences the attitudes, behavior, lifestyle and exposure of customers, who end up buying the product in the long run. People buy the products that they are emotionally attached to. Television advertising has a very great effect on creating positive emotions of potential customers.
Works Cited Patrick, George. “A Longitudinal study of television effects affecting Advertising. Journal of consumer research (2003): 267-279. Print.
Zain-UL-Abideen. “Effective advertising and its influence on consumer buying behavior”. European Journal of Business And Management 3.3 (2011): 55-65. Print.
We will write a custom Essay on Advertising and Consumer behavior specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More
Analysis of the paintings The Goose Girl at Montfoucault (Camille Pissarro) and The Rocks (Vincent van Gogh) Essay essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Analysis of the Goose girl an Montfoucault and the Rocks
The Goose Girl at Montfoucault
Introduction The paintings created by the two artists are similar in several aspects. The artists completed the paintings around the same era. The time difference between the completion of the first painting (The Goose Girl) and the second one (The Rocks) was only thirteen years. The works of both artists focused on creating impression about diverse aspects of their everyday life encounters.
Impressionism connotes the artistry involving the creation of impressions about nature and landscape. It is notable that Camille Pissarro painted “The Goose Girl at Montfoucault, White Frost” (Pissarro). The painting signifies a countryside scene. The inclusion of a figure of a human being, a tree, and landscape makes the scene discernible. The artist incorporated domestic geese appearing at the center of scene. Vincent van Gogh painted “The Rocks” thirteen years later.
The artistic ability to create impressions through paintings started in the late 19th Century. The creativity emerged in Paris when artists started painting impressions to reflect their current landscapes. The impressionists moved away from the norm of art those days. Notably, many paintings incorporated historical features that signified painter’s inspiration.
The artworks created by impressionists had noticeable themes. Impressionists also added unique brush movements that made their artworks outstanding. In addition, impressionism influenced the emergence of postimpressionism. Postimpressionists were inspired by the need to improve on the works produced by impressionists.
It is notable that Vincent van Gogh is one of the foremost postimpressionists. Postimpressionists commented on the impressionists approach to create artworks that appeared on a natural landscape.
The impressionists applied light and color to create their artworks. Postimpressionists hailed the value of artificial pictures as a form of art. They noted the specific limitations in the impressionists’ artworks, which inspired their approach. Postimpressionists employed the use of thick paints and brushes with larger strokes to generate their paintings (Stokstad and Michael 23).
The subsequent section presents an analysis of the two paintings. Much as many people have discussed the differences in arts between the impressionism and postimpressionism, this paper relies on visual observation of “The Goose Girl at Montfoucault” by Camille Pissarro and “The Rocks” by Vincent van Gogh to show how the paintings exemplify the notable similarities and distinctiveness of the two eras.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Analysis of the Goose girl an Montfoucault and the Rocks The two paintings incorporate understandable differences and resemblances. Camille Pissarro painted “The Goose girl at Montfoucault” in 1875 (Pissarro). The painting represents a normal life of people living on the countryside. “Vincent van Gogh created ‘The Rocks’ in1888” (Van Gogh).
Vincent van Gogh work represents a feature in the environment characterized by blue and green color. A critical observation of the two artworks reveals certain features that represent changes implemented by artists from impressionism to postimpressionism (Van Gogh).
The Goose Girl at Montfoucault The artwork by Camille Pissarro has features represented on a landscape. It creates an impression of a landscape in a natural environment. In the setting, a figure representing a girl stands closer to the domestic geese on a landscape. The domestic geese occupy the central part of the painting.
The painting also has a tree and other vegetation on the landscape. These remain the essential aspects of impressionism. The impressionists showed more interest in representing a normal and routine life in the countryside by capturing it on the landscape.
The quality of brushstroke is evident in the painting. In particular, the painting has rough brushstrokes and lighter paint. The brushstroke shows a direction of movement but not very specific. The artist’s application of color is also evident. The observation process reveals the use of a finer and light color (Pissarro). The artwork has a color movement. The variations of color theme in the painting tell a story about the landscape.
For example, the varying color as the geese leaves the enclosure tells something about the background. Indicatively, the figure of the girl draws attention in the viewpoint within the scene. Anyone viewing the painting immediately sees the girl. The artist seems to be looking slightly downwards on the landscape (Pissarro). This gives additional features in the background but with the focus being the girl tending to the geese.
Camille Pissarro also applied light in varying degrees while developing the artwork. Notably, light and color application emerged as the strong aspects of impressionists work. In this case, Camille Pissarro has used both light and color to depict an aspect of the impressionism era. The color and light depicts autumn season and a specific time during day (Pissarro). The vegetation losing their leaves proves that it a frosty season. The painter used color to bring into focus the large tree that has lost its foliage.
We will write a custom Essay on Analysis of the paintings The Goose Girl at Montfoucault (Camille Pissarro) and The Rocks (Vincent van Gogh) specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The relatively calm and chilly outlook depicted by the painting gives the viewers a perception of the normal quite countryside. Camille Pissarro succeeded in applying varying textures to depict diverse features of a natural environment. Particularly, the textures reveal the difference in grass type, tree leaves, earth surface, and stones among others (Pissarro).
It is notable that the quality of objects in the painting aims at revealing materiality of paint used by the painter. The textures of objects represented also communicate the same aspect of materiality of the paint. Impressionists normally attempt to place the object, which is the focal point closer to the scene (Stokstad and Michael 210).
The painting has placed the tree, the girl, and the domestic animals closer to each other for the viewers. The landscape enhances the closeness between these objects. Camille Pissarro depicts a sense of the depth between the objects (Pissarro). For example, Camille Pissarro ensured that the size of the girl and the domestic animals have varying lengths thus depicting the sense of depth. The application of optical illusions enabled Camille Pissarro to develop contours and volumes.
Evidently, the figure of the girl plays an insignificant role in the painting. The painter was not very far away from the object of interest. However, the presence of a human being in the painting provides a sense of life and culture (Pissarro). The fact that Camille Pissarro decided to hide the individuality of the girl may further indicate its insignificance.
The Rocks The artwork incorporates features that symbolize postimpressionistic landscape. Vincent van Gogh being the foremost postimpressionist had a vision for the artwork of that era. The painting appears to show the aspects of a rocky topography. It appears that Vincent van Gogh faced a difficult time developing this painting as shown by the strong breeze (Van Gogh).
Postimpressionists use heavy paints. This is depicted in the painting where the landscape has a thick and heavy paint. The heavy paint is also evident beyond the rocky topography. The painting depicts a given color of the sky at a particular time in the day. The completion with the yellow and pink colors gave the painting a deep theme.
The viewpoint of the scene reveals that artist was at a raised point. The rocks are sitting on a flat topography. An individual looking at the painting quickly shifts attention beyond the rocky topography. This further reveals the painter’s position on the landscape (Van Gogh). The painter utilized heavy brushstrokes.
The brushstrokes moved in opposing directions. The appearance of the grass, plants, and the main trees swayed by the breeze towards one direction shows a windy day. The curvatures of the contour in the rocks boundaries show the application of lines in paintings (Van Gogh).
Not sure if you can write a paper on Analysis of the paintings The Goose Girl at Montfoucault (Camille Pissarro) and The Rocks (Vincent van Gogh) by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Postimpressionists normally apply thick paint in diverse color shades as depicted in the painting. Vincent van Gogh did not provide a focal point in his painting (Van Gogh). The painter was near the rock. He did not focus on creating a sense of depth although he was closer to the scenery. A water body surrounds the rocks (Van Gogh). The coastline stretched out thus making it difficult to comprehend the magnitude of the water body.
Conclusion In summary, the two artworks “The Goose Girl and The Rocks” show the advancement from impressionism to postimpressionism. The artists applied the use of lines differently. On the Goose Girl, Pissarro used line movement to expose certain aspects of her painting. For example, Pissarro used the movement of the lines to create a landscape and the other figures. On the contrary, Vincent van Gogh employed the lines to expose the notion of movement of diverse features.
Works Cited Stokstad, Marilyn, and Michael W. Cothren. Art History: Portable Edition. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Pearson/Prentice Hall, 2011. Print.
Van Gogh, Vincent. The Rocks. 1888. Web.
Pissarro, Camille. The Goose Girl at Montfoucault. 1875. 1 May 2013.
Immigration Bill in US Essay college essay help near me
Table of Contents Introduction
Positive Role of Immigrants
Introduction There exists various and varied reasons for a person to traverse a border illegally into a foreign territory or overstay their visa. Such a person goes by various titles including illegal immigrant or illegal alien, undocumented immigrant, and unauthorized immigrant (US Immigration Support, 2012).
Commonly, the reasons given for such illegalities include the need to re unite with their families, running away from war or prospects of war, job seeking, seeking political asylum, and seeking for medical attention (Phil for Humanity, 2013). This essay seeks to prove that it is proper for such people to acquire citizenship in the United States of America through the passing of the pending immigration bill.
Positive Role of Immigrants Immigrants have had a positive bearing on the economy of the United States of America. In other words, immigration leads to increase in wealth. This arises from the fact that the US has an economy that generates more than enough job opportunities for the Native Americans (Abraham
Oscar Wilde’s The Importance of Being Earnest and Heart of Darkness Essay college essay help: college essay help
Oscar Wilde’s comedy, The Importance of Being Earnest, is a satire of everything stuffy and constrictive in the 19th and early 20th century. It shows the modern reader how different life was back then, and also how much remains the same. The play explores the theme of the relations between the sexes. It also highlights the way that all of us cherish illusions about ourselves and others.
Wilde spares no one. Everyone is ridiculous. John Worthing and Algernon Moncrieff, for example, are self-centered and, of course, almost entirely idle. The fashionable, urban, Gwendolen Fairfax is a schemer, but her supposedly unsophisticated rural counterpart, Cecily Cardew, is equally calculating.
The dowager Lady Bracknell plays the game of marriage politics, is un-motherly, and a snob. Even Miss Prism, the governess, is a foolish and fallible creature. Canon Chasuble seems totally unconnected with spirituality. They are all skewered with equal ferocity. Only the butlers seem relatively free of idiocies.
The social constraints on women and men in expressing their feelings for one another are also parodied. A modern couple would not have to answer to Lady Bracknell to obtain permission to marry. On the other hand, girls still fantasize about boys they like. Today, however, they might post blog posts of fan fiction instead of writing an imaginary diary, as Cecily did.
Wilde also satirizes the class distinctions that obsessed so many people. For example, Algernon deplores the lax morals of the servant class. However, he himself lives by fibs and outright lies.
This play holds up a mirror to all of us, even after a century. People are foolish and they don’t always see themselves or others honestly and fully. Wilde shows us this with immense humor.
The Heart of Darkness, exploring the impact of interior Africa on European colonials, seems at first glance to be filled with racist references. However, this impression dissipates when the story is more closely examined. Conrad actually seems deeply sympathetic with the indigenous people, and their oppression and near-enslavement by the colonial personnel.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The descriptions of the landscape provide a vivid sense of the way that Europeans felt when confronted with an utterly alien landscape, flora, fauna, and people. Conrad, for example, repeatedly notes the darkness and the thickness of the forest, even a short distance from the shore, and speaks of the darkness at its center. He is talking here as much about the unknown rather than an absence of light, although rain forests can be dark. The skillful speech of Mr. Kurtz is even described as being light coming out of the deep darkness of the continent.
The author is trying to convey the complete lack of fit between most of the expectations, behaviors, planning and responses of the colonials, on the one hand, and the realities of the continent itself, on the other. In spite of the greater firepower that the colonials possess, Conrad shows the reader, disease and madness claim many casualties.
This reminds the modern reader of the way that high tech armies throw themselves at trouble spots around the world, and end up baffled and ineffective. The land, the climate, the terrain, and the people, just make overcoming the local situation nearly impossible.
This novel makes the extraction of ivory and other resources seem all the more ludicrous, and wasteful of lives. Conrad makes a powerful and moving argument against the whole colonial enterprise, in spite of using the racist locutions that were common in his era. This book should perhaps always be read in concert with some literature by Africans themselves, just to give a different perspective on the region and its issues.
Pharmaceutical Drug Addiction among African American Male Adolescents Term Paper college admissions essay help
Table of Contents A Brief History
Policies on Addiction
A Brief History Abuse of pharmaceutical drugs is the recurrent use of medication without requisite direction and advice from a qualified medical expert. It also involves use of medication in contravention of expert advice and requirements (Boyd, 2007). Such abuse encompasses habitual use of prescription medication with a view to achieve good feelings and pleasure.
Most abused medication includes pain relievers and medication used to alleviate anxiety among patients. Statistical data indicate a high and alarming rate of abuse among African American adolescents in the United States. There are various manifestations of such abuse among young black adults in America. Due to this practice, there are increasing cases of hospital admissions because of complications resulting from abuse of pharmaceutical drugs. The numbers of registered deaths are currently on the rise (Boyd, 2007).
History of pharmaceutical drug abuse in America dates back over a hundred years. During that period, there was rampant use of laudanum, a derivative of opium and alcohol. Laudanum was a remedy for nausea, insomnia, anxiety, among other medical conditions (Boyd, 2007).
During early 19th century, doctors regularly prescribed the concoction to patients despite its high disposition to addiction. However, Caucasian women were highly susceptible to abuse of laudanum. Most men had susceptibility to abuse of alcohol and other forms of drugs. Abuse of pharmaceutical drugs among black adolescents became a serious problem in 1980s when the trend grew in popularity. Currently, many black adolescents in America commence abuse of prescription drugs in their pre-teen years (Boyd, 2007).
Discussion Cases of addiction to pharmaceutical drugs are increasingly becoming common in American society. There is a trend of abuse and addiction among individuals in the productive bracket of American society. The alarming rate of abuse and addiction emanates from various implicit and explicit factors that influence and determine the vice.
Such factors include social, demographic and economic factors. There are cultural factors that also determine likelihood of abusing prescription drugs (Boyd, 2007). Among African American adolescents, there is high prevalence of abuse and addiction with regard to pharmaceutical drugs. Prevalence of this practice manifests through numerous cases of individuals who face arrest and prosecution because of abuse of prescription drugs. In some cases, there is involvement of prominent personalities in society.
This is a clear indication of the inherent gravity of this matter. Abuse of prescription drugs is prevalent because of their availability in the market. Adolescents have easy access to prescription drugs through unscrupulous and dishonest doctors. Such doctors avail drugs to young people in full knowledge of the apparent dangers of their actions (Boyd, 2007).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Habitual use and abuse of prescription drugs leads to addiction and dependency. During initial stages of use, individuals derive pleasure and joy from such activities.
After a certain period of use, the body gets used to the drug. In order to achieve pleasure, it becomes necessary that the person must increase dosage. This trend continues and eventually escalates into an epidemic. Currently, many people have total dependence on prescription drugs. They face numerous challenges as they struggle to fight the vice that has potential to cause harm and even lead to death (Thomas, 2006).
As individuals fight the habit, they find it difficult to cope with life. There have been reported cases of suicide due to effects of pharmaceutical drugs addiction. Addiction to prescription drugs heralds numerous negative effects for society. It reduces productivity because addicts have difficulty in carrying out productive undertakings. Addicts are habitually unwell because of side effects that result from abuse of pharmaceutical drugs (Thomas, 2006).
Authorities should take necessary and urgent measures to correct the spiralling trend of abuse and addiction to pharmaceutical drugs. Failure to institute such measures will usher in a generation that cannot support itself due to addiction and abuse of pharmaceutical drugs. All relevant authorities and agencies have a responsibility to ensure that the young generation does not indulge in such activities because they lead to counterproductive behaviour (Thomas, 2006).
Treatment and care for addicted persons is costly and requires money and other resources. Authorities spend huge amounts of money to treat and rehabilitate addicts annually. Such funds and resources should go into other constructive national undertakings. Society should always endeavour to sensitize members on the apparent dangers of abusing pharmaceutical drugs. Such efforts will go a long way in reducing cases of abuse and addiction to prescription drugs (Thomas, 2006).
Policies on Addiction Most individuals who abuse pharmaceutical drugs argue that they are safer and less harmful that other drugs. This misconception is responsible for high prevalence of abuse and addiction among young people in America. Various policy efforts seek to institute corrective measures with regard to this problem (Cicero, 2007). Through such efforts, people will learn the negative effects of using prescription drugs erroneously.
Efforts such as National Drug Control Strategy endeavour to deter abuse of pharmaceutical drugs in society. The strategy has measures that create awareness on pitfalls associated to abuse of prescription drugs. It advocates for proper acquisition and use of pharmaceutical drugs to avoid negative repercussions. It also creates awareness on proper and safe storage of pharmaceutical drugs to avoid alteration of their chemical qualities and components.
We will write a custom Term Paper on Pharmaceutical Drug Addiction among African American Male Adolescents specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Any alterations regarding composition of such drugs could lead to poisoning and possible death (Cicero, 2007). The strategy also involves monitoring of all activities relating to pharmaceutical drugs. Through Prescription Drugs Monitoring Programmes (PDMPs), the strategy seeks to evaluate and regulate acquisition and use of pharmaceutical drugs to ensure compliance to standards and regulations.
The strategy also provides mechanisms through which healthcare practitioners share critical information regarding use and sale of pharmaceutical drugs. As part of deterrence, the strategy proposes heavy fines and punishment for those found guilty of improper and illegal use of pharmaceutical drugs (Cicero, 2007).
Diverse Populations Cases of addiction to pharmaceutical drugs are increasingly becoming common in American society. There is a trend of abuse and addiction among individuals in the productive bracket of American society. The alarming rate of abuse and addiction emanates from various implicit and explicit factors that influence and determine the vice (Cicero, 2007).
Such factors include social, demographic and economic factors. There are cultural factors that also determine likelihood of abusing prescription drugs. Among African American adolescents, there is high prevalence of abuse and addiction with regard to pharmaceutical drugs.
Prevalence of this practice manifests through numerous cases of individuals who face arrest and prosecution because of abuse of prescription drugs. Apart from young African Americans, other demographic segments indulge in this practice. The issue regarding abuse of pharmaceutical drugs is not unique to one demographic section in society. It is ubiquitous and prevalent across society (Gordon, 2006).
Treatments Treatment of addiction is complex because of various aspects that characterize the problem. Healthcare practitioners appreciate the complex nature of the issue and therefore apply various methods to fight the problem of addiction. The most popular means of treatment is therapy (Gordon, 2006). The addict attends therapy sessions where a therapist prescribes various procedural activities to alleviate the problem.
During therapy sessions, they share personal information with a therapist. Subsequently, they receive counselling services regarding their problem. The therapist offers tips on how the client can effectively abstain from abuse of prescription drugs. Apart from therapy, other medical procedures seek to reverse the ravages of addiction to pharmaceutical drugs. Such medical procedures materialize through crucial phases that mark the road to recovery (Gordon, 2006).
Critique The field of social work and human services is an important domain that plays a critical role in provision of vital services to needy persons such as addicts. Social work and human services seek to offer an avenue for intervention and relief for persons who experience difficulties and challenges in various areas of concern (Paulozzi et al, 2006). Through social services provision, individuals have access to professional care and support that guarantee their social well-being and holistic existential circumstances (Paulozzi et al, 2006).
Not sure if you can write a paper on Pharmaceutical Drug Addiction among African American Male Adolescents by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More By offering such services, social work experts act as a bridge between individuals and the community. However, social workers should conduct a thorough and comprehensive assessment in order to acquire a clear understanding of the recurrent individual needs. There should be clear policies to enhance and promote efforts against abuse of pharmaceutical drugs (Paulozzi et al, 2006).
Future Research There are numerous research undertakings with regard to the issue of abuse and addiction to pharmaceutical drugs. Many scholars continue to institute research undertakings with a view to achieve a clear understanding on this issue. However, there is room for further research and studies regarding addiction to pharmaceutical drugs. Future research should focus on deterrence mechanisms to ensure reduction in cases of abuse and addiction. There is need for research on factors that lead to misuse of pharmaceutical drugs.
References Boyd CJ, et al (2007). Prescription Drug Abuse and Diversion among Adolescents In America. Arch Pediatr Adolesc Med 161(3):276.
Cicero TJ, et al (2007). The Development of a Comprehensive Risk-Management Program for Prescription Opioid Analgesics: Researched Abuse, Diversion and Addiction-Related Surveillance (RADARS). Pain Med 8(2):157.
Gordon SM, et al (2006). Knowledge and Use of the Internet as a Source of Controlled Substances. J Subst Abuse Treat 30(3):271.
Paulozzi, L. J., Budnitz, D. S.,
Campus Parking Proposal essay help online: essay help online
The Problem By this time, students joining campus have been warned about the problems associated with parking within the institution. Parking problems affect students, faculty members, guests, and parents. Apparently, the available parking spaces in campus cannot accommodate the rapidly escalating user population. The parking areas are also provided based on political and economic approaches. The political approach entails the application of administrative rules in allocating parking areas (Mostajabi
Alcoholism as a social problem Essay college admission essay help: college admission essay help
Introduction Traffic accidents, cardiovascular diseases, divorce, dysfunctional families have one contributory factor in common; alcoholism. Alcoholism is a condition in which a person finds himself or herself addicted or dependent on alcohol. It does not necessarily manifest in obvious ways, but the person loses control over their consumption of the substance.
It has health, social, emotional, physical and psychological ramifications in the alcohol abuser’s life as well as the people around him or her. Since this issue has an adverse impact on society’s well being, then one must analyze its cause. Every person must take responsibility for his actions, and alcoholism is a result of those choices.
Overview/history of alcoholism The problem of alcoholism started in Ancient Egypt, where individuals took beer in excess. Historical evidence indicates that even the Romans dealt with alcohol-abuse complications like liver inflammation. In the United States, alcohol consumption was a controversial issue among the settlers.
Initially, pilgrims regarded it as a valuable commodity because it was not as susceptible to contamination as water. However, after the establishment of the colony, alcoholism became a problem. During the American Revolution and the civil war the issue turned into a debacle.
The first attempt to tackle the problem was in the 1920s when the government passed the prohibition Act. However, underground establishments flourished leading to a repeal of the legislation. In those times, alcoholics were treated as immoral, degenerate and even wicked persons. Currently, some people still hold this view although many also acknowledge that no one sets out to become an alcoholic.
Current issues related to alcoholism In the news, one is likely to read about an accident that caused the death or dilapidation of several individuals. Drunk driving is one the most significant causes of death. Therefore, the media attributes such devastating losses to the problem of alcoholism. In these traffic accidents, one often learns that the people involved may not walk again or may not function properly.
For instance, the Chicago Tribune reported that a Romeoville woman killed an innocent bystander because she was driving under the influence of alcohol. The victim’s family was devastated by the loss because Marke Bajson (the victim) was a strong, influential and lively person (Meisner 16).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Sometimes the media highlights cases of high-profile individuals who separate or divorce from their spouses because of the problem of alcoholism. Many talented celebrities have failed to meet their family obligations because of these problems. The LA Times reported that artist Lindsay Lohan was arrested for drunk driving. She was forced into a therapeutic program where she spent weeks away from productive activities (Winton 4).
Why the problem is a big deal Statistics from the National Institute on Alcohol Abuse and Alcoholism indicate that about 14 millions adults in the US are technical alcoholics. Approximately half of the American population is affected or has been affected by a family member who abuses alcohol.
The NIAAA estimates that the country looses $52 billion in damages caused by alcohol-related problems like road accidents, violent crime, and alcohol rehabilitation costs. In comparison to other addictive substances, the losses associated with alcoholism are three times as much as those linked to illegal drugs.
Continued abuse of alcohol leads to loss of productivity within the country. Statistics indicate that when individuals start overdrinking, they either lose employment or reduce their contribution to work. The country loses about $66.7 billion owing to these issues (National Institute on Alcohol Abuse and Alcoholism 55).
Underage alcoholism also has its own set of consequences. Research shows that approximately sixty percent of all alcoholics who failed to complete high school did so as a result of their dependence on the drug. Aside from inadequate education, alcohol abuse also leads to one hundred thousand deaths annually. The criminal justice system is overpowered by this problem since 38% of the offenders who committed the wrong were doing so under the influence of alcohol.
Alcoholism is not just a problem for society in general; it also affects the people who abuse it. For instance, people, who drink three or more drinks, put themselves at increased risk of health diseases. Some of the commonest ones include cancer, liver damage, cardiovascular diseases or even cancer. The World Health Organization reports that alcohol abuse is a causative factor for 60 different types of injuries and diseases.
The body recognizes alcohol as the primary risk factor for death amongst males (World Health Organization 4). This steams from cardiovascular complications, violence and death. Alcohol affects their social lives as some of them may exhibit unpredictable behavior. A number of them may become moody, violent and erratic. These individuals will neglect their responsibilities at home or in the workplaces thus putting themselves at risk of divorce or loss of their jobs.
We will write a custom Essay on Alcoholism as a social problem specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Too much dependence on alcohol causes financial problems at home as an alcoholic’s finances are mostly used for the drug. The person may choose to purchase alcohol over food and thus suffer from malnutrition. Issues of chronic loss of sleep, weight, and memory are just some of the many effects of excessive alcohol consumption. Sometimes this may cause mental illnesses like anxiety and depression.
Emotional problems Many people may suffer from sexual or physical abuse in their previous or present relationships. This may cause them to turn to alcohol as a way of neutralizing the problem. However, such an approach only works for a short amount of time because the problem they are trying to avoid will be replaced by their addictions (Institute of Alcohol Studies 11).
Sometimes people use drugs as a way of handling mental complications like depression or bipolar disorder. They may do so in order to feel normal; in such circumstances, alcohol becomes a form of medication to the abuser.
Coping mechanism Some individuals lack social, communication, and assertiveness skills. Therefore, a number of them may use alcohol as a social lubricant to make them more sociable (Institute of Alcohol Studies 9). Others may lack the courage to speak to large groups of people or to certain individuals, and may consume alcohol in order to eradicate that fear.
Some individuals even claim that they think well when they are tipsy. However, with time, small doses of the beverage may increase and eventually spiral out of control. A person who uses alcohol as a coping mechanism also makes a conscious decision to do so.
Peer pressure Many people attribute their drinking habit to peer pressure from friends in college or high school. The same may occur in the working population. It can start as a way of gaining acceptance among one’s peers or merely as a way of blending in. With time, the person starts to consume the beverage alone or in the absence of one’s peers. Peer pressure leads one to start the habit, and then the person complicates the problem even more (Institute of Alcohol Studies 13).
Alternative causes and objections Some people believe that alcoholism is beyond the control of those who abuse it. They blame genetics for the issue, and assert that users are just predisposed to alcohol abuse. They cite occurrence of the problem among many members of the same family. This implies that uncontrollable forces may come into play.
Other persons also claim that alcoholics naturally lack self management skills. For instance, they do not know how to determining their limits or monitor their rate of consumption. This means that the problem is beyond their control.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Alcoholism as a social problem by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Response to the objections It may be true that alcoholism may be prevalent in some generations and not in others. However, no proof exists to predict whether one will abuse alcohol or not. Addictive tendencies may exist, but a person must activate them by making a choice to take alcohol or not. Even the quantity one consumes depends on these choices. Therefore, the problem is more dependent on one’s will rather than one’s biology.
Certain beliefs about oneself have the effect of causing alcohol abuse. If one thinks that they cannot control their frequency and amount of alcohol, then this is an attitudinal problem. Existence of cognitive therapy shows that drink-refusal skills can be taught, and they exist.
Conclusion Evidence shows that most of the causes of alcoholism emanate from conscious choices. For instance, peer pressure is something within the control of the alcoholic. Therefore, a person has a choice to consume alcohol or not. Additionally, when alcohol is used as a remedy for mental or emotional problems, some unhealthy attitudes must be evoked by the abuser. Finally, alcohol as a coping mechanism, also involve conscious choices. Therefore, it can be treated using this approach.
Works Cited Institute of Alcohol Studies. 2010. Alcohol problems, causes and prevention. Web.
Meisner, Jason. “Romeoville woman charged with DUI in fatal O’Hare crash.” Chicago Tribune. 2013: 16. Web.
National Institute on Alcohol Abuse and Alcoholism. Drinking in the United States: Main Findings from the National Longitudinal Alcohol Epidemiologic Survey (NLAES). U.S. Alcohol Epidemiologic Data Reference Manual, Volume 6. Bethesda, MD: Author, 2006. Print.
Winton, Richard. “Lindsay Lohan’s last stint at Betty Ford Center was troubled.” Los Angeles Times. 2013: 4. Web.
World Health Organization. Global status report on alcohol and health. Le Mont-Sur-Lausanne, Switzerland, 2011. Web.
Louisiana Purchase Essay cheap essay help
The beginning of the 19th century was a tumultuous time for the United States. There was ongoing strife within the country and around the country’s borders. The Reigning president at the time was Thomas Jefferson. One of Jefferson’s most significant acts as president was overseeing the Louisiana Purchase. The “Louisiana Purchase is still the largest land deal in the US history as it involved a $15 million price tag in 1803” (Sloane, 2004).
The transacted land amounted to over eight hundred thousand square miles. Jefferson brokered this deal through two of his ambassadors James Monroe and Robert Livingston. The idea to acquire Louisiana was conceived after the New Orleans port fell under Napoleon Bonaparte’s French territory. The port was of great importance to the US trade and its closure necessitated sending ambassadors to France. It was in this mission that Napoleon agreed to sell not only the New Orleans port but also the entire Louisiana territory.
Before the Louisiana Purchase, Jefferson prided himself in being a strict constitutionalist. However, this enormous transaction put a blemish on Jefferson’s record of strict adherence to the constitution. Some people feel that the Louisiana Purchase was conducted within the confines of the United States constitution. This paper will explore the arguments forwarded by both sides of the debate and offer a personal interpretation of the matter.
The argument against Jefferson’s actions is always supported from various angles. Before the transaction was completed, Jefferson expressed fears that it would be deemed unconstitutional. Therefore, he forwarded a constitutional amendment that would eliminate doubts against the constitutionality of the transaction to senate representatives. However, Jefferson received advice against this process because it would take too long and Napoleon could change his mind within this period.
Eventually, Jefferson opted to draw up a constitutional amendment that would give the federal government power to acquire new land on behalf of the people (Les Benedict, 2007). This amendment was ratified by the senate a few months after the Louisiana Purchase was completed. One of the reasons why Jefferson’s actions did not raise a storm in 1803 is because the citizens were pleased with this purchase.
The argument against the constitutionality of the Louisiana Purchase is founded on the fact that the responsibility of acquiring new territory was not defined in the US constitution. The Louisiana Purchase had a huge impact on the US territory because it doubled its size at the time. The people who claim that Jefferson’s actions were unconstitutional argue that the constitution did not give him the right to acquire new territory (Levin
The Seven Habits of Highly Effective People Research Paper writing essay help: writing essay help
Highly effective people have unique habits that make them to be different from others. One of the most notable habits of highly effective people is putting first things first (Covey, 2004). It is not necessary to do everything that comes your way for you to live an effective life. The people who struggle to do everything that comes along their way end up overextending themselves.
It is therefore very important to have some priorities in life without having any fear of saying no to things that you do not feel like doing (Covey, 2004). A person can only live a balanced life if he or she has a habit of doing things according to priority. The habit of putting first things first is a combination of two other habits that include being in charge of your life and having a clear vision before doing anything (Covey, 2004).
It is important for any person who wants efficiency to take control of their lives by having a mental creation of whatever they plan to do before doing it (Covey, 2004).
The habit of putting first things first involves time and life management. Living an effective life also depends on a person’s purpose and values. It is important to get our priorities right in order to manage our lives in the best way possible. Highly effective people remember their priorities as they play their roles. Priorities vary from one person to another depending on what they value (Covey, 2004).
People who manage their time and events depending on their priorities are said to be putting first things first. The habit of putting first things first is very broad and therefore requires an in-depth analysis for it to be fully understood (Covey, 2004). The most fundamental elements that form this habit include setting priorities, time management and adherence to personal values (Covey, 2004). These elements are very fundamental when it comes to living a very effective, happy, fulfilling and successful life.
Adults have got a lot of responsibilities and activities that range from work, family and personal lives. A person may end up not achieving anything if they do not set their priorities right (Smith, 2009). Confusion and frustration are the result s of living life without having any priorities.
It is vital to set daily priorities according to your long-term objectives and plans. It is important to have some priorities when it comes to family, work and personal life. Everything in your life at a particular time may be important but some of them may not be a priority (Smith, 2009).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More It is also necessary to consult your boss, family and friends for you to come up with a balanced list of priorities that does not hurt anybody. Managers can explain your priorities at work and you will also be in a position to understand what your family and friends expect from you (Smith, 2009). The task of identifying the most important things in your life can be very difficult for a person who does not care about the expectations of other people.
There are other people who depend on you and it is therefore not advisable to only focus on your personal life. In order to avoid having any problem in deciding what to do next, it is important to have a personal productivity system that will ensure that you do things according to your priorities (Smith, 2009).
The most important thing in life is to pursue worthwhile goals (Covey, 2004). Setting priorities in our lives can lead to different categories of success which include spiritual success, relational success, family success, physical success and financial success (Smith, 2009). The different categories of success can not be achieved without having clear goals and priorities.
Spiritual priorities enable us to have a good relationship with our creator. We need strength from our Creator to overcome some of the challenges that can hinder us from living an effective life (Covey, 2004). Relational success can be achieved through taking a personal initiative to spend some time with friends. Building meaningful friendships should be our priority as we pursue relational success.
Inviting people for lunch and showing them love are examples of initiatives that a person can take in order to build friendships (Smith, 2009). A married person should always set aside some time to spend with his or her family. The emotional security of your spouse and children should be a priority. It is important to look for ways of becoming a better parent, husband or wife by setting some family goals.
The physical wellbeing of a person comes first before other things. It is difficult to live an effective and happy life if you are not healthy (Smith, 2009). Our physical health should be a major priority if we desire to achieve other goals. Eating a balanced diet and working out on a regular are some the ways through which a person can demonstrate that their physical success is a priority.
It is also important to note that one can not enjoy financial success without financial goals (Smith, 2009). Worthwhile financial priorities will guarantee the much needed financial security. The only way a person can live an effective life is by pursuing the most important things. Obstacles will always be on our way to success but the people who focus on their priorities become successful (Smith, 2009).
We will write a custom Research Paper on The Seven Habits of Highly Effective People specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Time management is a very important factor when a person wants to live an effective life through putting first things first (Croft, 1996). It is difficult to live an effective life if you do not know how to control it. Time management helps a person to deal with the pressures of modern life. Time management involves doing the most important things within a specified period of time.
Good time management does not mean doing all the tasks that come your way but being able accomplish tasks that make a difference in your life (Croft, 1996). Every person desires to take control of their work and general life but this can not be achieved without good time management.
In order to live a balanced life, it is important to identify your priorities in life. It is also important to consider your personal and career goals in an effort to manage your time well (Smith, 2009). Working out goals is the first thing you should do in your attempt to improve time management. Living life without any goals shows lack of priorities in life. It is important to do things with the end in your mind.
The human mind can not remember all the things that you plan do and therefore making a list helps a great deal in helping you remember all your tasks and projects (Smith, 2009). A to-do list helps you to remain focused and in control of your daily activities. A to-do list should be prepared according to the priorities of a person.
Good time management is a sign of a person who works smart (Smith, 2009). It does not matter the quantity of work that a person does but what matters the most is quality. Poor time management leads to a lot of stress because a person may be forced to stay late in order to finish some tasks. It is important to set aside some time for breaks and relaxation when planning for your day.
Tasks should be prioritized according to their urgency (Croft, 1996). The most urgent task should be the first on the list while the least urgent should come last on the list. Tasks that are more productive should be given the first priority when it comes to time allocation. It is not wise to spend a lot of time on activities that are less productive (Croft, 1996). Personal values should not be ignored when setting priorities.
It is difficult to practice good time management in a very hostile environment. Worthwhile priorities are very fundamental when it comes to living a highly effective and successful life (Croft, 1996). Success does not just come but it takes a lot effort and organization to be successful. A person’s daily activities should be centered on their priorities in life.
Putting first things first ensures that no time is wasted on activities that are not beneficial (Covey, 2004). In order to take control of your life, it is important to manage your time according to your priorities. It is also important to always remember that our success depends on how we manage our life.
Not sure if you can write a paper on The Seven Habits of Highly Effective People by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More References Covey, S. (2004). The seven habits of highly effective people personal workbook. London: Simon and Schuster.
Croft, C. (1996). Time management. Melbourne: Cengage Learning EMEA
Smith, G. (2009). The art of effective living. London: Trafford Publishing.
Critically Discussion: Nature is Solely Responsible for Human Development Essay college admissions essay help
Human development is influenced in a great way by nature, but this is not to say that nature is solely responsible for human development. Although heredity as a natural factor has a significant influence on human development, the environmental factors which are categorized as nurture have some level of influence on the general development of human beings. Nature and nurture interact in different ways to influence the development of a human being.
The genetic makeup of a person represents nature while nurture is represented by external factors such as education and general upbringing. This essay will critically discuss the view that nature is solely responsible for human development. There has been an argument by scientists that nurture is influenced in a great way by nature. The claim that nature is solely responsible for human development is not true. Human development is influenced by the interaction between nature and nurture.
The behavioral and physical characteristics of a human being are influenced by nature. Human beings grow physically as a result of natural genetic processes. The general body size and other physical characteristics are influenced by heredity.
Physical characteristics such as skin color and gender are determined by genetic factors. Psychologists are of the opinion that the early stages of human development are in most cases influenced by environmental factors. The genetic inheritance of a human being influences their development from conception to adulthood.
Human beings can inherit some exceptional talents and hereditary traits that affect their development in one way or another. Nature is associated with biological influences that are normally revealed during different stages of life. Nature is solely responsible for the physical development of humans being while nurture has a great influence on cognitive and behavioral development.
It is important to first of all discuss the influence of nurture on human development to give this discussion a new perspective. It is clear from the earlier observation that nature can not be solely responsible for human development. There are other aspects of human development that can not be provided by nature. Nature influences the physical aspects of human development through heredity while external environmental factors influence other aspects of development such intellectual and emotional development.
Some psychologists argue that nurture begins its influence from the womb. Genetic influences begin at conception, but some of them are normally revealed during the later stages of life. It is therefore very difficult to discuss human development without mentioning the nurture factor. The capacity of human beings to learn things is influenced to a great extent by environmental factors.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More There are different dimensions through which the environmental factors that influence human development can be analyzed. The first category is the physical environment that involves conditions within the womb before a child is born and their physical environment after they are born. The social environment also plays a vital role in human development.
Peer pressure from friends and family, and the media content that a child is exposed to at an early age have an influence their general development. Environmental factors can be viewed from different contexts because they affect human development at different levels. Family and friends have an immediate influence on human development while there are other bigger societal factors that influence human beings at different stages of their life.
Politics and the education system are examples of macro environmental factors that have a significant influence on human development. Cultural norms and ethnic values are other examples of bigger societal contexts that influence human development. Families and communities have their own standards that have a certain level of impact on human development. At this juncture, it is evident that the genetic makeup of a person is not solely responsible for their development.
It is important to also discuss how nature affects human development in order to determine its level of influence in relation to other factors. There are different aspects of human development that need to be discussed, but many scholars pay attention to the biological aspects. The physical aspect of human development serves as a platform for development through nurture.
The cognitive abilities and behavioral characteristics of a person define who they are. Human development should be discussed from the physical, emotional, behavioral and cognitive angels in order to have a better understanding. Hereditary abilities and tendencies facilitate the maturation process after conception. The genes that human beings inherit from their parents have some coded information that determines their genetic makeup.
The physical development of human beings from the fetus level to adulthood is influenced by nature. Nature is responsible for all the physical characteristics of human beings. Examples of physical characteristics that are influenced by the genetic makeup of a person include gender, height and skin color. Heredity is responsible for all the distinguishing features in human beings. It also important to note that nature is responsible for all the hereditary traits in human beings.
Human beings inherit some traits and special talents which have a significant influence on their development. The traits that are normally inherited can be positive or negative depending on the genetic makeup of parents.
We will write a custom Essay on Critically Discussion: Nature is Solely Responsible for Human Development specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Human beings are born with both positive and negative traits but nurture plays a critical role in enhancing the positive traits and suppressing the negative ones.
The development of a human being from a fetus into an adult is a very gradual process and it takes some time for some of the genetic influences to be manifested. Language and spatial skills are influenced by genetics and therefore the relationship between nature and nurture is very complicated. The observed outcomes in human development are as a result of nature and nurture.
The factors responsible for human development influence each other in different ways which makes it difficult to categorically state that one of them is solely responsible for human development. Nature and nurture interact to influence the cognitive, behavioral and emotional development of human beings. It is evident from this discussion that both nature and nurture are critical when it comes to human development.
The upbringing of a child has a significant influence on their general behavior. Inherited traits have a certain level of influence on human behavior but environmental factors are the most responsible when it comes to enhancing human behavior. Children behave according to the way they are brought up by their parents and the people around them. The behavioral characteristics that are introduced to a growing child will always be part of them until they become adults.
The development of a child is influenced in a great way by environmental factors. Children can have some inherited talents that require nurturing for them to be developed. Hard work and proper guidance are very critical in the development of natural talents and interests. Children learn how to do things from the people around them and it is therefore true to say that the early stages of human development are influenced by nurture.
The complex relationship between nature and nurture can be understood by studying the influence of environmental factors and heredity on the characteristics of children. There are those children who inherit some disabilities from their parents and end up living exceptional lives as a result of good upbringing. An example of this is when a child who is born with some learning disabilities ends up performing well academically because of good nurturing. The nature-nurture controversy has been around for a very long time and is here to stay.
Genetic predispositions differentiate human beings from other species because of their influence on group and individual characteristics. The genetic characteristics keep on revealing themselves throughout the entre life of a human being. Nature and nurture should not be polarized in any way because their interaction explains the overall human development. The extent of influence is what generates a lot of debate when it comes to human development.
There are certain behaviors and characteristics that one can not determine whether they are influenced by nature or environmental factors. Violent acts can be linked to genetic mental disorders or environments factors such as poor parenting. Most researchers are of the opinion that certain human behaviors can neither be connected to nature nor nurture.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Critically Discussion: Nature is Solely Responsible for Human Development by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Nature and nurture have a combined influence on the cognitive, behavioral and emotional development in human beings. Environmental and hereditary factors interact to influence important developmental outcomes in human beings. The nature and extent of interaction is what sparks controversy. According to some research findings, the kind of environment that a child is exposed to enhances their genetic predisposition.
Nature and nurture influence human development but it has been a great challenge to determine which one of them plays a bigger role. Many researchers agree that nurture plays a greater role in human development. The argument that nature is solely responsible for human development is not true.
The intellectual and emotional capacity of human beings is influenced in a great way by nurture. People and circumstances within the environment enhance the capacity of a child to learn new things in their early stages of development. Adequate parenting and positive influence from the schooling system determine the number of things that a child is able to learn in the early stages of their life. Positive hereditary traits can not influence human development if they are not nurtured in the right way.
In conclusion, nature is not solely responsible for human development. Nature is in most cases responsible for the physical attributes of human beings but has a very little influence on the cognitive, emotional and behavioral development of human beings. Talents and other traits that are inherited from parents can only be developed through nurture.
It is important to note that behavioral and cognitive development can not be developed by nature. The physical development of human beings is influenced by nature and enhanced in most cases by nurture. Human development is influenced by the interaction between natural and environmental factors. Although nature is responsible for human development to some extent, environmental factors play the greatest role in the overall development of human beings.
Impacts of Multinational Corporations (MNC) Involvement in Developing Countries Essay college essay help
Introduction Multinational Corporations (MNCs) play a fundamental role in the economic improvement of the unindustrialized nations. MNCs complement the host nation’s resources and escalate value addition on diverse products. MNCs engagement in the emerging states has created both undesirable and helpful impacts.
Developing nations place a considerable expectation on their interactions with MNCs. They believe this can move them closer to the industrialized states. MNCs continue to accelerate their investments in developing nations in order to unlock the markets. Remarkably, such increments have generated numerous implications. First, they have positively influenced expansion of the economy, increased labor, accelerated production, and improvement of infrastructure.
On the contrary, the undesirable impacts have taken the form of environmental degradation, widening developmental gaps, and adverse competition that hurt local businesses. Much as MNCs support the economic expansion of the unindustrialized states, their operations also create undesirable impacts, which hurt the host countries and their residents in a number of ways.
Positive Impacts of MNCs MNCs contribute to the improvement of economies of the emerging states in different ways. MNCs normally generate job opportunities in the developing nations. This escalates income and spending within the economy, thus stimulating growth (Rugraff
Nuclear Family and British Social Breakdown Essay college application essay help: college application essay help
Introduction One of the biggest concerns of the contemporary British society is the issue society breakdown. This matter has attained the attention of not just sociologists and anthropologists but the general public as well. Many factors have been attributed to this social problem. Different theories have been fronted to explain the origin, causes and effects of this challenge.
As they say numbers do not lie. According to statistics, the probability of kids in the Great Britain not been raised by both parents is the greatest in the region, except of Belgium, Latvia and Estonia. As we speak only less than two thirds of children under the age of 14 are living in the same household with their biological parents. This research was carried out by Organization for Economic Development and Co-operation (OEDC).
The figures indicates that 68.9 per cent of kids under 14 live with both natural parents in United Kingdom while 70.7 of the same age bracket live with both parents in the United States, and 79.5 in France. These statistics form the basis of our critical discussion. In this paper we examine and explain the importance of nuclear family and its functions in British society. The paper goes ahead to elucidate whether the decline of nuclear family contributes to the wider British social breakdown.
Contrast and exploration of the nature and functions of the nuclear family with other family types or structures Comparatively nuclear family demonstrates a couple of similarities and contrasts with other family structures. A brief description of nuclear family is that it be defined as a family that is composed of two sets of family members, parents and children, living together in the same home.
Interaction within family is usually unlimited and usually very personal. This can be depicted by the close conduct experienced from time to time such as sharing household utilities and facilities. Family members in a nuclear family are generally freer with each other and forms closer ties as compared to other types of family structure.
The core function of nuclear is basically supporting each other psychologically, socially, and economically. This comes handy when it comes to transacting vital undertakings such as inheritance of property where every member is expected to receive a share. In comparison to other family structures this exercise is less complex. In extended families such issues as inheritance can be termed as nightmare, this is probably because of the larger numbers.
Extended family is the other major type of family structure. It can be described as a family with more than parents and offspring. Sociologist have moved forward and tried to classify extended family as follows. First is the vertical extended family. This branch is made up of three or more sets such as grandparents, parents and children.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Secondly, the horizontal extended family. This family consists of cousins, aunts, and uncles. The last branch is modified extended, commonly referred as Michael Gordon, after his outstanding contribution. This branch is essentially made up of two or more nuclear families living separately.
One common distinguishing factor between nuclear and extended family is the level of sets representation in each of them. It is also clear that numbers do vary. Rarely will you find nuclear families with fewer people than extended family or vice verse. In terms of relationships, extended families have “weaker” relations as compared to nuclear family. In terms of functions the two differ a bit. In nuclear family the focus is primarily on the “immediate” members but in extended the focus spreads out to meet the needs of everyone in the household.
The other fast developing structure of family is single-parent family. As the name insinuates, it is composed of a single parent and children. From statistics, they are more female single parents as compared to male parents. Sometimes this family type is referred as a broken nuclear because often it is a result of broken nuclear family. Single-parent family can be contrasted with nuclear by the fact that in nuclear family both parents work together for the good of the children while in single-parent family only one parent is involved.
Advantages and disadvantages of nuclear family compared to other types of family unit The nuclear family bears many advantages and as expected some downside also. To start off is the strength of privacy. Matters conducted within a nuclear family are more likely to be secret, confidential and private. Privacy is a key factor searched by most people because it brings the element of integrity and creation of personal space.
Financial stability is another most sought after factor in marriage and society. Nuclear family provides the most conducive environment for financial stability. Both parents are able to save, plan, and provide for the children. This makes the burden bearable for the parents and protects the children from unnecessary lack.
Another noticeable advantage of nuclear family is freedom, comfort and avoidance of stress. Nuclear family creates that environment that is more likely to be free from stress and strain. In a way, members find their way to enjoy their life without much interference from other “external” forces.
The disadvantage of nuclear family includes lack of support from the larger society in case of eventualities such as tragedy or death. More often, nuclear family tends to be “clogged” to itself and members might lack the “external” touch. This is might contribute to lack of social skills.
We will write a custom Essay on Nuclear Family and British Social Breakdown specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Possible influences of the ‘breakdown’ of society The state of society breakdown can be contributed to many factors. For the purpose of this paper we shall discuss the following factors: Changes of family structure, career development and feminism. Changes in family structure can be attributed to the increasing threat of society breakdown. It is noticed that a fragmented family will yield to a fragmented society.
This is a source of concern to our society. The traditional family has been interfered with and now what we are witnessing is new forms of marriages and families. These new development have resulted to the sad reality of escalating rate of divorces. Notably since 1960, there has been a tremendous increase in divorces occurrences in the Great Britain.
Actually between 1961 and 1969 the number doubled and the same increase was recorded in 1972. The trend has continued to expand touching its peak at 1993 at 180,000. According to experts, some couples are more prone to suffer divorce. The group that married young and had children before the marriage or practiced cohabitation. The other vulnerable group is partners who have been married or gone through another divorce.
Career development is the other main contributor of society breakdown. Marriages and families generally demand a lot of time and resources. In the same tone, career development is taxing and consumes a lot of time. The strength and wisdom to balance the two has lead many people to choose forsaking marriage and family at the expense of developing their careers.
Holistically looking at it, at the end of the day it is the society that is hurt because this means compromise in other aspects. In such a case it is easier to cohabitate than to manage a family. It is easier and more prestigious to work towards job promotion than to sacrifice finances for the sake of family.
The other could be associated with broken society is the aspect of feminism. From the onset I must clarify that this aspect is not entirely wrong but only some parts which are misplaced. As we know it is the responsibility of women to be “homemaker” in the family. This is a noble task that requires a lot of humility and patience.
However, what are we seeing in the society? Women who are so agitated for their right such that they cannot simply be homemakers. The theory of feminism has good intentions but if addressed with wisdom then I am afraid it ends up doing more harm than good. A family needs both a man and a woman. The man is the head and woman supporting him. And together they form a nuclear family.
Restoration of nuclear family Nuclear family is the most ideal family structure for restoration of the broken society. From the above discussion it is clear that the strengths outweigh the weaknesses. Restoration of nuclear family is a very possible mission. This could be achieved through carrying out programs encouraging especially the young people the significance of family and nuclear in this matter. This program could incorporate “success stories”, couples, families that have successful lived to enjoy the fruits of nuclear family.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Nuclear Family and British Social Breakdown by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Conclusion From the above discussion it clear that decline in nuclear family is leading to the wider broken society in the current British society. In summary nuclear family plays a very strategic and vital role to the well being the society. This can be demonstrated by how much we, as the society, stand to gain if this family structure shall be restored. The following are the main contributors of the society ‘breakdown’ they include Changes of family structure, career development and feminism.
Cause and effect of terrorism Essay essay help site:edu
Table of Contents Introduction
Causes of terrorism
Effects of terrorism
Introduction Terrorism is broadly known in the whole and has existed for several years. It can be perceived as a way of making nations or group conscious of some wants that they have to change something by making and destruction.Terrorism can be defined as the illegal usage or threatened application of force by a person or a structured group against property or individuals with the purpose of threatening societies or nations, mostly for realizing some conceptual, economical, and political motives.
During the previous years, numerous terrorist groups have come up throughout the world and it has become an international problem. Inappropriately, nations are almost unsuccessful in their efforts to resolve concerns in which terrorism are involved (Short 67). This essay discusses some of the popular causes of terrorism as well as the effects.
Causes of terrorism According to various researches, all terrorists’ activities are driven by two things. First is social and political prejudice: individuals opt for terrorism when they attempt to correctwhat they identify to be a societal, political or historically incorrect-when theirproperties or rights have been taken or denied. Secondly is the conviction that viciousness or its hazard would be effectual in bringing change.
This expressed in another way means that terrorists believe that their actions justify the consequences. Most terrorists known in history said openly that they opted for violence after extended reflection since they sensed that they had no option. This elucidation of the causes could be complicated to understand appropriately because it sounds very simple, or excessively theoretical. Nevertheless, looking into any kind of terrorist group, these two major elements are quite evident in their stories.
Effects of terrorism There are several effects of terrorism that are destructive in the nature. On September 11, 2001, the U.S. government experienced such activity, which can be considered as the greatest terror attack on the country. The effect that this attack had on America was unimaginable.
Thousands of people lost their lives. Besides, the attack tremendously impacted negatively on the economy, tourism industry and the overseas society. In addition, it resulted into escalation of unemployment rates. According to statistics, between that period and 2004, unemployment rates in America grew by 2%.
The number of individuals who are jobless has increased from six million in the year 2001 to eight million in the 2004. This substantial reduction is because of lack of sufficient finances to fund employees in the labor force. Furthermore, the U.S. government paid lots of money to families who lost their relatives in the terrorist attacks, which further diminished the economy intensely (Schein 87).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More A part from increases in the unemployment levels and decline in the economy of a country, the other negative effects of terrorism include alteration in the GDP, increase in inflation levels, decrease in Foreign Direct Investment, poor performance in the stock markets, decrease in the worth of the local currency, increases in the government debts and increases in expenditure on defense by the government, and grave unrest and dispute amongst citizens of the country and politicians (Crenshaw 102).
Conclusion Terrorism activities have increased in recent past and continue being a great threat to modern society. There are attempts by various governments to control such activities. As discussed in this essay, it is driven by two major factors: social and political injustice, and the belief that violence is effective in bringing change. The effects are destruction of properties, loss of lives and decline in the economy of a country.
Works Cited Crenshaw, Martha. Terrorism in context. Pennsylvania, PA:Pennman State Press, 2010. Print
Schein, Leon. Psychological Effects of Catastrophic Disasters: Group Approaches to Treatment. New York, NY: Haworth, 2006. Print.
Short, Christine. Fortress – 2021: The Effects of Terrorism in America and Payback. S.l: Authorhouse, 2010. Print.
Critical Comparative Book Review: Mahatma Gandhi: Nonviolent Liberator: A Biography and The Life of Mahatma Gandhi Research Paper essay help online: essay help online
Deats, Richard L and Mary Jegen. Mahatma Gandhi: Nonviolent Liberator: A Biography. New York: New City Press, 2005.
The book is a well structured chronological assessment of Mohandas Gandhi’s life from his childhood as an aspiring lawyer up to his untimely death. The author symbolizes nonviolent movements and peaceful deeds. The book summarizes Mahatma’s life as follows; Gandhi founded several movements and groups.
He came up with a nonviolent resistance in one major movement, which he initiated to fight against the requirement to register all Indian immigrants. Gandhi’s movement had a huge following and helped to spread his visionary messages. The first diplomatic movement used by Gandhi led to his two-month imprisonment by Christian Smuts, a general based in South Africa. As an act of love, he made sandals for the general during his imprisonment. His movements received a remarkable attention all over the world, particularly Europe.
Gandhi returned back to India after 21 years in South Africa. He exhibited determination in his attempt to continue with the work he had started in India. This work was meant to eradicate the Caste system which was discriminating and regarded disadvantaged individuals as social misfits.
He also made attempts to restore peace among the Muslim and Hindu Indians. He led the famous Salt march as an assertion of defiance against England’s declaration of monopolizing salt production. In the book, the authors quote Louis Fischer, another famous biographer of Gandhi (Deats
Documentary Film “Roger and Me” Essay best essay help: best essay help
“Roger and Me” is a documentary film that focuses on the events that followed the closure of General Motor’s processing plants in Flint, Michigan. This was in 1989 when Roger Smith the leader of General Motors (GM) made the decision to move these manufacturing plants to Mexico.
The documentary was made by Michael Moore a native of Flint. The film depicts the changing economic fortunes of Flint town as well as Moore’s attempts to gain audience with Roger Smith. The closure of the plants had far-reaching social impacts especially to the thirty thousand employees who lost their jobs. “Roger and Me” tries to convey some of these impacts to its audience.
In the documentary, the GM’s board of directors decides to close the plants even though the company is making a substantial profit. The reasons given for the closure include increasing global competition and the need to reap maximum profits. “Roger and Me” depicts the flipside of this decision. The thousands of laid off workers struggle to find an alternative means of making an income. For instance, one of the laid off workers suffers a mental breakdown and ends up being admitted in a psychiatric clinic.
The film’s maker tries to portray GM’s executives as uncaring. According to Moore, the board of directors is not interested in the plight of GM’s former workers. This lack of compassion is further exhibited when Moore finally catches up with Smith. Smith seems detached with the plight of the people being evicted from their houses. At one time, he requests Moore to take up the issue with these peoples’ landlords and stop placing the blame on GM.
The film’s director and main character is the main protagonist in the film. To most people Michael Moore is a nuisance who is out to make a name for himself using GM. During the film, Moore is evicted from various buildings sometimes in a very unfriendly manner. Moore is a native of Flint town and his father used to be an employee of GM.
Most of the people Moore grew up with ended up becoming employees of GM. These scenarios justify Moore’s actions because the closure of the manufacturing plants in Flint is likely to have a direct impact on his life. Some of his acquaintances were going through difficult times after the closure of GM’s plants in Flint. Moore confesses that during his early days he witnessed several citizens realize the American dream using GM.
For most part of this documentary, General Motors is exhibited in a negative light. There is a likelihood that the film’s negative portrayal of GM is fueled by anger and it might be unjustified. However, Moore’s depiction of GM can be explained through various scenes in the film. For instance, the scene where a former employee of GM breeds rabbits and sells them for meat mimics the relationship between GM, and its employees. GM acts in the same way as the woman who raises and finally kills her rabbits.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In Moore’s view, GM does not consider its employee’s as humans but as means of making profit. When the company feels that there is no more profit to be made from Flint’s citizens, it moves on to other victims in Mexico. In another instance, the film documents the indifference of GM’s board of directors.
Moore enquires whether the company’s leader is aware of the social situation in Flint. Smith replies to this question nonchalantly further proving the indifference of GM’s executives. The only thing that matters to GM’s executives is maximization of profits. According to these executives, any action is fair as long as their profits are not affected. Smith turns down Moore’s offer to visit Flint because he believes the situation in Flint is not his concern.
The film’s audience can learn many details about America. For instance, the film depicts a major disconnect between American corporations and the country’s citizens. Most American citizens are taught to have a sense of pride when it comes to their country and its products. Some American based companies use this angle when they are advertising. However, in this documentary the hypocrisy beneath this notion is revealed. GM betrays the American pride by denying the citizens the benefits that come with having a world-class company.
It can be argued that American corporations use the sense of American Pride only when it suits them. For example, there was a time when American companies started campaigns to combat European competition using this American pride. Moore’s documentary is able to depict America in a more realistic manner as opposed to what is contained in slogans, loyalty pledges, and the national anthem.
“Roger and Me” is one of those documentaries that have had a significant impact on American citizens. GM could fault this film as an attack on its policies but the film traverses beyond the boardroom antics of the company and into the real life effects of its decisions. Moore seems to attack GM’s policies solely from a socialist point of view but the attack seems popular among the citizens. The film was well received by audiences and it was also a financial success.
Psychological Trauma: Treatment Planning Case Study college admission essay help
Synopsis of the Case The case under analysis relates to a young girl named Geraldine Brown, who is an America-African girl aged nine years. The history of Geraldine shows that she has grown up in one of the towns in the United States all her years. She has a sister three weeks old named Jasmine.
Their mother, Tanya is the sole breadwinner in the family who works in one of the Information Technologies firm while their father is a local driver with one of the truck companies in the city. Geraldine was very close with her mother and maternal grandmother. Her mother’s relatives would frequently visit. Through an interview, it is revealed that Geraldine is staunch Christian since she was an active member of the local church when her mother was alive.
Unlike the mother, her father is an alcoholic and an abuser of various drugs. This condition made him violent towards Geraldine’s mother, who was frequently abused. However, her father was never violent to her since he provided the needed care. An interview with Geraldine proved that the family has been moving from one place to the other. Whenever settled in one place, her father would always abuse the mother.
Reports from the police proved that 911 calls had been received from each house that the family lived meaning that her father’s violent behavior has been consistent. Geraldine’s mother refused to file charges against her husband whenever the police arrived in response to the 911 calls. The father’s behaviour was extremely dangerous to the family since he would even assault the mother when she was pregnant.
Three weeks after the mother delivered Jasmine, she was seriously beaten and succumbed to injuries. Geraldine was taken to the care centre specializing in trauma diagnosis for further examination. Before this, a forensic interviewer had extracted some critical information from Geraldine. At the fateful night, Geraldine was sleeping in her room while Jasmine was in a bassinet when she heard a sound of utensils breaking.
When she woke up, her parents were fighting while yelling at each other. Geraldine was helpless and she could not control anything, as the yelling went on for hours. At one time, she could not hear any noise and she was optimistic that the fight was over. After a few moments of silence, the screaming went on, but this time it was different since a scary sound was heard. She never attempted to check what was going on since she knew that everything would be fine as usual.
Soon after, her parents went in their room and locked the door. While in their room, her parents started quarrelling once more, something that forced her to check what exactly was going on. She was terrified since she feared that her father would see her peeping in the door hole. When her parents were quarrelling and fighting, Jasmine was crying. The mother was trying to calm Jasmine while threatening to call the police.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More At this moment, Geraldine thought of calling the police, but she feared her father would notice. She also contemplated notifying the neighbours, but she could not reach them without opening the main door. She convinced herself that the fight would be over and everything would go back to normal. Before she could even return to her bed, she heard a strange yelling from the mother, something that she had never heard before.
She was now scared since the mother was crying for help while shouting that she was not ready to die. Her father opened the door she was leaning on. The father seemed tired as if she had done a heavy work. When she opened the door to see where her mother was, she only saw her father, but her mother was nowhere. She never confronted the father since she knew that she could be injured or even killed.
Her father instructed her to go to her bedroom and claimed that a tragic accident had just occurred. The father moved towards the kitchen to wash his bloodied shirt. Geraldine went back to her bedroom, but she returned soon after since she could not hear any noise, apart from that of Jasmine crying. She heard her father talking over the phone saying that something terrible had just happened in the room.
Geraldine rushed to her mother’s room to see what had taken place, but she was ordered back to her room. She obeyed her father’s instructions and went back to sleep. After a few minutes, she heard an ambulance siren, with some paramedics. The medics wrapped Jasmine in a blanket and handed her over to Geraldine. The body of her mother was taken away to the morgue, but Geraldine was convinced that her mother would be fine. The police while in handcuffs whisked her father.
Geraldine never believed that her mother would be dead since she was hopeful that God had heard her prayer. She was taken to the neighbour’s house whereby the social worker and one police officer asked her whether they had a relative. She gave them her grandmother’s number, who was called soon after.
Geraldine and her young sister were later taken away to the grandmother’s house whereby she was taken to the CAC centre the following day for an interview regarding what she saw that fateful night. She explained that her mother could have been injured accidently or her father could have caused the injury. She not convinced that her mother dead. Geraldine attended her mother’s burial service, but she was not emotional. Her grandmother and godmother are the two legal custodians of the two sisters.
The godmother reports that Geraldine is always scared of any noise and seems troubled since she wakes up in the middle of the night while sweating and shaking. Any time an ambulance passes by, she is anxious. She wants to respond to any phone call hoping that it is her father calling. The grandmother and the godmother are optimistic that Geraldine would be fine in case she is transferred to a different school.
We will write a custom Case Study on Psychological Trauma: Treatment Planning specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Trauma-Informed Assessment Practitioners in the field of counselling employ a number of trauma treatment models. Trauma-informed assessment means that the role of each actor is important. Therefore, a critical review should be conducted to determine the role of each person as far as managing a traumatic event or situation is concerned. Based on this, it is true that each person has a role to play in initiating trauma-informed practices. To support traumatized children, such as Geraldine, certain terms should be evaluated in detail.
Caregivers and specialized psychologists should change their approach in terms of addressing the problems that traumatized children, such as what Geraldine, went through. For a social worker to execute his or her duty excellently, he or she should understand basic terms such as trauma focused-cognitive behavioural therapy, survival brain, resilience, developmental trauma disorder, and trauma integration.
The social worker cannot employ all treatment models in addressing the problems facing the child, but instead he or she should first identify the thing that matters most. This would help him or her deliver the much needed help to a child going through a trauma, such as Geraldine.
For the client described in this case, the social worker would have to identify what matters most and go a notch higher to determine the coping abilities of the child. In this case, what Geraldine was exposed to was the source of trauma (Lehmann, 2000). Her current surrounding matters so much since it determine her ability to cope. The information gathered through an interview with the client is what would be relied upon in assessing her situation.
Violence is the main cause of trauma in children and adolescents because reports from juvenile justice system and child welfare confirm this. Trauma could also be caused by other factors, such as fire and accidents, but violence is the leading cause, particularly in children.
When children are exposed to non-violent incidents, such as house fire and car accidents, trauma is not usually screened in them (Openshaw, 2008). Therefore, it is true to argue that experiences matter so much since it affects an individual’s coping ability. For the social worker to identify what Geraldine is going through, the way in which she experiences the event ought to be understood.
Resilience research and developmental trauma disorder research are some of the conceptions that support the idea that the way an event or situation is experienced induces trauma to the child. Furthermore, only the child going through trauma is in a position to explain what would be employed effectively to resolve the situation.
Studies focusing on resilience claim that not all events or situations believed be to be traumatizing would usually affect individuals (Saxe, 2007). For a relevant treatment plan to be applied in the case, the client must give her views as regards to how she experiences what she is exposed to in her daily life. Research shows that a treatment plan could turn out to be traumatizing in case it is not applied effectively (Osofsky, 2003).
Not sure if you can write a paper on Psychological Trauma: Treatment Planning by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Every traumatizing event or situation would have unique conditions that would call for an extra-ordinary treatment plan. A social worker would not assume that all children are traumatized by what they are exposed to in their environment. In case a trauma occurs, the intervention techniques or the treatment plan is not usually similar.
In 2005, one of the organizations specializing in child welfare concluded that all efforts channelled towards minimizing trauma in children should be based on certain ideas, strategies and processes, which are meant to offer security, tone of voice and alternatives to the child. Such treatment plans must always be individualized meaning that the solution should be reached after an extensive consultation with the client.
The client should be involved in any process by incorporating his or her views in the development of the plan. The report from the child welfare advised further that trauma services should focus on guaranteeing physical security and emotional safety (Vickerman,
Meg Whitman at E-Bay Case Essay essay help free: essay help free
Meg Whitman collaborated with other employees in E-Bay which enabled the firm to achieve positive performance in the market. She hired new employees and made them aware of corporate changes she intended to introduce in the firm. Whitman employed older and more experienced employees with multiple skills, who did not have any background in Information Technology. The group of employees assembled was competent and had the necessary qualities needed to initiate positive change in the organization.
She also hired another team of employees whose were given the responsibility to assure customers that E-Bay’s financial systems were not susceptible to fraud. This restored consumer confidence in the firm which had been severely eroded. She updated the firm’s systems by installing advanced programs which helped to protect E-Bay from online fraud. These two instances show that Whitman was willing to improve the internal capacity of E-Bay to make its operations more competitive.
Whitman improved the company’s policies to make them responsive to new changes which she had introduced. She learnt new technological skills which demonstrated her willingness to learn and understand problems which the firm was facing at the time. This made it easy for her to understand the firm’s situation which enabled her to communicate key aspects of her vision to subordinates. She collaborated with technical staff to solve system problems which E-Bay was facing at the time.
Whitman also made E-Bay’s customers more loyal because they were receiving high quality services from the firm’s employees. All employees were aware of the importance of customer focus, which Whitman had introduced, as part of the firm’s market strategy. This encouraged them to interact with clients to understand their issues better. This was helped to elevate the company’s position in the market.
Whitman removed obstacles which existed between the firm and its customers. She allowed openness in the way the firm interacted with its clients which made them more loyal to the firm. The ‘Voice of the Customer’ allowed the firm to identify areas in operations which needed improvements to ensure customers were offered high quality services.
This strengthened E-Bay’s brand in the market because customers were more confident about the firm’s reliability and its willingness to satisfy their expectations. Under Whitman’s guidance, the firm transitioned from an auction website to a full e-commerce website. This expanded the firm’s customer segments and led to positive growth in revenues. The firm was in a better position to benefit from a larger revenue base because these approaches enabled it selling more products in the market.
Whitman made customer service a key part of the firm’s vision. This changed E-Bay’s corporate culture and the way it conducted its operations in the market. She also changed the mode of purchasing from auction to fixed price which reduced the time products were sold to different customers. This approach helped the firm expand its reach into new markets which helped it grow its revenues. Her guidance helped E-Bay acquire B
Meg Whitman’s Experience at eBay, Inc Case Study essay help
Meg Whitman is CEO of eBay, Inc. The particular approaches to developing strategies and her leadership qualities made Whitman one of the most successful CEOs in the market world. Meg Whitman’s leadership depends on the effective combination of methods discussed by Kotter as the ways to create the major change within the company. Whitman contributed to the development of eBay, Inc. with references to using the efficient planning and marketing strategies.
Kotter developed the Eight Step Process for Creating Major Change, and Meg Whitman followed all the steps during her integrating process into the company’s culture.
Thus, the focus on changing the environment in relation to using the eight-step model can be discussed as more effective in comparison with the usage of the strategies to promote the company’s rapid growth. The strategy can be followed successfully when the guiding coalition is created. Whitman demonstrated her abilities as the effective leader and focused on the slow development of the working team.
For example, Meg Whitman used the pattern developed in the company in relation to team-building process previously and improved it basing on the ideas of unity of internal and external community cultures along with encouraging and empowering employees to provide their own opinions and recommendations. Furthermore, Whitman decided to integrate into the company’s culture conducting frequent meetings where the team could solve the issues and interact effectively.
To direct the change effort, Whitman proposed the radical vision as the main goal of the company. She stated that it is important to become the world’s largest person-to-person trading company which operates online. From this point, the long-term perspective became focused on the proclaimed vision. To achieve the vision, Whitman developed strategies to work on such issues as the market and brand positioning.
That is why, the frequent meetings helped communicate the new vision of the company’s development. Whitman focused on the effective communication between the participants of the team using senior managers as role models to demonstrate the elements of behaviors expected from the other employees.
Empowering broad-based action, Whitman changed the structure of the organization. Whitman started to work in the engineering-driven organization. To achieve the significant progress, it was necessary to change the structure of the organization with references to the increasing number of employees. Thus, the organization’s structure was later divided into units or departments.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More To generate short-term wins and achieve visible improvements, Whitman concentrated on developing a strategy for the company’s investment, on defining the marketing strategy, and on preparing eBay Inc. for IPO during the first weeks of working in the company. The further wins of the company were associated with overcoming the controversial issue of selling firearms by eBay Inc. To respond to the community’s expectations, it was necessary to improve the working strategies.
The further consolidation of gains and production of more changes was based on supporting the principles of the community’s safety and on developing the partnership relations with many companies, including AOL and Butterfield
“Cinderella: Not So Morally Superior” by Elizabeth Panttaja Essay college admissions essay help
The famous tale “Cinderella” has mostly been thought of as a story with an obvious message that children should understand. It teaches about good and evil, describing two distinct forces and personalities that display what people must be like and what kind of behavior should be avoided.
But not a lot of individuals know that there are several versions of the fairy tale and the interpretations, as well as moral messages, are numerous in the story. In reality, “Cinderella” teaches children and adults how life can sometimes be hard without parents while efforts and sacrifices take long time to be rewarded, and that evil is constantly present by the side or kindness (Ulanov 139).
An article by Elizabeth Panttaja called “Cinderella: Not So Morally Superior” looks at the tale from a different perspective, analyzing true issues of the main character’s morals, the ability to reach justice and the role parents play in the family. The fact that Cinderella always has “good” on her side and uses “magic” to become more superior has been questioned (Panttaja 658).
The classical “Walt Disney’s Cinderella” is filled with beautiful things, righteousness being rewarded and evil punished. It is made obvious that Cinderella is taking on a hard life and must face the rough relationship with her sisters and stepmother (Campbell 642). But in some ways, the role that the “bad parents” play is negated.
Cinderella’s mother or father usually dies in the beginning of the tale but, as Elizabeth Panttaja mentions, they stay with her during her life in different forms.
They visit her as many animals, as spirits from the other world or as fairies and magicians. The contrast in the relationship between her real parents and the stepmother is made obvious, to display how a proper parent should behave. So, Cinderella does feel the support of her mother or father through the magic of animals, reinforcing the necessary support a child must have growing up.
The negative behavior from her sisters and stepmother is a very valuable part of the lesson, as they also shape Cinderella’s character. Without their influence she would not have learned how it feels to suffer for no reason and wouldn’t know how it is to do things in vein and not be repaid in kind for her own selfless acts. Another point that the author of the article mentions is that there are no real descriptions of love or passionate relationship between Cinderella and the prince.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More It could be understood that it is a children’s tale and this would not be needed or children would not simply realize the details and facts about love. But at the same time, it is possible to assume that this a tradition that was instilled in the society where the ruler of the land chooses his wife and this becomes a form of a deal where the woman has no choice but is forced into marriage.
An idea that it was Cinderella’s and her mother’s trick to full the prince into believing that she is special, is taken by Elizabeth Panttaja (Panttaja 660). This seems somewhat imprecise of the tale because no one really forces the prince to make his choice and the fact that he was blinded by her beauty and glamour cannot be accepted because it would mean that the prince was shallow and unwise.
Almost every version tells of how the person of high rank, be it prince, chief or any other character, has a conversation with Cinderella and by spending some time together, he realizes that she is a good person. The common theme of all versions of “Cinderella” does teach highest morals, no matter what interpretations are examined.
The oldest version of the tale is considered to be the Chinese one, “written about 850-860 A.D.” (Ch’eng-shih 633). It is a story where the girl also gets abused by her stepsisters and stepmother, after Cinderella’s father dies. She then befriends a fish in the pond that gets killed by the stepmother. Then, a man in a form of a spirit, tells Cinderella to take the bones of the fish and keep them, and in case she needs anything, she can pray and it will be done.
This proves right and Cinderella is said to have received many riches. The story ends like any other, with a king taking her to be one of his wives (Ch’eng-shih 634). It is interesting to note that in the Chinese version and several others, Cinderella becomes one of several wives. This is very much reflective of the time and social beliefs that the stories were written in but it lowers the unique and special nature that Cinderella has in the modern versions. She is being discovered as not one of a kind but as one of many.
Also the riches that she receives from the “wishing bones” seems somewhat uneven with the modern version and it is not clear why Cinderella, described as a humble and simple person, would need all the jeweler and expensive things (Otnes 235). Perhaps, it was included so that children would be lured into the story by the sparkly diamonds and the great reward that Cinderella has received, comparing to her stepsisters and stepmother.
An African Cinderella, called “The Maiden, the Frog, and the Chief’s Son” follows a widely known theme of abusive parents and the later reward of marrying a chief’s son but the difference is that here, the frog is “vomiting up” all the beautiful things that the poor girl needs (Edgar 638). This can be explained that the people who told the story were very close to nature and so, this could confirm the fact that the frog was one of the characters.
We will write a custom Essay on “Cinderella: Not So Morally Superior” by Elizabeth Panttaja specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Even though it might seem unappealing to the children today, this story shows that children of the time this story was written or told were much different. To them, nature and its processes were a part of life and this shows that their morals and understanding of the surrounding environment was much deeper than it is of children today. Another version, called “Oochigeaskw—The Rouch-Faced Girl” which is a Native American version, goes even further and describes a girl who is physically abused and has many scars.
The general theme of suffering from stepmother and sisters is consistent with the other stories but in this tale, the prince is called “The Invisible One” and is described as the great spirit of nature and the entire world. He stays invisible to all women except his sister and only a person with a good heart and true connection to nature can know what he looks like (“Oochigeaskw—The Rouch-Faced Girl” 640).
The poor, scarred girl is the only one sensitive enough that she has found her escape in the beauty of existence. This story has a very deep meaning that is connected not only to good and evil but also to the world and all the living things, as well as natural physical objects. It is evident that Native People were very much in tune with the world and this reflects in their stories.
“Cinderella” has always been regarded as a children’s story and people have forgotten the details, once they have reached a certain age. The deep morals and life lessons that are described in the short story have been elaborated on, but the true meanings are often overlooked. In an article by Bonnie Cullen called “The Rise of Perrault’s Cinderella” a version by Perrault is analyzed and the story of an abused girl is aligned with “bourgeois life” and wealth (Cullen 650).
This could be taken as a valid point because some tales do have an extreme focus on the riches and the benefits that Cinderella gets from being “acquainted” with fairies and magic. But it could be assumed that the authors created such a contrast and riches for a specific purpose, which is to show children and adults the two extremes of life.
The close connection to the past and modern world can be seen in the unfair division between classes. Some people are forced to live in worst conditions, health problems and little food while others do not think twice when buying houses, cars and boats.
One thing for sure, is that “Cinderella” tales are filled with references to real people and conditions that are present in the environment. Even though some things are exaggerated, the truth, respect and human suffering are very much the same, teaching people on how to live right and what are the valuables of a proper person.
Works Cited Ch’eng-shih, Tuan. “A Chinese Cinderella”. Writing and Reading Across the Curriculum, 11th Edition. Ed. Laurence Behrens and Leonard J. Rosen. Harlow: Longman Publishing Group, 2010. 633-634. Print.
Not sure if you can write a paper on “Cinderella: Not So Morally Superior” by Elizabeth Panttaja by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Cullen, Bonnie. “The Rise of Perrault’s Cinderella”. Writing and Reading Across the Curriculum, 11th Edition. Ed. Laurence Behrens and Leonard J. Rosen. Harlow: Longman Publishing Group, 2010. 645-669. Print.
Edgar, Frank. “The Maiden, the Frog, and the Chief’s Son”. Writing and Reading Across the Curriculum, 11th Edition. Ed. Laurence Behrens and Leonard J. Rosen. Harlow: Longman Publishing Group, 2010. 635-638. Print.
Grant, Campbell. “Cinderella”. Writing and Reading Across the Curriculum, 11th Edition. Ed. Laurence Behrens and Leonard J. Rosen. Harlow: Longman Publishing Group, 2010. 641-642. Print.
“Oochigeaskw—The Rouch-Faced Girl”. Writing and Reading Across the Curriculum, 11th Edition Ed. Laurence Behrens and Leonard J. Rosen. Harlow: Longman Publishing Group, 2010. 639-640. Print.
Otnes, Cele. Cinderella dreams: the allure of the lavish wedding. Los Angeles, United States: University of California Press, 2003. Print.
Panttaja, Elizabeth. “Cinderella: Not So Morally Superior”. Writing and Reading Across the Curriculum, 11th Edition. Ed. Laurence Behrens and Leonard J. Rosen. Harlow: Longman Publishing Group, 2010. 658-661. Print.
Ulanov, Ann. Cinderella and Her Sisters: The Envied and the Envying. Philadelphia, United States: Daimon, 2008. Print.
Gun Limitation: Proponents and Opponents of Gun Control Essay college admission essay help: college admission essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Arguments against Gun Control and Limitation
Arguments for Gun Control and Limitation
Introduction The debate about gun control and limitation in America recently took a sharp turn when the U.S. president attempted to push for the legislation of a more restrictive firearm law without success.
The failure to enact legislation for more restrictive gun laws present more challenges. It means that dangerous gun owners may still endanger the lives of Americans. The recent violence and unselective killing of American citizens may probably continue.
Advocacy for or against gun control in the country has divided Americans in terms of thoughts. The supporters of gun limitation are concerned about escalating cases of violence associated with firearms. For example, the inhumane killing of “twenty children and seven staff members at the Sandy Hook Elementary School” by one America gun owner was a traumatizing experience (The White House).
However, opponents of gun limitation and control appear untroubled by such occurrences. Instead, their concern normally relates to the notion that gun control can deny them their constitutional rights pertaining to self-defense. This paper presents the concerns of both proponents and opponents of gun control.
Arguments against Gun Control and Limitation The opponents of gun control and limitation normally argue that the Second Amendment explicitly offer them an opportunity to own firearms. Particularly, they own firearms for self-protection against criminals and a tyrannical government (Gischler 7). The interpretation of Second Amendment is still work in progress towards attaining a consensus. However, there is no consensus about the interpretation of the clause.
Opponents of gun control believe that the Second Amendment aimed at protecting Americans against a government that intends to take away their rights to own guns (Gischler 7). The opponents seek to continue enjoying their gun ownership rights because the constitution provides for the regulated militia. They argue that it was the intention of the Second Amendment to keep the firearms and contribute to the promotion of security (Gold18).
Opponents of gun regulation have also suggested that controlling firearm ownership and use usurps the rights of law abiding Americans. They have presented strong cases regarding the notion that gun limitation present more challenges associated with unnecessary stringent laws (Gold19).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In addition, the Americans observe that they do not need more regulations because they are already adhering to the minimum laws on gun ownership. The people who use guns for recreation and leisure activities also fear that gun control and limitation initiatives might take away their rights for such engagements (Crooker 45).
Finally, the opponents reject gun control and limitation initiatives because they are highly ineffective. They criticize gun control for failing to stop or reduce firearm violence. The Chicago State has featured extensively in the opponents arguments seeking to show the ineffectiveness of the original gun control legislations (Tushnet 6).
Their main argument has revolved around the statistics that emerged indicating that in a single year five hundred people died because of gun violence and gun wounds in Chicago. For them, the control and limitation initiatives aimed at regulating firearm ownership and use cannot generate positive results (Goss 117).
They also observe that guns are not responsible for killing people. Instead, people are responsible for the death of others. People who are killers can murder others using any weapon and guns. Therefore, they declare that targeting guns through legislations indicates mischief.
Arguments for Gun Control and Limitation The proponents of gun control and limitation have advanced different arguments in support of such initiatives. The supporters argue that Americans should collaborate in efforts aimed at reducing or stopping unnecessary murder cases similar to the killings that occurred recently (Gold18). The recent firearm violence and haphazard killing of innocent Americans should be brought under control through legislating more restrictive gun laws to control ownership and use of the deadly weapons (The White House).
Furthermore, the proponents suggest that gun limitation is crucial to reducing homicide cases in the country. Therefore, gun control and limitation is simply concerned with ensuring that dangerous people do not access guns (Gischler 7). The proponents have also promised that gun control initiatives are not focused on taking away the rights of Americans to own and use firearms.
The proponents also argue that gun limitation initiatives seek to offer law enforcement departments more tools to check and prosecute shotgun violence (The White House).
We will write a custom Essay on Gun Limitation: Proponents and Opponents of Gun Control specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The apparatus that gun control and limitation intend to apply include the integration of background checks on all activities associated with gun sales or exchange among individuals. Background checks are crucial to ensuring that dangerous Americans do not access firearms (Magoon 55). Gun control initiatives seek to close firearm loopholes particularly to dangerous Americans interested in purchasing guns.
Furthermore, gun control is not about taking away the rights of Americans to own and use guns. The initiatives aim at ensuring that people do not own stronger attack rifles (Magoon 54). The strong weapons include assault firearms that can kill many people at a go. Gun control also seeks to allow government agencies to conduct robust research into the key issues that cause deaths associated with firearms and suggest appropriate ways of averting further killings (The White House).
Works Cited Crooker, Constance E. Historic Guide to Gun Control. Westport, CT: Greenwood Press, 2003. Print.
Gischler, Katrin. Why Has Gun Control Become Such a Contentious Issue in American Politics? München: GRIN Verlag GmbH, 2007. Print.
Gold, Susan D. Gun Control. New York: Benchmark Books, 2004. Print.
Goss, Kristin A. Disarmed: The Missing Movement for Gun Control in America. Princeton: Princeton University Press, 2010. Print.
Magoon, Kekla. Gun Control. Edina, Minn: ABDO Pub, 2008. Print.
The White House. Now is the time to do something about gun violence. 2013. Web.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Gun Limitation: Proponents and Opponents of Gun Control by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Tushnet, Mark. Out of Range: Why the Constitution Can’t End the Battle Over Guns. New York: Oxford University Press, 2007. Print.
Role of Money in the American Dream’s Concept Essay college essay help
I have heard and met successful people in the United States of America who started their businesses with little capital. Many people around the world also believe that when you work in the United States of America you get rich quickly.
However, after being in the United States of America for more than two decades, my perception about the American dream changed when I realized it is beyond earning extra dollars. American dream means freedom of opportunities, which are available to all the Americans irrespective of where they live. According to the third circle theory, human beings succeed in life depending on their actions on what they observe daily.
Therefore, most Americans have become successful by observing those who have migrated to the country with a positive mind to succeed and thus opening up their minds. The actions of successful people have affected many people in the society that American dream means earning millions of dollars and accumulating wealth more than other people in other countries around the globe.
Most people associate success with money, which leads to misunderstanding that when you have a lot of wealth then you are among the most successful people. The misconception arises when one knows nothing else as the measure of success other than money. Such a person beliefs that opportunity only rewards in monetary form.
Many people lack the meaning of the American dream because they are always looking forward to find opportunity and fail to realize that the opportunity to succeed is always around them in the work they do daily. Most students like having fun first after graduating but due to unemployment and huge debts they have by the time they complete their studies they believe there is nothing like American dream.
The American dream means exploiting every available opportunity to work and earn money. Wealth cannot be accumulated by being idle and hopping to earn millions of dollars in a day. The dream means being ready to work even if one is paid little at the start hoping that as work progresses the level of income will increase or one would get another better paying job or business.
For people to succeed financially, they do not have to be employed. They can start their organizations and become their own chief executive officers or accept the little wage they underrate in the low paying organizations because it is still higher than what people that are more educated are earning in other states outside the United States of America.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The Americans should embrace any work at their exposure even if it seems the wrong choice when analysed by friends and colleagues especially when an individual with a high level of education does a low paying job. Working with hope for a better opportunity exposes one’s mind to be more creative and belief that it is possible to achieve anything when you focus your mind on it. With a positive mind to succeed, one does not have to be educated in order to get rich although education is an added advantage.
American dream therefore means the ability for one to discard the idea that it is his or her right to accumulate a lot of wealth. It means thinking that everybody has the right to engage in any employment regardless of the pay or start any business even when the capital one has is little and hope to get reach while working. Americans should stop thinking just about money and start defining their life with an entrepreneurial mind in order to enter higher levels required in the third circle.
Ethics and Abortion Essay best college essay help: best college essay help
Introduction Ethical decision making in health and patient care revolves around making good choices, which will not harm the parties involved. However, ethical dilemmas may arise when more than one choice is available, and neither will result in wrong or right consequences.
The experiences, beliefs and values of the healthcare provider/ stakeholder will determine how one arrives upon a decision; abortion is one such situation. In weighing the options concerning whether to perform an abortion and how to care for the patient, a healthcare entity must consider the legal implications, the patient’s and provider’s beliefs as well as the health effects of that decision.
Abortion is an ethical issue in the health profession because it touches on human rights. Opinions become divergent on this matter because stakeholders have different ways of defining personhood (whether an entity is a person). It is generally agreed that taking away a human life is unethical. However, abortion debates centre on deciding whether the fetus is a human being or not. If a person deems the fetus as a person, then it possesses human rights that should be protected.
Conversely, if the ethical decision maker thinks a fetus is not a person, then he or she might treat an abortion as an ethical decision. However, the mother’s autonomy and independence to make decisions about her own body must also be considered. Issues of quality of life also come into the picture because if an abortion endangers the life of a mother, then one must give primacy to the life of the mother over the unborn child. A mother’s interest could conflict with that of a fetus, and this will determine which path will be chosen.
One should note that the United States provides safe abortion with only 0.07% requiring some form of hospitalization. Healthcare professionals must familiarize themselves with these arguments in order to know where their options lie. However, their decisions have legal implications.
Prior to performing an abortion, a healthcare institution or provide must consider the legal implications of doing so. In the United States, federal states have different interpretations of abortion. However, all states generally agree that providers must not be forced to perform abortion or providers should not coerce women into having abortions.
Since the topic is quite controversial, then most parties agree that restrictions on the same are reasonable. They also believe that medically necessary abortions have to take place. However it is the nature of these restrictions that they do not agree on. Some states restrict providers while others focus on women. When targeting providers, they focus on physicians, hospitals after certain periods of maturity, required reporting, and refusal clauses.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More For instance, in Nebraska, an institution cannot perform an abortion after a twenty-week gestation period because it causes pain to the child. Oklahoma laws allow medical practitioners to restrict information about a fetus with disability if they think it will cause the mother to have an abortion. In Utah, willful termination of a pregnancy is treated as manslaughter or murder.
States may also target women by restricting funding, insurance coverage, waiting periods, accessing counseling information and requiring them to listen to the fetus’ heartbeat. In funding, seventeen states in the country fund abortion in Medicaid while others have been forced by state courts. Some states like South Dakota only pay for funding when a mother’s life is in danger. In North Carolina, women cannot get access to funding for Medicaid (Meckstroth 12).
All the above information is necessary in deciding whether an abortion will take place or not. If a medical practitioner gives precedence to his person beliefs without incorporating these laws, then he or should could be acting morally but illegally. However, healthcare professionals have the right to conscientious refusal to perform an abortion.
This is the point whether their ethical values come into play. For instance, if a physician finds an anomaly in the fetus, the choice to refer an abortion or to refrain from telling the mother in states that allow it has ethical implications. It could be violating a mother’s right to information and privacy, but it could also be upholding the provider’s values of respect for all human life as well as the baby’s rights. In order to come up with the best decision, the provider should balance conscientious refusal with the patient’s interests. He should consider patient autonomy, informed consent, the patient’s health as well as doing the least harm.
In the event that a practitioner decides to exercise conscientious refusal, it is incumbent upon the person to do a referral. However, even this choice has ethical implications because of the financial interests of the patients may contradict the referee’s interests. Choices have to be made based on the patient’s welfare (National Abortion Federation 3).
Medical providers are required to refrain from coercing patient’s into abortions. Therefore, the patient must make the choice to have an abortion. However, if the patient is incompetent, then a surrogate should be selected. A provider must exercise due diligence in ensuring that the surrogate has no ill intentions. Failure to do so could result in an unethical decision.
Health professionals have a series of conflicting interests that they must reconcile in abortion and patient care. These interests range from legal, moral, financial to health concerns. When deciding upon a decision involved in abortion, good practice dictates the use of morally neutral or morally good actions.
We will write a custom Essay on Ethics and Abortion specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The practitioner ought not to intend bad consequences while the good consequences should not be directly related to the bad one (violating fetus’ rights over the mother’s rights). Ethical decision makers need to balance between the bad and good consequences of the act.
Works Cited Meckstroth, Karen. Political and ethical issues in abortion today. 2011. Web.
National Abortion Federation. Ethical standards of abortion care. 2011. Web.
Current market positioning, product strategies and distribution Case Study a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help
Table of Contents Market mix
Customer’s decision process
The PLC model
Suitability of LV’s marketing efforts
Plan for LV to follow
Louis Vuitton’s (LV) current market positioning portrays an image of quality products at reduced prices. Market positioning is the image that a brand portrays to the customer. A customer may consider LV products’ prices to have been reduced rather than achieving affordability.
The company reduced the price of its products by 7% as a response to the lower priced counterfeits and new entrants such as H
Review of Sharpe’s BMW Case Study cheap essay help
Summary of Sharpe’s BMW Tom Dunn worked as a service manager at a BMW dealership in Michigan known as Sharpe’s BMW. He had been recently appointed after the resignation of the former service manager. He noted that the revenues and customer service index (CSI) ratings of the service department had decreased over time.
Bob Deshane who was the acting service director of the dealership proposed a new bonus plan to George Sharpe. He believed that the new bonus plan would correct the department’s problems. He proposed that the service technicians should be compensated differently. Sharpe approved the plan and Deshane handed it to Dunn for implementation.
The service departments are essential to the revenue flow in all auto dealerships. The service department in Sharpe’s BMW had grown amply in a span of three years. The growth was brought about mainly by the higher sales of vehicles to the locals. The company had also been competing aggressively with other suppliers.
There were two kinds of jobs offered in the service department in Sharpe’s BMW. These were the customer pay and warranty pay. The customer pay service took place when a customer paid for car repairs after the warranty period had expired. The warranty pay service on the other hand took place when BMW paid for repairs of cars still covered by the warranty.
The payments given to the service technicians depended on which pay they were working on at a particular time. After the CSI score and revenue had dropped Deshane carried out an investigation and found out that the problem lay in the service department. He realized that there was a difference in the payments given to the service technicians. The customer pay job paid the service technicians more than the warranty job. However the CSI score for the dealership was based on the value of the warranty job.
The gap between the warranty pay and customer pay made the technicians prefer the aftermarket repair stores. Technicians were being paid hourly wage fees at the aftermarket repair stores. NADA and individual dealerships have failed to offer a solution to this crisis.
Deshane’s new plan proposed a monthly bonus to the technicians who would score a CSI rating of 91% and above. This plan enabled the technician’s efficiency to be assessed regularly. By implementing the plan the dealership would also communicate to its staff that it was commitment to the improvement of the CSI ratings.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Dunn personally felt that the bonus would have insignificant economic value to the technicians. He wondered how the bonus plan would be implemented. He also felt that the technicians at Sharpe’s BMW received extensive training which was very expensive. Dunn knew that a successful implementation of the bonus plan would make a difference in his career and the automobile industry.
Analysis of Sharpe’s BMW Sharpe’s BMW had amply increased in size over three years due to their dedication to customers. They provided pick-up and drop-off services to the people who purchased vehicles from them. They also extended these services to customers who lived far away. Sharpe’s BMW offered the virtual service section experience to several of its customers. This service enabled several customers to transact without going inside the service department. This feature acted as an important device in luring in customers from competitors.
On average the service department returns covered 82% of the dealership’s operating costs. The service technicians played a vital role in the dealerships. I agree that the difference between the customer pay and warranty pay should be addressed by NADA and the separate dealerships.
Dealerships can gain 100% return from the service department. If the questions on the CSI survey were revised to focus more on the performance of service technicians the CSI ratings would rise. The BMW’s customers would be able to rate the service technicians they meet at the dealership. BMW will be able to monitor the performance of the technicians which this will automatically increase the CSI score.
BMW can introduce a system that will make the service technicians more committed to the dealership. It is important to do so since the firm invest heavily in their training. The system should also maximize on the technician’s productivity. Deshane’s new plan should be reviewed so that the monthly bonus amount can be raised. Higher monthly bonuses will definitely motivate the service technicians to produce quality work. This will guarantee an increase in the CSI scores and a decrease in the operational costs at the dealership.
Dunn should advocate for the monthly bonuses to be increased for the successful implementation of the new plan. Higher monthly bonuses will also make it easier for Dunn to introduce changes to the dealership. He should come up with an effective program to implement the proposed plan. Dunn will leave an impact in both the dealership and automobile industry if the new plan is successful.
Case study questions Pros and cons of the suggested monthly bonus plan
The proposed monthly bonus plan is good for both the service technicians and dealership. The bonus plan is an indication that the dealership recognizes the efforts of the technicians. The company should compensate the technicians by offering them the monthly bonus in addition to appreciating them verbally.
We will write a custom Case Study on Review of Sharpe’s BMW specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This bonus will motivate the technicians to produce quality work. This will guarantee an increase in the CSI scores. Higher CSI scores will lift the rank of the dealership. A dealership is recognized for quality work and exceptional service. The operational costs at the dealership will then be fully covered by the higher CSI scores.
There are several disadvantages of the proposed monthly bonus. It is of insignificant economic value to the service technicians. A technician can earn an equal amount by working quickly in the warranty pay job. It will therefore be deemed as non-beneficial by some of them. It could lead to a decrease in their productivity.
The monthly bonus plan is new in Sharpe’s BMW and foreign in the automobile industry. Dunn will face a big challenge when he introduces the proposed monthly bonus. Some of the service technicians may have a hard time adjusting to the new plan. Others may feel that their efforts are not being compensated fairly.
It is likely that there may be service technicians who will resent the plan and even engage in a strike. The productivity of the staff may decrease leading to a drop in the CSI score. This will reflect negatively on Dunn as the service manager.
Implementation plan Dunn realized that good service technicians were hard to recruit and even retain. Good service technicians can quit today and get another good job the same day. Technicians lack discipline and have no loyalty to their employers. Dunn therefore needs an effective implementation plan of the monthly bonus. He should communicate the implementation of his bonus plan to his service technicians.
He should introduce the proposed bonus plan after having a clear measurement system of what success means to the dealership. The measurements should be posted on a notice board for all to see. There must be transparency in rating the technicians. Dunn should have a program allowing employees to suggest and implement changes. He should be flexible in changing the bonus plan according to the needs and targets of the company as time goes by.
Public Health Characteristics Essay essay help online free: essay help online free
Different people perceive varying images as far as public health is concerned. Moreover, it can imply different ideas depending on the context used. In the United States, there are various public health perceptions. Public health refers to the science of improving and guarding people’s health.
This is achieved through strategies such as research on diseases, enhancing healthy lifestyles, preventing injury, and creating awareness. Public health experts play a great responsibility in assessing how the environment, personal decisions, and genetics influence health. Through the assessment, they are able to come up with strategies for guarding societies, families, and individuals.
Public Health’s Contribution towards Improvement of Quality of Life and Health Status As a result of public health, individuals can live for longer periods. This is attributed to the fact that public health deals with creating awareness about the strategies that are most effective in preventing diseases. In addition, individuals are advised on appropriate diets, which promote healthy immune systems. When people are aware about prevention of diseases and the significance of nutrients in the body, they are able to take appropriate measures, which lengthens their lives.
Public health also deals with environmental protection. This ensures that air, land, and water pollution are prevented. A clean environment is vital for ensuring that water- borne and air- borne diseases are prevented (Webster, 2001). Consequently, this ensures healthy communities. Public health is extremely important in ensuring safer births. Public health experts advocate for better maternal and health services that entails the care of all age groups.
The vulnerable groups such as children aged less than five years, expectant and lactating mothers, people suffering from chronic diseases, and HIV/ AIDS victims have their health needs cared for comprehensively. As a result, expectant mothers are guaranteed safer births. Children aged less than five years, expectant and lactating mothers are provided with comprehensive health care programs, which reduce maternal and infant mortality and morbidity.
Historical Phenomena Responsible for Public Health Responses’ Development A Quarantine refers to a public health policy that was practiced during the fourteenth century. Various quarantine systems were developed as a strategy of isolating merchandise and travellers believed to be coming from infected regions. A majority of the urban authorities operated cordon sanitaire, which had strict regulations. These controls methods were practiced until the nineteenth century.
This was particularly during outbreaks such as cholera, measles, and chicken pox. Moreover, the control methods were aimed at protecting the health of people (Griffiths
Photographer Jeff Wall and His Paintings Report essay help site:edu
Jeff Wall is clearly an audacious photographer. In an industry where perfectionism is the norm, this artist prefers to focus on realistic images. It is rare to find abstract representations on any of his paintings.
One can easily understand his subject matter because they are things or people with which the public can identify. This photographer will either focus on the obvious story or not do anything at all. Nonetheless, the artist’s realism does not imply that he is a pop culture photographer. Wall’s images are always surprising because they have a touch of irony.
Invisible Man At first glance, the use of a light box for this photograph immediately captures the attention is its viewers. The artist placed the picture in a light box, where he used fluorescent light bulbs to make the image glow. If one looks at this image in a gallery, one is likely to be drawn to it because it is illuminated, but most importantly, because it is rich in detail.
Such a technique gives one a lot of insight into the artist. First, it shows that he is committed to making his image beautiful. This was a quality that the artist never compromised on. He went to great lengths to embellish his work. Unlike other realists who preferred to let viewers find the beauty, Wall made it a prioroity. Secondly, the method is an indication that light is a central theme in his photograph. The number of light bulbs in the picture is overwhelming, and the devices would arouse one’s curiosity about their presence.
Finally, one can also assert that he was mimicking and ridiculing a typical approach in advertising. Several commercial posters use light to illuminate their subject. While this artist may not have set out to criticize commercial advertising, his choice of a light box immediately achieves the same. In essence, this photograph is a parody of consumerism because the subject matter does not find satisfaction in material things. He only feels distraught and camouflaged by them (Whyte 32).
The image consists of an African American man in a vest sitting on a chair. He is holding onto something and looking into the distance. The room has a range of brightly-colored curtains that are out of place. There are piles of clothes almost everywhere; on top of chairs, cabinets, boxes and the floor. Furthermore, some of the light bulbs interlock with wires and pipes thus indicating that this was not a legal connection. The room is clearly in a state of disarray as the dishes and several other things in the room are unattended to.
It took Jeff Wall quite some time to come up with the final image of Invisible man. This is illustrative of the commitment that the artist had for his work. Wall would not stop shooting until he was completely satisfied with his work. He recreated scenes from a book by a similar name, which Ralph Ellison wrote in 1952. Therefore, if one took the time to analyze the artist’s work, one will find that it is based on a real-life situation. In the novel ‘Invisible man’, a man left street riots and went into hiding in a cellar.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Choosing such a subject matter implies that Jeff Wall revered the idea of the forgotten in society. He wanted to tell their story through photography. However, the excesses in the picture cause it to blur the lines between fiction and reality. Some of these excesses include the numerous light bulbs that are hard to find in any typical room or the degree to which things have been clustered.
One of the themes of the piece is illumination. The picture is contained in a light box, and the subject also has plenty of light bulbs. In fact, the novel illustrates that 1,369 light bulbs were present in the cellar.
It is puzzling that one would require so many light bulbs. The subject did not use them for aesthetic purposes because they are not that pleasing to the eye. Furthermore, some of them do not even work as only a handful of them have been lit. This could be interpreted as an external depiction of the man’s longings. He was stuck in an underground cellar where he found temporary refuge from the chaos outside.
However, after going into hiding, he had to let go of his past. This may have included his family, job or even his circle of friends. The person seems lonely and isolated, so his current life is probably a dark contrast to his former one. In essence, he is not optimistic about his future. This leaves a void in his heart that he tries to fill with the light bulbs. The devices are a desperate outlet for his disappointments. Wall thus tells the story of a marginalized member of society in a moving way (Vasudevan 571).
Mimic The size of this photograph is noteworthy when one first looks at the piece. It is 198cm long and 226 cm wide. When asked why Wall made his pictures like this, the artist replied that he wanted to expose every detail of his work. He criticized his peers who often used small images to represent their subjects.
Wall felt that such photographers were too keen on printing their pieces in books, and this condensed the details of their work. Another glimpse at the picture reveals three subjects; one Asian man wearing a short sleeved short and formal trouser and a Caucasian couple beside him. The man in the couple is casually dressed in a denim vest and orange t-shirt while his girlfriend or partner has red shorts and a white top. The Caucasian looks at the Asian man and slants his eyes in imitation of the Asian man’s eyes.
Several themes emanate from this photograph. First, Wall wanted to disclose the overt racism in the country. This testifies to the artist’s preference for marginalized communities as subjects. Just like ‘Invisible man’, this picture focuses on a victim of social discrimination. Wall probably felt that their experiences and point of view needed to be heard or exposed. The redneck in the photo holds racial biases against the Asian man.
We will write a custom Report on Photographer Jeff Wall and His Paintings specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This may stem from his underexposure to people who are different from him or merely from racial bigotry. Racial slurs and attacks are problems that many immigrants deal with in the country. It is interesting that the Asian man does not counter the attack because he probably knows that he cannot win. Furthermore, the Caucasian man harasses this stranger because he knows that he can get away with it (Burnett 59).
The theme of class tensions also comes out in the piece. The Asian man is well-dressed and clean shaven while the redneck has an overgrown beard and t-shirt. Furthermore, the ease with which the Caucasian uses such an obscene gesture; that is his middle finger, is indicative of his crass mannerisms.
This photo could be read as a depiction of class differences between certain members of society. The redneck could be jealous of his target as he seems successful and put together. Perhaps the hit man wanted to feel better about his failures by using the only avenue available to put his target down.
Wall often liked subjects that mirrored real-life experiences, and mimic is one such piece. The artists drew his inspiration from encounters he had or experiences from his past. This photographed captured an exchange that Wall had witnessed. It is, therefore, an indication of his realist tendencies.
Even the background testifies to this school of thought. It was an industrial featureless neighborhood that retaliated his unpretentiousness. The artist explained that the physical energy on streets fascinated him. Their authenticity was what drew him to such scenes.
Wall also took some time to create this piece. In fact, he hired actors and other crew members to put the image together. Some critics claim that this staging of occurrences takes away the rawness of the situation. His pictures did not seize upon impulsive moments. However, one may look at this choice of technique as a way of paying homage to his subject matter. He wanted to recreate a situation as perfectly as he could and non directed shots just could not do that for him.
Photographer Jeff Wall is indeed a creative and bold artist. His unpretentiousness is what endears many to the artist. It is laudable that he focused on human subjects who were mostly hidden or marginalized. The artist’s use of staged actors testifies to his perfectionism and commitment to the message.
Works Cited Burnett, Craig. Jeff Wall. London: Tate Publishing, 2005. Print.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Photographer Jeff Wall and His Paintings by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Vasudevan, Alexander. “The photographer of modern life: Jeff Wall’s materialism.” Cultural Geographies 14.4(2007): 563-588. Print.
Whyte, Murray. “Jeff Wall: The invisible man.” Canadian Art 11 May 2006: p. 32. Print.
Comparing Initiation Themes Essay college essay help near me
Table of Contents “Where Are You Going, Where Have You Been”
‘At the Landing’
Initiation refers to a rite of passage from childhood into adulthood or making an entrance into the society. There exist differences in rites of passage from a particular community to another. These rites of passage may vary from a person to another. New responsibilities and a new form of self-realization characterize initiation. Furthermore, the act involves a variety of forms like tribal initiations that involve teachings on adulthood. It may also take the form of spiritual or gang initiation characterized by introduction to criminal gangs.
Initiation occurs in all cultures and there have been a lot of literature written about it. Many teenagers, especially girls make life-threatening decisions during initiation. Initiation has numerous psychological effects as revealed in the narrations of many individuals. Individuals who are initiated by wrong people face many consequences, which affect their lives in many ways. This paper will present a comparison of initiation themes.
“Where Are You Going, Where Have You Been” In the story “where are you going, where have you been”, the main character is Connie who is a 15-year-old self-absorbed girl. She is not in good terms with her mother and she lives with her elder sister who is steady and hard working. The genesis of her initiation occurs in a particular day when, without the knowledge or approval of her parents, she spent a day at “Big Boy” restaurant and captures the attention of a man.
It does not take long before the boy and his friend visit the girl’s homestead in the absence of her parents. The man seems friendly although Connie notices that he has lied about his age. What transpires leaves less to imagination because the man asks Connie to comply with his demands (Oates 8).
The story depicts a sad initiation process for Connie as she is introduced into a sense of self-realization through harassment. Because of her naivety, she is adamant to leave the relationship. Many women have written their biographies with such kind of an initiation including an aspect of forced marriage. The bandits take Connie to a building described by her as being in a dilapidated condition. Moreover, she is threatened to copulate with Friend, who wants her to be his lover and possibly his wife.
‘The Grave’ In the short story of Katherine Porter, ‘The Grave,’ there is a young woman called Miranda who is on a hunting mission with her brother. They take time to view the cemeteries that the family had sold. Miranda is a woman who reveals how she is uncomfortable with several aspects of her life.
The outset of her initiation is when she witnesses her brother killing a rabbit. The two realize that the rabbit was about to give birth. Miranda has a sense of pity and she even starts trembling without any reason. From her reactions, it is apparent that she has realized that she is more mature. Hence, according to the standards of her society, she has to start behaving like a mature woman and accept all the responsibilities that come with the position (Barber 15).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In ‘The Grave,’ the young woman feels that she has been initiated from childhood into adulthood. Although she cannot explain the occurrence of the initiation, she acknowledges that it is time for her to become mature and take up the role of a woman. This is unlike in the case of Connie depicted in ‘where are you going, where have you been?’
In the latter story, Connie is abducted without her knowledge and is initiated by bandits. This form of initiation differs with that of Miranda. Connie’s story involves the use of force into initiation. She never showed any instincts regarding what was to happen or nothing could indicate to her that it was time to step out of childhood.
Connie’s predicament is exacerbated by the threats she receives when she reveals her intentions to call the police. Her story ends with an indication that her initiation is through forced love and eventually into marriage with a man that she barely knew. Furthermore, she is forced to marry a person whom she fears and does not trust. Miranda does not go through forced love in her initiation (Oates 8).
‘At the Landing’ A look into the forms of initiations experienced by the aforementioned women reveals that initiation is worse for a young woman called Jenny. Her predicament is depicted in Eudora Welty’s Story ‘At the Landing.’ She is initiated through rape. A stranger steals Jenny’s innocence and this is the worst form of initiation that can happen to a woman. Further, a group of men rapes her as she attempts to look for Billy, the man who had previously raped her.
Jenny undergoes more suffering in her initiation than the other characters. She is forced to sleep with a man. Her situation is made worse by the societal prejudices directed at women who undergo such shameful experiences. She is blamed for failing to take any action after being raped by a gang of anglers. Her story draws close similarities with that of Lynn (Barber 15), and Connie (Oates 8-10), as both are persuaded into having a sexual relationship during their initiation.
‘An Education’ The story of Lynn Barber in “An Education is a bit different from the others. The story revolves around a 16-year-old schoolgirl. This girl has a chance to meet a man claiming to be 27 years old. Lynn is vulnerable as she is attracted by Simon’s possessions and she succumbs into a premature relationship.
The relationship continues and Simon starts the habit of kissing her for long and even demands to have sex with her. This goes on until they are on a trip and they have sex. Things take a different turn when they are having dinner in a cortege one evening as Simon is sought after by authorities (Barber 20).
We will write a custom Essay on Comparing Initiation Themes specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More After her education, Simon proposes to her and she informs her parents who encourage her to accept the marriage proposal. Deep inside her mind, she knew that this was going to shatter her dreams, as she was a bright girl and had ambitions of going to Oxford University to further her studies. With the consent of her parents, she decides not to go to the University and instead opts to marry Simon. Later on, she realizes that Simon is a dishonest man who had been deceiving her all along.
The story of Lynn Barber shows a naïve girl led into marriage by a much older man. She is a bright girl and has ambitions of furthering her studies but out of her naivety, she opts for marriage with a man who is dishonest and not fit to be her husband.
She undergoes a tough initiation, as her parents do not take their time to learn if Simon was good enough for her. Furthermore, the parents even opted for her marriage and did not reprimand her for not going to college. She is frustrated after learning that Simon had been deceiving her. Her initiation has similar aspects to that of Connie (Oates 8-10).
Both of them are deceived by men who are much older than they are. They are led into marriage despite their age and naivety. Although the story of Connie includes an aspect of force where she is forced to go out with Friend, she had a chance of rejecting his advances from the first time they met in a restaurant. Lynn’s case is out of her free will that she allows Simon to build a relationship with her.
Initiation undergone by Lynn (Barber) and Connie (Oates) shows young girls who are deceived by gifts and money. In both the cases, the two girls are attracted to men with expensive cars. Connie described Arnold Friend’s Car as an expensive car with a bright gold color that caught the sunlight opaquely.
The two girls allowed the men in their lives from the fact that they looked wealthy and they could treat them with expensive gifts. Lynn used to receive flowers and during the weekends. Simon would pick her and go with him to watch movies. We learn from her that her father also accepted and acknowledged Simon to be her friend. The father had asked where Simon and Lynn had met (Barber 2).
Her parents wanted the man to be her lover so that they could gain from his wealth. However, there is no relationship during the initiation of Miranda (Porter 15). She experiences an urge when they are on a hunting mission with her brother Paul. She notes that her father had been urging them to dress like boys although the neighbors were not comfortable with it.
She notes that she is supposed to dress like a woman and was ready to accept her womanhood with all the responsibilities. She feels the urge to go back into the house and dress in a feminine manner. She is luckier than the aforementioned characters because no one deceives her into marriage. Lynn and Connie gain the sense of knowledge from naivety and childhood through a rather regrettable manner.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Comparing Initiation Themes by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More In ‘Charlotte temple’, (Rowson), initiation of a sixteen-year-old girl is not very different as she elopes to America with a British worker. The young girl is left alone when she gets pregnant and the man desserts her to stay with much wealthier woman. She succumbs to a serious ailment and dies in the process of giving birth.
This story is not very different to that of Lynn (Barber), as the two girls are rather young and end up in marriage with men that they do not know well. Moreover, they marry at a rather young age before they have trusted their partners. They are both deceived after marriage as Lynn realizes that Simon is a dishonest man who is wanted by the police. He later starts selling off his property. In the case of Charlotte, the man does not keep the promise of staying with her and as soon as she gets pregnant. He deserts for a much older woman.
Both girls are deceived by looks and wealth. The situation changes when they drop out of school, which leaves them frustrated. Both stories are similar to that of Connie (Oates). They all are deceived and have sexual affairs at a tender age. Although Connie’s fate is not well known, there are indications that she eventually enters into a forced marriage. The story of Connie is however different from that of the two girls because she is married without her consent.
Most of the stories of young girls into initiation involve seduction, which eventually leads to fatal consequences. Many girls fall into this trap as they are targets of men because they are schoolgirls and are considered more attractive to hang out with and have a sexual relationship with.
The men in most cases do not intend to marry them. Further, it happens that they are even dumped off after they get pregnant. This case is well illustrated in the story of the Charlotte (Rowson), where she elopes to America with a man who dumps her when she gets pregnant. Connie (Oates) and Lynn (Barber) also fall into the trap of men who lead them into premature relationships.
All the girls end up suffering and their dreams of furthering their education are shattered. The stories lower their self-worth. A proper initiation should be like that of Miranda (Porter), where her initiation is out of self-induction. She realizes and feels the urge to dress properly like a woman and quit hunting as this was a male affair.
Conclusion In summary, initiation refers to a rite of passage from childhood into adulthood or making an entrance into the society. There are numerous differences between rites of passages in different societies. Initiation is characterized by the emergence of new responsibilities and self –realization. Initiation may also involve a variety of forms like tribal initiations that involves teachings on adulthood. In this paper, various forms of initiation are highlighted.
Most of the individuals that underwent initiation in the aforementioned cases have had bad experiences in the process of initiation. Initiation has numerous psychological effects as revealed in the narrations of many individuals. Individuals who are initiated by wrong people report to have vast consequences, which affect their lives in many ways.
In ‘where are you going, where have you been’ and other stories depicted above, several girls have been initiated into womanhood through negative processes. Some have been raped or forced into early marriages. This paper reveals how girls are tricked into making premature decisions that drastically affects their lives. Hence, there is the need to address the initiation of girls into adulthood through violation of their sexuality such as rape or even forced marriages tender ages.
Moreover, there exists the need to help adolescents refrain from getting into relationships. Involvement into the aforementioned behavior may lead to consequences such as pregnancies or abusive marriages. The cases of Lynn and Charlotte have elucidated the predicament that some young girls face in the process of initiation. From the cases, it is apparent that girls may face negative consequences during initiation than boys. These include social, psychological, and emotional consequences.
Works Cited Barber, Lynn. An Education. New York: Penguin, 2009.
Oates, C. “Introduction”. Where Are You Going, Where Have You Been. New Brunswick: Rutgers University Press, 1994.
Porter, Katherine Anne. Conversations. Mississippi: University Press of Mississippi, 1987.
Rowson, Susanna. Charlotte Temple. Boston: Mobile Reference, 2010.
SWOT Analysis for Amazon Company Essay college essay help: college essay help
Amazon.com Inc, commonly denoted as (AMZN) is a leading global electronic commercial company and the most visited internet retail shopping destination internationally.
The main headquarters of the company is in Seattle, Washington. Commercial icon, Jeff Bezos founded the company in the early 90s as Cadabra and later renamed it as Amazon.com. Amazon sells a variety of products, such as books, video, consumer electronics, music, household products and clothing (Mennen, 2010). The following is a detailed SWOT analysis of the company.
Amazon.com, the U.S. largest internet retailer, commands three times the revenue of its close rival, the Staples Inc. It sells educating and entertaining media products. Amazon has had enormous acquisitions that resulted in the growth and faster delivery of purchased products. In the recent past, Amazon.com boasts on its strategy of rebuilding and investing in Research and Development, establishment of technology and innovative research centers.
Seven years ago, it invested $700 million to establish offices for customer services, fulfillment and software development centers majorly in America, Europe and Asia. Moreover, the viewers’ assessments and comments provide feedback for any adjustment aimed at increasing revenue (Bangs, 2002).
For the past four years since 2006, Amazon’s profits were negative implying that they are not able to cover operational costs. Outsource delivery firms contribute to low earnings and Amazon Associates, their marketers, receives 40% of revenue for marketing efforts. There have been reports of price bias within the Amazon marketing strategies. For example, DVD prices are different on some buyers. This posed as a competitive and a divisive barrier in on-line trading.
In 2008, it received a lot of critics for inhibiting publishers from directly selling at a compromise from their websites. The reason behind was that Amazon does not prioritize on those customers with heavy purchasing power. It has also reduced most of its services to major customers. Recently, it attracted negative publicity due frequent tax avoidance in Britain and U.S.
Amazon is also under criticism for poor warehouse environment for staff, price discrimination and anti-competitive actions. Amazon sells products at zero margins to reap the market and do away with the competition. Though it is a tactical strategy in the short term, it reduces the profits in the long run (Madura, 2007). Competitors, on the other hand, will adapt by undertaking a differentiation strategy, thus losing customers.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Opportunities
There are plenty of opportunities for Amazon to invest and uphold customer beliefs that endorse the customer’s allegiance towards the company. Investing into technology is desirable for all their phases of interaction with buyers and suppliers which will augment the company’s reliability (Stubbs, 2011).
Ventures in carrying out will present an enlarged level of sincere customer services, therefore, meeting consumer prospects. Moreover, partnerships in the private and community division such as with the famous British Library, will offer the surrounding community with the essential services of being competent to search for historical books.
Amazon must initiate joint ventures, acquisitions and partnerships in order to increase the delivery time and efficiency. Amazon should consider partnering with other firms especially for the on-line retailing to promote seasonal stuff and attract new customers. Amazon can pursue niche clients by providing goods and services in diverse cultures and religions.
They can also open more online retail stores in those countries experiencing growing economies such as Asia and Europe so as to maintain growth levels. The company can consider releasing their own products and services and brands in its markets.
Amazon customers have to wait longer to take their delivery as compared with the time they can get from nearby retail stores. The enormous internet trade has attracted a lot of competitors making it difficult for Amazon to differentiate their services. Increasing delivery costs impacts negatively on the end user giving rise to poor reputation of the company. New alliances, networks and partnerships, shaped by the rival firms have strengthened battle for the market, thus increasing the marketing cost (Weber, 2010).
High delivery period and charge have a tendency to divert the present and potential customers to regional bookstores. This gives rise to loss of revenues on those customers opting for local retail stores other than shopping at the Amazon website. When a customer makes a transaction, personal bank details leak to unauthorized persons, therefore, posing a security threat leaving customers with an option to make their purchases on local bookstores.
Concerns, over how these global companies avoid the payment of taxes to various countries is on the rise. Therefore, the governments will have no other option other than make it mandatory the payment of taxes based on their incomes. In this instance, Amazon’s earnings would be drastically reduced (Weber, 2010).
We will write a custom Essay on SWOT Analysis for Amazon Company specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Given its global size, Amazon will not evade the growing competition from its competitors. For example, alliance between e-books providers and Apple Inc posed a challenge to them on internal pricing strategies. Without such a strategic alliance, most content providers were powerless to compete versus Amazon’s bargaining power (Mennen, 2010).
In conclusion, there are mixed perception on whether Amazon will remain leading in internet retail or not. From above, it is clear that Amazon is in a strong position because of more strengths and opportunities than the weaknesses and threats respectively.
Reference Bangs, D. H. (2002). The market planning guide: Creating a plan to successfully market your business, product, or service. Chicago: Dearborn Trade Pub.
Madura, J. (2007). Introduction to business. Mason, OH: Thompson/South-Western.
Mennen, M. (2010). Global Corporate Strategy – A Critical Analysis and Evaluation of Amazon.com. München: GRIN Verlag GmbH.
Stubbs, E. (2011). The value of business analytics: Identifying the path to profitability. Hoboken, N.J: John Wiley.
Weber, P. (2010). Abercrombie
Gun Control Policy: Will it solve suicidal shootings in America? Essay college essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Conclusion and reflection
Introduction A fierce and continuous debate on gun control has recently been prompted by the increasing rate of incidents of school gun massacre in the United States. In particular, the recent Newtown incident that left several children dead has prompted the need for gun control policy in the country. In her February 14 2013 article “With Guns, Killer and Victim Are Usually Same” on The New York Times, Sabrina Tavernise draws the reader to the bigger picture of firearm abuse.
In her argument, Tavernise (1) has constructed the article in form of a conventional Wall Street Journal for featured stories. In the article, the author argues that although most cases of shooting in the past have involved massive shootings, most gun victims are actually using these firearms to commit suicide. She indicates that there are many victims of suicidal shooting than the cases of massive shootings. This statement has been supported by statistics from official agencies.
With sufficient information, Tavernise’s article possesses a great deal of credibility and persuasiveness. By employing an effective use of rhetorical appeals (ethos, logos, and pathos) and tone, the author has effectively developed an argument that persuades the reader to understand the need for reducing cases of suicidal deaths by blocking the access to firearms through a gun control policy.
Rhetoric Analysis Tavernise tries to deviate the public focus on gun debate from mass shootings to she use of guns in suicides. She unveils that the majority of gun-related deaths in America are suicides. Throughout this article, Tavernise manages to present a balanced argument, with opinions from both sides directly involved and interacted.
The author does not seem to suggest the most appropriate method of reducing the problem. However, she employs logos to persuade her readers by providing more than one suggestions, but leaves it out to them to apply logics in examining the best way to control suicidal deaths involving firearms in the United States.
One prominent characteristic of this article is its effective structure. Presented in the style of a feature story, it starts and ends with an anecdote. The tragic story of the Reichert family adds human interest and draws readers’ feelings and attention. In this anecdote, the author draws the readers to a real-life experience of Reichert family in Dayton, Wyoming.
Mr. Reichert and his wife lost their son, Kameron, through a suicidal shooting. Using ethos, the author has drawn the readers to understand the situation brought by the access of guns to the young people in the United States using the case of Kameron. Here, the author draws the reader to develop emotions by describing how Kameron, then only 17 years old, was found dead on the floor of his room. Despite the father having experience in emergency training, he could do little because the son was already dead.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In addition, the reader invokes a sense of sympathy among the readers by describing the grief that affected the family, especially the father who felt guilty for not keeping the 911 dispatcher away from his son’s reach. According to the author, Mr. Reitcher regrets “…I beat myself several times for not having kept the guns out of his reach” (Tavernise 1). Evidently, the authors instil emotions in her readers by applying the anecdote in the article.
The author seems to be effective in using logos in her article in order to make the readers embrace logical approach to the analysis of the gun problem and cases of suicide in the United States. For example, the author discusses the aspect of gun and their involvement in suicide.
She provides a discussion death related guns in 2010 alone, where she indicates that over two-thirds of those deaths were suicides. Therefore, suicidal attempt with guns should be given enough attention, besides mass shootings. The impact of the use of logos in this case is to allow the readers perceive the problem from facts. Therefore, the author is successful in applying logical approach to attract the attention of the readers and make them understand her argument.
Then the body part of this article cited data and research findings, and quoted from experts to present the argument that gun possession are related to homicidal deaths. Following this, the third part is more details about the life of Kameron Reichert to reveal the cause for his suicidal behavior.
The fourth part, involves a discussion on the general causes of suicidal attempt, which is a temporary surge of rage or despair. The author argues, therefore, that guns are lethal and people who are trying to kill themselves with guns available to them usually do not get a second chance.
This is evidenced by statistical indication that more than half of all suicide fatalities result from firearms. With the introduction of another anecdote of the death of Kyle Wells, the fourth part concludes that reducing access to the lethal weapons will make it possible to control the number of suicidal deaths. By telling the story of Kyle, the author intends to contend that suicidal person are suicidal not because of the guns, but because of themselves, as it quotes Kyle’s grandmother “It’s not the guns. It’s the person (Tavernier 1).”
Lastly, in its fifth part, the article gives more specifics about the Reicherts. It shows how family members deal with trauma and their perspectives on guns. The other striking feature about the article’ structure is that both pros and cons are balanced, in addition to being interwoven throughout. For example, after citing literature and experts that suggest the presence of guns increases homicidal death, it immediately jumps to argue against the statement.
We will write a custom Essay on Gun Control Policy: Will it solve suicidal shootings in America? specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In addition to this effective and persuasive structure pattern of argumentation, it also employs all the three rhetorical appeals, ethos, logos and pathos. This article also applied assertion, allusion, analogy, anecdote, and authority. The author makes several assertions, in the article.
For examples, she says, “The national map of suicide lights up in states with the highest gun ownership rates”. She then analyzes this assertion by providing academic evidences from the Harvard centre. With such evidences, the author is trying to convince audience by invoking the findings of an organization with the authority to deal with research.
When quoting B. J. Ayers, a suicide prevention specialist, it uses allusion when it argues that the politics put gun owners on the defensive. For example, the author says “You just bump up against that glass wall, and barriers go up and the conversations break down” (Tavernise 1). In this article, the author has used analogy in a number of instances. For example, the author tries to illustrate that reducing access to lethal weapons works to control cases of gun-related deaths.
She cites the examples of countries such as Israel, where soldiers were prohibited to take guns back home during weekends. This initiative helped reduce the suicide rate among the soldiers and the relatives by more than 40%. For another example, guns are compared to time bombs brought into a house. Rather than protecting you, there is a high possibility that the gun will harm the people in the household.
By invoking data provided by such bodies as the Centres for Disease Control and Prevention, health department offices in Wyoming, North Carolina and Missouri, the author attempts to show her ability to collect information from reliable sources. In fact, this indicates her ability to apply pathos to create credibility of her argument.
In this way, the author seeks to convince the readers that her arguments are justified by the fats provided by the relevant bodies that have the authorities to conduct credible research. Moreover, she attempts to convince the readers by employing her credibility as a journalist with the capacity to outsource information and present it in a dignified manner.
The pathos used in this article is can be seen in the fact that it is a feature story. In its third part, for example, significant efforts have been contributed to the description of the environment and setting of the place where Kameron used to work. The detailed nostalgic description provokes in the hearts of readers a sense of sadness.
Moreover, the tone of the article helps in developing a more appealing and persuasive narrative. Use of certain words such as “shocked”, “heartbroken”, “her voice, breaking” tends to raise sympathetic support. In addition, when referring to the mass shooting in Sandy Hook, the word “massacre” is used. These examples are widely infiltrated throughout.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Gun Control Policy: Will it solve suicidal shootings in America? by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Conclusion and reflection Overall, I find the design of the structure, arguments, rhetorical appeal, diction, and tone of this paper to be very mature, making it very interesting and convincing. The way the argumentation is derived, discussed and analyzed guides readers to reflect on the rationale for gun control. The article seems to argue that gun control will not just aim at control mass attacks, but also prevent the large number of gun-related suicides in America. In fact, the author says that the number of such deaths is close to 20,000 per year.
Works Cited Tavernise, Sabrina. “With Guns, Killer and Victim Are Usually Same.” The New York Times, Feb. 14, 2013.
Martin Luther King’s Speech: A Summary Essay best essay help: best essay help
“I Have a Dream” is widely regarded as the most memorable speech delivered by the American clergyman and civil rights activist, Martin Luther King. This address was made on August 28, 1963, to a gathering of two hundred and fifty thousand people at the Lincoln Memorial in Washington D.C. In the speech, King inspired the people to be steadfast in their fight for civil rights in the country.
Many historians agree that this speech was instrumental in the eventual passage of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, an act that guaranteed equality among the races in the previously segregated America. In this speech, King addressed three major points on freedom, oppression, and nonviolent protest.
The first major point made by King through his speech was that the freedom and equality of all Americans were guaranteed. The speech referenced the abolition of slavery when it stated that “Fivescore years ago, a great American, in whose symbolic shadow we stand today, signed the Emancipation Proclamation” (King 1).
Through the proclamation, the African Americans who had been held as slaves for centuries were freed. As free citizens, King believed that they were entitled to the same rights as the white citizens. King noted that the constitution and the Declaration of Independence guaranteed the freedom and equality of all the citizens of the country. He maintained that the documents were a promise that all men “black men as well as white men – would be guaranteed the unalienable rights of life, liberty and the pursuit of happiness”.
The speech highlighted King’s hope and aspirations that the African Americans would one day gain freedom in the country. It confirmed that King was confident that the American people would one day honor the declaration that everyone was created equal. King declared that “I have a dream that one day this nation will rise up, live out the true meaning of its creed: ‘We hold these truths to be self-evident, that all men are created equal’” (4).
Another point made in the speech is that discrimination and racial injustices were prevalent in the country. This discrimination was undertaken based on the race of an individual. The speech highlighted that while America was a prosperous nation, the people of color continued to live in poverty. King declared that one hundred years after the Emancipation Proclamation, “the Negro lives on a lonely island of poverty in the midst of a vast ocean of material prosperity (1).
The speech demonstrated that people of color were faced with racial injustices every day. That segregation was prevalent in America with some places designated “for whites only”. In addition to this, the speech documented the violent injustices that racial discrimination resulted in. These injustices had necessitated the civil protests such as the one King was addressing.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More King stated that the African Americans “can never be satisfied as long as the Negro is the victim of the unspeakable horrors of police brutality” (3). The speech also acknowledged that the Blacks were undergoing great tribulation in the country. In his speech, he revealed said “I am not unmindful that some of you have come here out of great trials and tribulations” (King 4). King implored the people not to despair even when faced with this discrimination and mistreatment.
The third major point raised in the speech was that nonviolence would be used to achieve the goals of civil rights. At a time when some African American Civil Rights Activist leaders were calling for violence, King emphasized on the need to engage in peaceful protest.
He stated, “in the process of gaining our rightful place we must not be guilty of wrongful deeds” (King 3). According to him, protest could be made in a peaceful and dignified manner. The speech asserted that even when faced with violent opposition, the followers of Martin Luther King would not respond with force. King declared, “Again and again we must rise to the majestic heights of meeting physical force with soul force” (3).
The speech affirmed that all the citizens of the nation should coexist peacefully as brothers. King was keen to point out that in spite of the struggles that the people of color faced, the African American community should not distrust all white people. He explained that there were many white people who supported the struggle for civil rights by the black community. King declared, “Many of our white brothers, as evidenced by their presence here today, have come to realize that their destiny is tied up with our destiny” (3).
The “I Have a Dream” speech by Martin Luther King proved to be a milestone in the Civil Rights Movement and it accelerated the move to achieving civil rights for African Americans. The speech highlighted the aspirations of the African American community and their conviction to keep struggling until their achieved their goals. The points made in the speech inspired millions in the country and they were able to steer the American nation out of racial oppression and into an era of freedom and justice for all.
Works Cited King, Luther. I Have a Dream. August 1963. Web. .
Should the US declare China a currency manipulator? Essay college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Introduction There has been a raging debate as to whether the US should declare China a currency manipulator. The debate has resulted from Beijing’s behavior in international trade that seeks to dominate the international market. China intentionally maintains its exchange rate lower than that of the United States to make its products cheaper than products of the US (Brown par2). This gives them an unfair trade advantage.
The debate involves two sides: opponents and proponents. Opponents claim that declaring China a currency manipulator will harm relations between the two countries and create a trade war (Klein par3). On the other hand, proponents claim that China should be declared a currency manipulator because it gains trade advantage over other countries using dubious means (Brown par3). The US should declare China a currency manipulator because it uses illegal, unethical, and unfair means to gain trade advantage over other countries.
Supporting arguments First, China should be declared a currency manipulator because it uses unethical means to gain trade advantage (Lazear par4). Laws of the United States give power to the Treasury Department to identify countries that use dubious means to manipulate their currencies in order to gain trade advantage.
The Chinese currency is cheaper compared to the American currency. This gives China trade advantage over the US. It intentionally keeps its currency value lower than that of the US dollar (Klein par5). This is unethical because the value of a country’s currency should be dictated by trade activities on the international market (Lazear par4). A low exchange rate enables China to produce goods cheaply and sell them at a higher price against the American dollar that is more expensive.
American companies cannot compete with Chinese companies fairly because their exchange rates vary significantly (Lazear par5). As such, costs of production are higher in America. China has dominated American merchandise markets with cheap goods that make it difficult for American companies to sell their products. Entry into American markets has been described as a strategy to keep exchange rate low and block its currency from rising to a market-determined value (Lazear par7).
Secondly, China should be declared a currency manipulator because its low exchange rate has adverse effects on economy of the United States (Roach par3). Legislative action is necessary on China because America’s trade deficit is enlarging mainly due to economic pressure exerted on jobs and national income.
Currency manipulation has led to loss of market share by the United States (Lazear par5). This has affected companies, workers, and reduced availability of jobs. Research has shown that trade deficit has averaged at a value of 4.4 percent of the total GDP, a figure that has not changed for the last eight years (Roach par5). China is responsible for increase in trade deficit. It presents a serious economic threat to the US because it does not facilitate a level playing ground for trade on the international market.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Thirdly, China manipulation of their exchange rate is a threat to the global economy (Roach par6). It is therefore in the interest of the world to adjust its rate to a fair market value. Global trade imbalance between countries is a threat to stability and sustenance of global economy. Many economists have argued that China’s saving glut is a major source of global economic instability.
Counter argument Opponents argue that China should not be declared currency manipulator because such a decision will cause trade wars and strain the relationship between the two countries. They argue that China’s actions are not to blame for US’s widening trade deficit (Wu par4). The main cause of the trade deficit is a shortfall of net national saving rate. The rate has deteriorated since 2008 and has not shown any signs of improvement.
They also refute claims that China manipulates their exchange rate because their currency has risen by 31.4 percent since 2005 (Lazear par8). This increase is more than is required by the Schumer-Graham bill. China is cautious because a sharp increase in the value of its currency might have adverse effects on its economy (Lazear par9). Furthermore, it has shown willingness to bring its currency to fair market values gradually.
Conclusion The debate on whether the US should declare China a currency manipulator has been ongoing for a long time. China has been accused of manipulating its exchange rate in order to gain trade advantage. Currency manipulation is a threat to the economy of the United States and the global economy because it leads to loss of jobs and poor performance of companies.
It has led to loss of a significant market share by the US. Opponents claim that China is not the cause of the widening trade deficit but a declining national saving culture. They also argue that China has shown willingness to adjust its currency value because its value has increased by 31.5 percent since 2005. Currency manipulation is a threat to global economy and the economy of the US. Therefore, China should be declared a currency manipulator by the United States.
Works Cited Brown, S. Currency Manipulation Gives Chinese an Unfair Advantage. 2012. Web.
Klein, E. Five Facts You Need to Know About China’s Currency Manipulation. 2012. Web.
We will write a custom Essay on Should the US declare China a currency manipulator? specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Lazear, E. Chinese Currency Manipulation is Not the Problem. 2013. Web.
Roach, S. China’s Currency Manipulation: A Policy Debate. 2012. Web.
Wu, M. China’s Currency is not Our Problem. 2011. Web.
The Thread of History Research Paper college essay help online
Any society can be compared to a living organism that gets born, grows and changes according to the time, environment and processes that go on internally. Any group of people has their own beliefs and regulations which are backed up by history, traditions and culture.
In any society there are people who get their opinion widely known and they are sometimes called visionaries. For the past twenty years, society has experienced many rapid changes, and thinkers and writers often offered their opinions, as to what is going on under the surface and where the present world is going to be in the future.
All societies have intricate traditions and structures with work and leisure time. One of the oldest activities that people are engaged in is sports or any kind of physical games. Steve Craig, in his book titled “Sports and Games of the Ancients” looks at how societies view games and how they are comprehended personally and socially.
One of the important points is that each society has a form of games that are played publicly, for people’s entertainment. Socially, it says several things, as the population is very multifaceted. Primarily, it is that people need a form of entertainment that can be watched live. People are interested in seeing other fellow human beings in action and the key feature of the sport which is its unpredictability makes the viewing even more exciting and desired.
The unique nature of games is very original because it cannot be fully predicted and people are drawn to that (Craig 1). Comparing to the television, where people are playing out formed scripts, games are much different. Even though previously, in the early days, there were games and the need for them, people’s interest and commercialization have grown immensely at the onset of television and other mass media.
This led to people wanting more and expecting sights that were non-existent before. It begs a question of why do people really need entertainment and what would happen without it. It is a part of human soul and emotional existence, as without it, people would have work and duties that are a part of the routine and not feelings. A close connection to the pleasures of life is explored by Deborah Blum in her book “Love at Goon Park: Harry Harlow and the Science of Affection”.
Just as people need mass and public entertainment, they need affection and love. This is one of the starting points in life and it very much sets up the rest of a person’s development. It is interesting that the way a person will feel about themselves, others, their ability to be in public places, feel confidence and connection to people; all these things get influenced by how the infant and child are treated.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More She mentions Harry Harlow who did experiments with monkeys and was rather successful. The experiments proved that baby monkey sometimes needed affection and “warmth” of their mother more than food. This and other experiments, as well as the views of Deborah Blum reiterate the fact that people need love and any society must have healthy and loving individuals for the whole nation or country to prosper (Blum 15).
In a work titled “The Pyrotechnic Insanitarium: American Culture on the Brink”, Mark Dery describes a new age of life and society. The twenty first century has brought many changes and the focus can be seen on the rapid development of entertainment but also, on the negatives and short backs of society.
The conspiracy theory is mentioned, and people start to realize that in the fast moving world there are things that could be unseen and under the surface. It is somewhat rebated by saying that in reality, there are no conspiracies and the politics are very much openly viewed but it does not seem convincing.
The entertainment and pleasures of people are going hand in hand with the horrors that human mind offers. With the increasing crime rates and technological advancement, people are receiving more information and problems to deal with. The heights of human brain power are allowing predicting that the future will bring even more challenges and people will face something that has never been seen before (Dery 30). It is very true that human mind is still a mystery and it is quite difficult to see what people are capable of.
Alfred Lubrano discuses another part of the changing world in a book titled “Limbo: Blue-Collar Roots, White-Collar Dreams”. He especially points to the division between people socially and personally. For as long as there has been humanity, people have had different duties according to own views but also to the world around them. The division between the working and the middle class is what Alfred Lubrano talks about.
He describes the qualities of people who are born to be a part of the middle class and that there is no way of becoming anything else. It touches upon the moral issue of a person desiring what they want to do in their life but at the same time, creating opportunities to achieve whatever it is they strive to reach. Education is mentioned as an important part of the process in becoming successful and this reflects in the scope of bigger things in society.
This is becoming very true in any part of the world, as the evolution of technologies and workforce is delving into a different sphere, uncommon to the previous century. The world is becoming business oriented and there are many individuals who consider it their life’s calling to become a part of it (Lubrano 10).
We will write a custom Research Paper on The Thread of History specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Vivian Sobchack takes a look at the modern society and examines the future in the work titled “Carnal Thoughts: Embodiment and Moving Image Culture”. The world is acquiring so many angles and perspectives that it is becoming harder to keep track of. She refers to “Hansel and Gretel” in relation to the fact that without the “breadcrumbs” people might become lost (Sobchack 13). This representation is meant to show that people need guidance.
The future world has many mysteries and people need organization and each other’s help to find the way. The world is becoming divided into spaces that are foreign and sometimes, unequal. Even though this is an age of knowledge and people’s rights, there is still much to learn, especially in the relationship between people and different groups. Vivian Sobchack qualifies people as being lost in the world, not knowing what to do and how to adjust to the fast moving pace.
There starts to evolve a sort of separation between the world and the masses, and an individual is not aware of what is expected of them regarding themselves and society. People start to create false realities and whatever they think is right, eventually becomes empty space and people are forced to re-think their goals and dreams. Another look at the modern world and the way it is being run is taken by Linda Seger in a book “Jesus Rode a Donkey: Why Republicans Don’t Have the Corner on Christ”.
The author compares people’s religious beliefs to the political system and what is expects and required of people (Seger 7). Many are faced with sacrifices that have to be made for the system to prosper. But there is also a different side of the coin, where others get rich at the expense of people who are fulfilling their duty to be a good citizen. Linda Seger reinforces that in order for people to go into the future, they must be understanding and kind to each other.
The simplicity of their actions and straightforward manner will create best conditions of life for all human beings. The new age has given people power to vote for their leaders and enjoy the rights and freedoms that are naturally given but is unclear what these freedoms can sometimes bring.
All the writers and thinkers have a very common theme that centers on people which is their needs and the evolving society. People want to be happy and keep finding ways of how to enjoy the life. Even though the majority bases their existence on goodness, there are those who want to use the population and gain more than is needed. This leads to an important question of the changing world and the expectancies that people have towards it. It must be just and equal to all and this should be the motto of the future.
Works Cited Blum, Deborah. Love at Goon Park: Harry Harlow and the Science of Affection. New York, United States: Basic Books, 2011. Print.
Craig, Steve. Sports and Games of The Ancients. Westport, United States: Greenwood Publishing Group, 2002. Print.
Not sure if you can write a paper on The Thread of History by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Dery, Mark. The Pyrotechnic Insanitarium: American Culture on the Brink. New York, United States: Grove Press, 2000. Print.
Lubrano, Alfred. Limbo: Blue-Collar Roots, White-Collar Dreams. Hoboken, United States: John Wiley
Ethical Debate on our Information Privacy Essay essay help online free: essay help online free
Table of Contents Introduction
The concept of privacy
The internet and its impact on personal privacy of information
Privacy and Trust on internet communication
Introduction The internet is no doubt one of the most important members of the aspects considered as the “modern wonders of the world”. A highly sophisticated technology, the internet has reduced the distance between individuals, groups and communities by allowing an easy way of interaction and communication regardless of the physical distance between them. In fact, socialization has become more efficient and easy with the internet and allied technologies.
Business, government administration, knowledge sharing and research have greatly benefitted from the technology since information gathering, dissemination, storage and sharing are no longer difficult tasks to handle, thanks to the internet technology.
Globalization has become more evident since the internet became a form of communication, socialization and a channel for conducting business. All these tasks involve a focus on information as the most important and crucial asset. However, with the high reliance on the internet technology as the superior channel of communication, governance, business process and information storage, a number of questions have emerged regarding the safety of the internet as a means of communication.
For instance, how safe is the information relayed or stored in the internet communication tools? What is the degree of privacy and confidentiality of information on the internet? What is the future of the internet as a means of communication, socialization, public governance and business administration? All these questions point to one important aspect of a digital world- a debate on the ethical and safety of our information privacy stored or passed through the internet. The purpose of this discussion is to analyze the issue of privacy of information on the internet.
In reality, the internet and allied technology have caused an ethical debate on our information privacy. Arguably, privacy of information on the internet is an ethical issue because the safety of information entrusted on the internet is compromised, especially at a time when the technology is becoming the sole process through which confidential, business, personal and administrative information is communicated.
The concept of privacy The concept of privacy is yet to find a specific definition. While some authors perceive privacy as an actual form of moral or legal right for individuals, others have argued that it is generally wrong to think privacy as a concept of morals or rights. As early as the 1970s, the debate on privacy of electronic information was common among authors.
For instance, Posner (2002) suggested that the concept of privacy is better understood when viewed as a form of economic interest. He further argues that information on individuals should be taken as a form of private property, which has commercial value.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More More recently, Clarke (1999) suggested that the concept of privacy is better understood when taken as an interest that individuals or groups have when striving to maintain personal space and freedom from interference by other individuals or organizations. In the modern context, most nations in the western worlds have resolved to view the concept of privacy as protection of data for individuals, groups or institutions.
In fact, most nations have resolved to treat this data as a fork of private assets that should be protected for the interest of individual rights. In the US, for instance, a debate on the concept of privacy of information as a legal right revolves around the philosophical and legal aspects of the tort law and the constitution. Moreover, the modern view of privacy of information is rooted in the extensive need for protection of personal property as a right for every individual.
With the concept of privacy of information revolving around the right for individuals to have their data or information respected as a personal asset, the internet seems to complicate how such information should be treated and protected. This is more evident when one considers the fact that information systems are normally shared, with some parties such as IT companies, internet providers, website owners, the government and other institutions having some good access to private and confidential information on the internet.
Thus, the concept of privacy and confidentiality of information on the internet has actually become a topic of debate on the ethics of the internet technology.
The internet and its impact on personal privacy of information When the internet was booming during the 1990s, most authors attempted to describe the impact of the new form of communication on privacy and confidentiality of the information entrusted on the technology. For example, Wright and Kakalik (2007) observed that over 70% of internet users were concerned about the privacy and confidentiality of the information they shared on the internet. In yet another study, Benassi (1999) found that privacy was quickly becoming the major consumer issue in the booming internet business.
More recently, it has been found that privacy and security of information are the leading source of worry for internet users, especially in the modern context where the internet has become a major method for conducting business, socialization, research, public administration and storage of confidential data. So, why has the internet caused an ethical debate on the privacy of our information?
To answer this question, it is worth noting that there were concerns about the security and confidentiality of personal information even before the internet was invented. Thus, there is nothing new with respect to the concerns on the privacy of information associated with digital communication.
We will write a custom Essay on Ethical Debate on our Information Privacy specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More However, the internet has increased concern about the privacy of information largely because it applies technology to gather, disseminate, communicate and store information about individuals and institutions (Clarke, 2008). The most important aspect to note is that the internet has escalated these concerns because it has come with a large number of applications that were not possible with the previous mediums of communication.
For instance, it has allowed communities to share crucial information, institutions to relate with their members, governments to deal with massive and crucial information on various public issues and individuals to communicate with ease regardless of the distance between them. Therefore, the internet has increased the magnitude of a number of privacy concerns due to its wide applicability.
The rise of the internet and the allied technologies has triggered the rise of an ethical debate over the safety and privacy of information. For instance, it has made it possible for the pre-existing concerns on information privacy to increase in magnitude and scale in a manner that could not be possible with the previous mediums of communication.
Although these concerns on the security and privacy of information existed prior to the invention of the internet technology, they have been enhanced by technology to an extent that the previous mediums of communication seems to be more secure than communication on the internet.
Secondly, a number of tools and techniques are unique to the internet. Such tools and techniques have come with additional threats to the security and privacy of information, which were not associated with the previous communication media. So, what threats to information security and privacy are enhanced by the internet?
Answering this question is essential in investigating whether the internet technology has caused an ethical debate on the privacy of communication and information. Arguably, a number of threats have arisen due to the intensive application of the internet and allied tools in communication.
Although some of these concerns were also associated with the previous communication methods, the internet seems to have caused their complexities to an extent that they can be considered as new forms of threats to modern communication. However, studies have shown that threats to the privacy of information on the internet can be classified into two broad categories- (a) “dataveillance” and gathering and (b) data mining and data exchange.
“Dataveillance” is a relatively new terminology in information technology that generally refers to the use of the internet technology as a tool of surveillance. It is the systematic application of internet tools and systems to monitor the actions and communications by people and organizations. In the modern context, the internet has increasingly become an important tool in data-monitoring and recording mechanism, without which it is difficult for individuals and organizations to deal with information.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Ethical Debate on our Information Privacy by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More In this case, the internet assumes an almost absolute power as the too for carrying out these tasks. However, due to this aspect of the internet, a threat to privacy and security of information on the internet is eminent. In this case, the threats posed to information privacy by the internet communication are actually unique to this communication media.
Websites, one of the main applications associated with the internet technology, have become a major source of information, communication and platforms for socialization, data sharing and conducting of organizational and personal business. They present a good and easy way of storing data, from where information can be obtained directly or indirectly from the activities of website users. Websites allow users to enter their information on WebForms.
These are actually some forms of online data gathering mechanisms that allow for an easy interaction between the user and the remote parties. Some websites such as email platforms are entirely meant for communication between their users, while others are search engines, business or corporate profiles, business platforms, or for other purposes. Despite their increasing use in various fields, websites have become a critical topic of ethical debate on the security and privacy of modern information.
Privacy and Trust on internet communication Privacy of information on the internet is a crucial aspect of all organizations and individuals who use the internet for communication. It is the aim of every individual or organization to achieve the highest degree of privacy for the information communicated through the medium.
However, concerns over the trustworthiness of the internet and its allied tools such as websites and email corporations are an actual topic of ethical debate. In fact, most authors have shown that internet users continues to worry about the type of information they post on websites or communicate through such applications as emails on the internet.
Although corporations that conduct online business such as email service, search engines and e-commerce tend to assure their clients of the highest level of privacy, it is hard to trust organizations with information of high value, confidentiality and privacy. Users express their concern on the possibility of eavesdropping, hacking or use of malicious applications such as viruses to get an access to their information.
In fact, frequent cases of hacking, virus attacks and eavesdropping have increased over the last one decade, with even the most sophisticated information systems such as those used by organizations such as American security department being hacked and an easy access of information obtained. Financial organizations have also experienced such events, with some losing large amounts of resources to hackers.
Moreover, eavesdropping has become a common strategy through which illegal access of private and confidential information is obtained, where the perpetrators tend to subdue internet users to give their crucial information.
It is also worth noting that the internet has become an important tool through which cybercrime such as cyberstalking, bullying and other online crimes are taking place. With this in mind, it is worth noting that it is difficult to entrust the internet with crucial information due to the loopholes it has created. Cybercriminals such as hackers, eavesdroppers and other criminals have decreased the trust that users previously had on the internet as a way of storing, sharing and obtaining crucial and confidential information.
For instance, studies have shown that individuals and corporations have been reluctant to make online purchases for some crucial items, such as using their credit cards online due to fear of losing out to cybercriminals. On the other hand, corporations still rely on the old method of communication to send some confidential information such as credit card passwords in fear of a possible loss to cybercriminals.
In this way, the internet has lost substantial degree of trust due to its vulnerability to information loss and interference. In fact, it appears that the old models of communication such as surface mailing, faxing and telephone calls are more secure than the internet. This is because the internet platform is accessible for everyone and from anywhere.
In addition, internet technology is highly dynamic, with new applications and tools being developed every day to enhance communication. Similarly, new applications and tools are being developed every day to enhance cybercrime and escape the sophisticated measures put in place to secure information on the internet. In fact, it is worth noting that the dynamism in the internet technology increases with time, allowing both genuine and criminal users to execute their activities.
From this analysis, it is clear that the internet technology is a highly reliable method of communication, conducting business, administration and socialization. However, it has caused an ethical debate on the privacy and security of information because it is prone to interference and loss of information.
Despite its increasing importance in all sectors, internet communication raises an ethical issue because the safety of information entrusted on the internet is compromised, especially at a time when the technology is becoming the sole process through which confidential, business, personal and administrative information is communicated.
To solve the problems of privacy, most nations have decided to treat this data as a fork of private assets that should be protected for the interest of individual rights. In the US, for instance, a debate on the concept of privacy of information as a legal right revolves around the philosophical and legal aspects of the tort law and the constitution.
References Benassi, P. (1999). TRUSTe: An Online Privacy Seal Program. Communications of the ACM, 42(2), 56-59
Clarke, R. (1999). Internet Privacy Concerns Confirm the Case for Intervention. Communications of the ACM, 42(2), 60-67
Clarke, R. (2008). Information Technology and Dataveillance. Communications of the ACM, 31(5), 498-512.
Posner, R. (2002). An Economic Theory of Privacy. New York: Springer
Healthcare Innovation: Ground Source Heating college essay help
Today, owing to advances in information technology, the healthcare sector has experienced an explosion of innovations aimed at not only improving life expectancy and quality of life of patients, but also diagnostic and treatment options, disease control, as well as the efficiency and cost-effectiveness of the healthcare delivery system (Omachonu
Descartes and Our Existence Essay a level english language essay help
Rene Descartes was driven in the adventure of philosophy meditation and other philosophy related works such as the popularly known literary scriptures in the bible. The holy bible equipped his mind with several facts that would soon lead him to propose the first postulates pertaining to meditation of the first philosophy. He was encouraged to possess a thought that all that is visible or audible are perceptible in any other manner that is brought into existence through us (Descartes, 1996).
The third chapter of the Wisdom of Solomon and the first chapter of the book of Romans were Descartes specific sources of inspiration. Romans one says, “that which may be known of God manifests is manifest in them.”
It is also claimed that “where it is said how they are not to be excused for if their understanding was so great that they could discern the world and the creatures, why did they not find the Lord thereof?” These two scriptures led Rene Descartes into proposing the very first arguments of meditation in philosophy (Descartes, 1996).
In his first meditation method, named meditation one, Rene Descartes tries to disapprove his earlier thoughts pertaining the human being and nature at large. He claims that, there is no clear standard and unanimously agreed distinction between right and wrong, good and bad, true and false and so on.
The state of something being either originates from within us. Rene further argues that we are able to argue in favor or against a logical state depending on whether or not we can see concrete reason in favor or otherwise. This means that, logic is not as fixed as we thought and whatever we see, hear or feel is brought into existence by our own thought. We can decide to make ourselves naked, dressed, poor or rich by simply bringing them into existence.
Meditation two tries to outline the effects of meditation one. It claims that after having learnt of our earliest perceptions as false and that we have the power to manipulate logic by making the truth or false out of anything the way we want. There is a tendency of us trying to play wise that we can not be cheated and in the process disqualifying everything and negating the existence of everything else as well (Descartes, 1996).
Does anything exist at all then? We then find ourselves in the middle of not knowing anything about the universe and curiously asking ourselves if at all there is a supernatural being that can help us understand whatever exists. This is another problem, since we have to create the supernatural being that we are so much in need of creating.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More What then are we? This is one question that meditation two tries to answer. It is certainly a big challenge to meditation one, since if anything in existence is purely our imagination then this could mean that we bring each other into existence and hence we do not exist in reality.
The mind is therefore described as the most real part of us and could be the part of us that is in actual existence. Thus, thought becomes the act of bringing things and activities into physical existence as defined by Rene Descartes’s arguments in the meditation of first philosophy (Descartes, 1996).
Work Cited Descartes, Rene. Meditations on First Philosophy: With Selections from the Objections and Replies. Ed. Cottingham, John. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1996.
Abortion Principles – Case of George and Linda Essay essay help online free: essay help online free
Table of Contents Comparison
Comparison According to Linda, the decision of having the abortion was extremely lonely regardless of the fact that the husband supported her. The abortion came as an option since the birth of a new child was unexpected and would come with additional burdens. The husband would also be barred from changing his fourteen years job.
The woman was also visualizing the difficulties regarding baby care and how much work she could be able to do. The youngest child was finally ready for school and it would be difficult to raise another one. The men at the Women’s Services were uncomfortable and embarrassed.
According to George, there was no emotional distress after the first abortion. In Linda’s case, there was no emotional distress at the beginning since the couple had come to the conclusion that abortion was the best option considering the circumstances they were in. However, Linda was bothered when her name was called and the doctor was injecting her (Francke 34). Similarly, George kept thinking about women’s rights and the ethical guidelines of what he was doing.
The women at the waiting room were silent since they were ashamed that they were going to kill innocent souls. After the abortion, Linda and her husband did not talk but held hands. They were guilty as they tried to hide everything from their children by pretending that life was normal. The woman was concerned about her modernity and the fact that she was about to kill regardless of the great care she had given to her other children.
Just as Linda was guilty after the abortion and felt that there was a space for another child, George felt sympathy for young college ladies and anger for married couples. It reached a point where George was gravely bothered and he started questioning his sensitivity. At home, he was embraced by his children while he engaged in abortions at his workplace. George was horrified for playing with a child he wanted to abort seven years earlier.
Linda felt that there was a space for another child, which implies that she was unlikely to engage in any more abortions (Flesh par 4).Furthermore, she would return to the clinic to have an IUD inserted. Similarly, George eventually became too bothered about his Christian values. He felt that his spiritual aspirations and intellectual integrity were at stake. This made him stop doing any more abortions.
Contrast George was extremely tortured after doing 2nd trimester abortions. Consequently, he stopped doing these. On the other hand, the experts in Linda’s case do not portray any emotional distress. On the contrary, they were busy advising women on family planning so as to stop further abortions. They also seem to be encouraging the women by assuring them that the pain would not last for long.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More George cares more about the young women abandoned by their boyfriends. The gratitude the women have gives George great satisfaction after carrying out the minor operations. On the contrary, he was distressed after extracting parts of foetus one by one during second trimester abortion.
Recommendations In both cases, it is important for George and Linda to have realised from the beginning that abortion is a grave sin. One is bothered for the rest of his life since the memory of the abortion is never erased. In my opinion, every person should value life and keep away from abortion, which deals with destroying innocent and vital lives. The religion should offer stringent guidelines regarding abortion.
Works Cited Flesh, George. “Why I Stopped Doing Abortions.” 1991. Web.
Francke, L. Bird. The ambivalence of abortion. London: Random House, 1978. Print.
Unilever ice cream European market Case Study best college essay help
What is the source of Unilever’s advantages over its competitors?
Unilever has a broad channel of distribution compared to its market rivals. It especially makes use of small scale retail outlets. Even though such outlets do not use several freezer cabinets when selling ice cream from Unilever, they have a significant multiplication effect towards the distribution of ice cream from Unilever.
The company has also been retailing its other products using the aforementioned outlets thereby boosting its overall power of distribution. In addition, the company enjoys economies of scale that have been largely generated by a strong brand name in the market. In other words, Unilever is capable of producing in large scale without the fear of inadequate marketing opportunities.
As a result, it readily enjoys the benefits associated with large scale production. Some of these benefits include high volume of sales, improved profitability and large trade discounts from other trading affiliates. Moreover, the strong brand image associated with Unilever has made it possible for the company to implement its strategies both at the national and pan-European levels.
What are Unilever’s main strengths? Where so its weaknesses lie? What, if any, would you do about its weaknesses?
Unilever has several strengths in the European market in spite of the stiff prevailing competition. Firstly, it has a along reputable history in the production of consumer goods. In other words, it is a well known global brand. This makes it easy for the company to market its products. Besides, it has a ready access to manufacturing resources across the globe. Moreover, the company is strong in terms of its ability to harness synergy of resources.
Unilever works closely with its distribution partners such as small scale retailers. Hence, it has developed a cordial relationship with its various chains of distribution and therefore capable of reaching out the widest market. The company has a strong base and appreciation for intensive research and development. This has led to variety of products in the market that meet the various tastes and preferences of consumers.
On the other hand, the greatest weakness of Unilever especially in its European market is lack of participation in the confectionary market unlike its competitors. Other weaknesses include fall in revenues, reduced expenditure in research and development as well as poor management of brands. These weaknesses can be minimized by revamping brand management skills, boosting research and innovativeness, exploring untapped markets and also developing a confectionary division for it ice cream brand.
Should Unilever go further in launching truly Pan-European products, like those associated with Mars Ice cream and Nestle Kit Kat ice cream? How important, if at all, are such products to the overall Unilever strategy?
The company should indeed go ahead and launch truly Pan-European products in the market bearing in mind that its competitors have already rolled out such products. The prevailing market competition is quite stiff and therefore the company should fully entrench itself in the European market.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More A product such as ice cream is important to Unilever because it cultivates early consumption habit among young consumers ( who are mainly minors). By targeting consumers who are still in their tender ages, the company will not merely be promoting future markets; it will also be improving its brand loyalty. Therefore, it will act as a potential marketing strategy for both the current and future marketing needs of the company.
A Comparative Analysis of Racial and Ethnic Stratification in the US and Canada Essay writing essay help: writing essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Future of Racial Discrimination
Introduction United States (US) and Canada share many political, economic, and social ties. Both countries have also experienced similar changes in their immigration policies as they have welcomed immigrants as permanent residents in their countries. Starting from the early sixties, and gradually through the century, both the US and Canada have changed their immigration policies to allow all racial groups as immigrants into their countries.
Previously, both countries only allowed Europeans and Whites as the only acceptable immigrant groups (Abada 2). The consequence of the adoption of this immigrant policy is the increased immigration of “people of color” into both countries. Conversely, many Canadian and US cities have a mixture of different racial groups.
Underlying this racial diversity is a soft underbelly of racial stratification that exists in both countries. This stratification emerges in different forms, including the unequal distribution of resources, unequal employment opportunities, and unequal education opportunities. This paper explores these issues by comparing the racial stratifications in the US and Canada by focusing on how racial stratification occurs in the educational and workplace contexts.
Comprehensively, this paper argues that Canada and the US share similar racial stratifications in their workplace contexts, as white employers in both countries negatively stereotype racial minorities. Consequently, this situation forces many workers from racial minorities to work in low status and low-paying jobs.
Unlike the employment sector, there is a difference between America and Canada’s racial stratification profiles in the education sector. From this understanding, there is less racial stratification in Canada than the US (in the education sector). Considering the existence of inequalities in the access to economic opportunities and wealth, racial stratifications in Canada and the US will continue for long time.
Employment Albeit there has been increased awareness about racial stratification in the workplace, racial minorities still experience several discriminating practices in the workplace. In the US, Chima (1) believes that the unique discriminating practices that affect African American workers are not the same as the challenges affecting Caucasians.
Cultural insensitivity, oppressive attitudes, and oppressive policies in the workplace inform these discriminating practices. Based on the findings that appear in this section, evidently, people of African descent living in America and Canada experience the same racial stratification in the workplace, which forces them to work for low-level and low-paying jobs.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Nonetheless, racial stratification in the American workplace often appears to be accidental, but it is not. Human resource managers who have a negative stereotype about some racial minorities (like African Americans) always contribute to the high number of racial minorities who work in low status or low-paying jobs. For example, Chima says,
“In the total American population, three out of seven employees hold white-collar positions, whereas the ratio is only one of seven for African Americans. They occupy over 50 percent of the nation’s jobs as garbage collectors and maids, but only 4% of the nation’s managerial positions” (3).
The above statement characterizes the norm that influences the working experiences of many workers who hail from racial minority groups. Certainly, racial prejudices undermine the potential experience and qualifications for better-paying jobs for some of these workers. These prejudices keep some of these workers in low-paying and low-status jobs. Another factor that contributes to this phenomenon is the impact of word-to-mouth communications in excluding racial minorities in the workplace.
Since many of the employers are white people, they only tend to tell their white friends about potential job opportunities, thereby limiting the awareness of racial minorities regarding the existing job opportunities (Borowczyk-Martins 1). Nonetheless, for the few racial minorities that secure employment, their wages and salaries do not compare to the earnings of the majority race (whites).
Statistically, O’Neill (2) says that racial minorities in America earn up to 25% less than what their white counterparts earn. This earning differential exists, although both racial groups may have similar qualifications.
Relative to this statistic, O’Neill adds, “After controlling for human capital characteristics, South Asian men earned about 2% less than White men, but for Blacks, this gap was around 21%” (2). This earning differential is even greater for women in the workplace. This wage differential stems from the economic discrimination that happens in the workplace.
Comprehensively, employer prejudice in the US is therefore significantly strong because Banerjee (6) estimates that about 78% of white employers in America are prejudicial against black workers, for example. This situation prevails even after the US enacted the Civil Rights Act of 1964, which criminalizes the discrimination of workers because of their race, gender, or religion (O’Neill 2).
We will write a custom Essay on A Comparative Analysis of Racial and Ethnic Stratification in the US and Canada specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The Canadian situation is similar to the American situation because Banerjee (6) says there are many racial inequalities in the Canadian workplace. This view stems from previous studies that established a greater sense of racial discrimination in the workplace among “visible minorities” in Canada (as the US). A few researchers conducted some studies in Toronto and said that Canadian employers treated the qualifications of potential employees from different racial groups very differently (Banerjee 6).
One finding that emerged from this study is the fact that potential white employees received more job offers than potential employees who may have African roots. Further studies showed that many employers eliminated the candidacy of potential Asian and African employees whenever they received a call from the candidates regarding potential job offers (Banerjee 6).
The same studies showed that there was a strong sense of racial stereotyping among Africans working in Canada (Banerjee 6). The above claims stemmed from earlier studies that reported extensive racial discrimination in about half of the working African population in Canada.
Most racial minorities in Canada also work in low-paying jobs (like the American situation). The evidence for this claim stems from an assertion by Banerjee (6) about how most racial minorities in Canada have low earnings, compared to white employees. Moreover, Banerjee (6) asserts that racial minorities in Canada hold very few managerial and professional positions in employment. The few racial minorities who hold managerial positions are mainly self-employed (Banerjee 6).
The social cognitive theory, which posits that many employees normally categorize their colleagues as either in-groups or out-groups, may explain the racial stratification in Canada and America (Banerjee 5).
The social cognitive theory posits that from the establishment of the racial categorizations, people have a strong tendency to exaggerate the differences that exist between them and the majority group (while minimizing the differences that exist among them as the majority group). These categorizations further increase the stereotypes and biases towards certain racial groups (Banerjee 5).
Education Ogbu (264) says there is notable racial discrimination that goes on in America, despite the existence of laws that prevent such incidences. Ogbu (264) says this racial stratification in education occurs because the comprehensive removal of educational barriers has not happened. In other words, the government has removed the barriers to providing educational opportunities, but other barriers that affect educational achievement exist.
Nonetheless, Ogbu (264) says three ways define the way racial stratification affects educational opportunities in America. One way is through discriminatory societal practices that limit the opportunities for racial minorities to gain access to quality education within the country.
Not sure if you can write a paper on A Comparative Analysis of Racial and Ethnic Stratification in the US and Canada by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More A second way that racial stratification affects the educational experiences of racial minorities stem from its influence in the treatment of racial minorities in schools. The last way racial stratification affects the quality of education for racial minorities stem from the perception that the racial minorities hold towards their educational experiences (Ogbu 264).
Comparatively, the Canadian educational system has a less intense racial stratification than the American educational system. For example, Abada and Hou (1) say most racial minorities have achieved an upward mobility in education, regardless of their family background and social or ethnic capital.
However, some racial minority groups have exhibited better educational progress than other racial minority groups. For example, African immigrants have a slower upward mobility when compared with Asians (Abada and Hou 1). The same is true for Filipino students in Canada because Abada and Hou (1) say Filipinos also have a lower upward mobility in education when compared to other racial minorities like the Chinese and Koreans.
Nonetheless, there seems to be an insignificant racial stratification in the Canadian educational system because there is little difference between the performance of white students and the performance of “other” students from racial minority groups (Abada and Hou 1).
Future of Racial Discrimination Some observers see Canada as a relatively less racially stratified society. This observation does not, however, imply that there are no racial stratification attributes about the Canadian society. However, compared to America, Canada is less racially stratified and more tolerant towards minority races.
For example, Brym and Lie (162) say, about 77% of the white majority population in Canada hold a favorable view about immigrants, while only about 44% of the white majority population in America holds the same view about immigrants in America. The rate of racial and ethnic stratification also appears to be declining more in Canada than the US.
Even though racial minorities have made tremendous progress in improving their welfare (both in America and Canada), the racial stratifications that exist in most aspects of the Canadian and American Societies (such as education and employment), make it difficult to ignore the possibility that racial stratification may continue to exist for a long time. Brym and Lie support this claim, in the Canadian context, by saying “if the current trends continue, Canada’s mosaic may continue to be stratified mainly along racial lines” (162).
Brym and Lie further say, “Unless something drastic happens, some groups may continue to enjoy more wealth, income, education, good housing, healthcare and other social rewards than other races do” (162). Since America appears to have a poorer racial stratification record than Canada, it is correct to infer the above statement to the American context as well.
Conclusion After weighing the findings of this study, it is possible to see how racial stratification affects the most important aspects of the Canadian and American societies – education and employment. Albeit in different proportions, Canada and America still practice racial stratification in these sectors.
Both countries especially have very similar racial stratifications against racial minorities in the employment sector. Certainly, many racial minorities in both countries earn relatively low wages compared to their white counterparts, regardless of the qualifications and experiences that they have. Similarly, racial minorities in both countries tend to work in low-paying and low-status jobs. Therefore, very few racial minority workers hold managerial and professional positions in both countries.
The same situation replicates in the education sector because racial stratification has affected the performance of racial minorities in education. Canada, however, seems to fare better than the US in this regard because there is a relatively lower performance differential between racial minorities and other races in Canada. In fact, this paper highlights the evidence regarding how some racial minority students perform better than white students do.
Comparatively, racial minorities in America still have a long way to catch up with the exemplary performance that is characteristic of many white students in America. The influence of race and class stratification outlines part of the reason for the significant differences in the performance of white students and “other” students in the American education sector. When these stratifications intertwine, they have a strong impact on the quality of education offered to students in the US.
Therefore, albeit Canada and the US share some similarities in racial stratification, the intensity of these stratifications may differ in other sectors that affect the economic and social well-being of their societies (like health).
Therefore, while both countries seem to exhibit serious concerns regarding racial stratifications, the degree and intensity of these stratifications may differ across different social and economic sectors. Nonetheless, so long as Canadians and Americans hold on to traditional racial stereotypes, racial stratification may continue to exist for a long time.
Works Cited Abada, Teresa and Feng Hou. “Ethnic Differences in Educational Attainment among the Children of Canadian Immigrants.” Canadian Journal of Sociology 34.1 (2009): 1-24. Print.
Banerjee, Rupa. An Examination of Factors Affecting Perception of Workplace Discrimination, Toronto: University of Toronto (Centre for Industrial Relations and Human Resources). Print.
Borowczyk-Martins, Daniel. Racial Discrimination in the U.S. Labor Market: Employment and Wage Differentials by Skill, Bristol: University of Bristol. Print. Brym, Robert, and J. Lie. SOC , London: Cengage Learning, 2011. Print.
Chima, Felix 2013, African Americans and the Workplace: Overview Of Persistent Discrimination. 2013. Web.
Ogbu, John. “Racial Stratification and Education in the United States.” Teachers College Record 96.2 (1994): 264-98. Print.
O’Neill, June. What Do Wage Differentials Tell Us About Labor Market Discrimination, Cambridge: National Bureau of Economic Research. Print.
World Politics Issues Essay writing essay help: writing essay help
World politics refers to a globally prominent academic journal that specializes in political science. World politics was initiated in 1948. Scholars are usually encouraged to make as many contributions as possible. The key role of world politics is printing research articles, which contributes empirically and theoretically to researches, review articles, and materials concerned with politics and global relations.
The journal is extremely important in the field of global relations. This paper aims at discussing why the issues of governance, performance, and international organization behavior are relevant in world politics.
In 1944, the Rwandese Hutu government collaborated with the extremist allies and almost brought the Tutsi minority to an end. Approximately eight hundred thousand Tutsi were murdered. Some years later, Philip Gourevitch recounted the genocide story in The New Yorker.
In the story, Philip claimed that the world governance had the ability to stop the genocide but nothing had been done. Consequently, this story aroused great interest in President Clinton. In response, he sent copies to Sandy Berger where he authorized more investigations. Clinton was amazed at how such a critical genocide could have happened. However, President Clinton showed his outrage and urgency at the wrong time since he had taken no action at the appropriate time to stop the genocide (Barnett and Martha 125).
On the same note, President Clinton’s administration had taken no interest to arouse his attention. There were concerns regarding whether President Clinton did not possess information about the genocide as the marginalia pointed out (Kuperman 100).
The United States is still engaging in the search for a detailed policy aimed at solving the grave communal conflicts. The comprehensive researches concern the mass killings that occurred in Rwanda, Somalia, and Bosnia. Moreover, they are being carried out years after the killings took place. The key concern is that the nations participating in the researches may have been dormant during the occurrences.
Why then are the nations showing concern when it is too late? There are two principles that apply for the Washington’s policymakers. First, the United States ground troops are never allowed to participate in humanitarian involvements when civil wars are taking place. Second, there are exclusions particularly where involvements can be implemented at low costs. It is worth noting that nations voice their intentions to fight against genocide in the political spectrums (Power para 4).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The majority of the nations consent that the United States should play a more participative role in case of another genocide. However, there is no consent yet about what the interventions of the US would entail. In the case of the Rwandese genocide in 1994, deploying approximately five thousand troops from the US could have prevented the mass killings. This was a claim made by the commanding general from the United Nations in Rwanda. Amazingly, the claim was supported by a wide array of global bodies.
The violence and mass killings in Rwanda played a great role in contributing to insecurity in places such as Kigali (Power para 2). During instances of genocides, the governance, performance, and international organization behaviors are usually under test. It is during such a time that the leadership in countries is portrayed by how immediately countries respond to the genocide. Global media reports focus on the country facing the genocide.
Works Cited Barnett, Michael and Martha Finnemore. Rules for the World. London: Cornell University Press, 2004. Print.
Kuperman, Alan. “Rwanda in Retrospect.” Foreign Affairs (2000): 94-118. Print.
Power, Samantha. “Bystanders to Genocide,” Atlantic Monthly, 2001. Web.
Necessary Evil: Synthesis and Analysis Essay (Critical Writing) essay help online
Synthesis There are various versions that society has of morality. Moral nihilism is a doctrine that suggests that human beings are not inherently moral. It infers that any moral values that people contrive are abstract in nature and not necessary, just like rules and laws. As a result, nihilism begets the assumption that life has no purpose or intrinsic value.
The abstractness of any moral aspect developed by society means that no action can earns the description of morally right or wrong, creating a sense of subjectivity. The classification of an action as moral or immoral depends on the circumstances and the viewpoint of the person making the classification.
As such, this theory provides room to accommodate the concept of necessary evil, as opposed to theories such as absolute morality that suggests that actions are either absolutely moral or immoral, with no station between the two. There are situations and actions that cannot fit into the morality envelope perfectly and therefore society has to accept them as they are. This paper looks at situations in which some level of evil is necessary, if only to prevent greater evil.
Authors Ursula K. Le Guin and Mike Davis both display the concept of necessary evil in their literature. Ursula is the author of a short story with the title The Ones Who Walk Away from Omelas.
It is a story with many twists, contributing to its aspect of mystery. The author gives a story about a city called Omelas, located near a harbor and surrounded by mountains. Omelas is a perfect city with located in a perfect place where the wind is just right. The people in the city are perfect by description. They are always happy, ever singing and in a celebratory mood (Guin 566).
There is not an ounce of guilt in anyone in that city as the people that live in it do not do anything wrong and the society is not judgmental therefore negating the need for laws. There is also the notable absence of clergy and law enforcement officials such as soldiers (Guin 568). She suggests to the reader to imagine all the elements that make a society perfect, including temples with priestesses who are willing to satisfy anyone’s sexual desires.
Omelas is therefore a creation of the mind that takes any form according to the reader’s imagination. She however mentions a dark side to the society, which is the imprisonment and abuse of a child, locked in a dark room with no clothes and no one to free it (Guin 570). She goes further to state that the seemingly perfect society does so in order to maintain the status quo.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The act Mike Davis, the author of The Great Wall of Capital embraces the same concept of necessary evil in his discussion about the various barriers that society erects and provides ironic justifications for them. The author mentions historical barriers such as the Berlin Wall in 1989 and the great effort it took for people to tear it down together as well as abolish other barriers such as frontiers with explosives, walls built around cities and electric fences that he refers to as the ‘death fences’ (Davis 88).
He gives the impression that these acts culminated in freedom and provided mobility in terms of free trade and movement of people. In contrast, Davis also gives examples of modern day barriers erected by various nations for different reasons that they deem necessary for the prevention of some form of evil.
Saudi Arabia, for instance, has put up a barrier against Yemen by the termination of an international agreement, in effect closing its borders with Yemen (Davis 89). The justification for this aspect is the prevention of ‘terrorism’ and illegal immigrants within its borders. He also gives the example of India’s efforts to build a wall surrounding its entire territory. Davis goes further to mention the wall put up by the American government on the Mexican border for the alleged purpose of keeping out illegal immigrants (Davis 90).
The author however suggests that the walls a symbol power and intimidation, and a way to make a political statement. The government relaxes regulations on the crossing of the border when in need of cheap labor to develop its economy, tightening the same when there is an economic crisis and a lack of jobs. He states, “…the modern US-Mexico border has always functioned, like any good dam, to regulate but not prevent the flow of surplus labor northward” (Davis 91)
Apart from support of the aspect of necessary evil that is evident in both works, there is a notable presence of irony in both of them. In Ursula’s narrative, the irony is that the seemingly perfect society is the same society that treats the child with disdain and does so to keep the comforts that result from the cruelty.
The author gives an illustration where parents explain to their children the reason for such treatment and how the children hurt at the sight of the child (Guin 570). The irony in Davis’ story is the fact that people work so hard to break down barriers in the past, only to build them up again with the same determination.
There is also the presence of hypocrisy in both instances. In Davis’ story, the government pretentiously uses the border to serve its political agendas without caring about the effects that this aspect has on the Mexican people (Davis 91). In Ursula’s version, the people act righteously and happily yet they knowingly treat the child with contempt and without mercy.
We will write a custom Critical Writing on Necessary Evil: Synthesis and Analysis specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The main difference here though is that in Omelas, the people do not pretend not to know about the existence of the child and the evil acts they do (Guin 570). In contrast, the American government in Davis’ story hides behind the veil of border protection from immigration.
In the determination of happiness, the people in Omela, according to Ursula, prefer its achievement through pain as think of it as intellectual. In David’s version, the source of happiness is power and manipulation through legislation in order to obtain cheap labor.
Analysis In the example given by Davis of the American government and its creation of a wall between itself and the Mexican border, it is the governments view that the wall is unavoidable for the prevention of the greater evil that is illegal immigrants and for the development of its economy. In Ursula’s story, the necessary evil displayed is the brutality against the child. The image that both instances project is that, the reason behind the creation of the necessary evil is usually selfish.
The main difference between the two instances is that in the case of the people in Omela, there is no other option portrayed by the author. In the case of the American government however, the motivation for the evil act is plain greed. This conclusion generates the question of the necessity of a minor evil to prevent a greater one. As the two examples indicate, the reason for the creation of the lesser evil is usually selfishness.
Works Cited Davis, Mike. The Great Wall of Capital: Israel’s Barrier to Peace. New York: The New Press, 2005. Print.
Guin, Ursula. “The Ones Who Walk Away From Omela.” The Norton Book of American Short Stories. Ed. Peter Prescott. New York: W.W Norton
Diagnosis and Treatment of ADHD Research Paper college application essay help: college application essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder
Causes of ADHD
Controversies in ADHD Diagnosis
Treatment of ADHD
Controversies in treatment of ADHD
Introduction The diagnosis of Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder has increased over the recent years. It is one of the most common diseases in children and young adults.
The diagnosis of ADHD has drawn a lot of attention from scientific and academic circles as some scholars argue that there are high levels of over diagnosis of the disorder. Gifted children and ADHD children display similar characteristics. It is also quite difficult to diagnose the disorder in adults. The difficulty in diagnosis is also compounded by the fact that some children have ADHD with other disorders.
There are also concerns on the high prescription of stimulant drugs given to children who are very young. This is an area where a lot of research has been conducted to find out the causes, prevalence and effective treatment methods. There is however need for further research to address the controversies in the diagnosis and treatment of ADHD since it affects children. The long term effects of stimulant medication could have serious repercussions in adult life.
Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder is a condition that is common in children and young adults. The symptoms of ADHD include patterns of inattention, impulsiveness and hyperactivity. The ADHD prevalence is high between 5 and 15% in children who go to school. The DSM-IV diagnostic tool is used to evaluate whether an individual has ADHD.
A person must display at least six of the nine inattentive and hyperactivity behaviours for a period of more than six months. The behaviour must be more severe or common comparable to people of the same stage in development. Behaviours that display inattention include difficulty in organizing tasks, forgetfulness, losing school items, failing to finish given tasks and avoiding mental tasks.
The individual may also be easily distracted or has difficulty in sustaining attention. The behaviours that display impulsiveness and hyperactivity include restlessness, impatience in waiting for their turn to speak and fidgeting. The behaviours should be noticed in the child before he is seven years old. It should also be demonstrated that the behaviours are interfering with the social, occupational and academic functioning of the child.
It is important that the disorder be diagnosed correctly. Lack of diagnosis presents various problems to the child. In adult life the individual will also have challenges. In academics, the child experiences learning disabilities in reading, spelling and performing math calculations.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More It has been noted that children with ADHD are more likely to repeat a class, drop out or be suspended or expelled in school. Research studies have also indicated that these children have a high likelihood of being in automobile accidents or getting hurt physically while playing.
Analyses of diagnosis both in the USA and UK have shown that the disorder is more prevalent in boys than girls. Once the individual is an adult and the disease has not been treated, the person will have high levels of difficulty in employment, relationship challenges due to display of anti-social behaviour, driving offences and increased incidences of crime or substance abuse (Kuo and Faber, 1580). It is not a newly diagnosed disease as it has been treated for the last 100 years.
Under diagnosis of the disorder may be caused by various factors. There may be lack of awareness by the parents and teachers on what could possibly be the problem with the “difficult” child. There is also social stigma associated with mental conditions. The parent may fear taking the child for diagnosis as he does not want to be labelled “a bad parent.” Finally, the parent may not want to expose the child to consistent medication at such a young age.
Causes of ADHD There are several factors linked to the development of ADHD in children. The main cause of the disease however is unknown. First of all, the disorder may be genetic. Research studies conducted on twins, families and adopted children have shown that the disorder is highly inheritable.
There are specific gene variants that have been identified that are involved in dopamine neurotransmission. There has also been evidence of brain dysfunction in individuals with ADHD. The researchers have used several cerebral imaging studies such as functional magnetic resonance imaging and single photon computed emission tomography. Many of the results have indicated that the prefrontal cortex and basal ganglia are affected (Kuo and Faber, 582).
Recent research studies have also indicated that children with ADHD have smaller cerebrum, grey and white matter volumes compared to non-ADHD children. The fact that pharmacological treatments especially stimulants have proved to be the most effective or superior treatments for ADHD also points to biological causes of ADHD. The stimulants increase the levels of extracellular dopamine.
ADHD may also be caused by neuropsychological functioning. Various studies have shown that children with ADHD have specific and global deficits in comparison with non-ADHD children.
We will write a custom Research Paper on Diagnosis and Treatment of ADHD specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More There have been arguments that there may be psychosocial and environmental factors that increase the prevalence of the disorder. This is due to the fact that the condition has been identified more in the Western than non-Western countries. This has been contested by the fact that there is no evidence to suggest that the disease has become more prevalent. It is only that there have been higher cases of diagnosis and not prevalence.
Controversies in ADHD Diagnosis The diagnosis of the disease is complicated by the presence of other co-morbid psychological disorders in addition to ADHD in an individual. These disorders have similar symptoms with ADHD such as social awkwardness, risk-taking characteristics and impulsive behaviours.
These disorders include diseases such as Conduct Disorder and Oppositional Defiant Disorder. There is also lack of formal diagnostic criteria for older children and adults. Diagnosis therefore presents a huge challenge to the primary care and family practice physicians (Kube, Petersen, and Palmer, 462).
There have also been concerns that there are high levels of over diagnosis of ADHD. There are several factors that could lead to over diagnosis of ADHD. First of all the physicians want to prevent the negative consequences associated with ADHD in the event of misdiagnosis.
The drugs for treating the disorder are also readily available in the market and thirdly there has been a lot of media coverage on ADHD and the pharmacotherapy treatment methods for the disorder. It has been argued that the stimulant drug companies have been using the teachers and physicians as their salespeople to aggressively sell the drug with their diagnosis.
The companies are interested in making a profit. It has been estimated that the money brought in by the sale of stimulants is $670 Million annually. The tactics used by the ADHD drug company are also very alluring. They love mentioning the fact that famous people such as Einstein, Picasso and Michelangelo also had the disorder so as not to alarm the parents.
There are also negligent parents who may not want to work hard and develop strategies to handle their children in these active ages. They want a way out even if it will involve the administration of drugs. These parents should be able to use alternative approaches to handle their children such as behavioural therapy approaches, counselling for the family and parental advice.
It has also been argued that the current educational system is facilitated by children sitting for long periods of time just listening to the teachers. The passivity and conformity levels expected of a child causes him to be restless and inattentive after some time. Interestingly some of the symptoms associated with ADHD are behaviours that are basically prevalent in children at a certain age. They are forgetful and fidget a lot.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Diagnosis and Treatment of ADHD by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Their attention spans are for a limited period of time. It is argued that a disease has been invented as an excuse for children failing to do their homework and chores at home. There could also be a challenge with the assessment procedures. When the physician is diagnosing a child, he is supposed to use multi-method approaches in order to ensure that the diagnosis is correct.
There should be interviews with the child, teacher and parent. There should also be a review of the child’s school records and physical observation of the child for a suitable period of time. Research studies have indicated that only 15% of the physicians use all the recommended approaches.
Many of them only rely on the clinical interviews while others do not use the standard instruments in assessment (Sciutto and Eisenberg, 108). There is therefore a danger in misdiagnosing a gifted child as one having ADHD. Gifted children have similar characteristics with ADHD symptoms.
They are usually intense when it comes to things such as relationships, sibling rivalry, responding to authority and mental tasks. They are also very hyper and restless. They tend to question the status quo a lot as they see numerous possibilities or alternatives. They are also very sensitive and easily moved to tears. It is a catastrophe when gifted and normal children are diagnosed with ADHD and put on medication.
The qualities of gifted children are appreciated in business settings especially on technical tasks. It is sad that when such qualities are displayed in children it becomes an issue that needs to be addressed. The gifted children could be restless as they wait for the other children to catch up. They should not be penalized.
Treatment of ADHD The disorder is mostly treated by the administration of stimulants such as Ritalin (methylphenidate) in recommended doses. It addresses the condition by activating the central nervous system which includes the brain. It has been noted to reduce hyperactivity and impulsiveness. It also helps the children sustain attention in their school while being taught and doing their assignments. Due to the side effects associated with stimulants, researchers have advocated for other treatment methods that are natural in nature.
A research study was conducted on children with ADHD across different ages, gender and income groups. There were two treatment strategies. Some of the children were engaged in green outdoor activities while the others were subjected to indoor and built outdoor activities. The results indicated that the green outdoor settings for after-school and weekend activities reduced the ADHD symptoms after considerable time regardless of the age, gender and socio-economic class of the children (Kuo and Faber, 582).
The researchers argue that the symptoms of attention fatigue and ADHD are similar. Interestingly, ADHD is regarded as a disorder while attention fatigue is a temporary condition where once the person rests he will be fine. They therefore advocate for after-school and weekend activities in a naturalized settings where the children can get rejuvenated.
Controversies in treatment of ADHD There have been controversies in the treatment of ADHD as several scholars are concerned with the high levels of stimulants being consumed by children. There is a perception that ADHD is being over diagnosed leading to high levels of stimulant consumption. Research conducted on Ritalin prescriptions in the 1990s showed that the prescriptions for the children aged between two and four years had tripled during this period (Zuvekas, Vitiello and Norquist, 580).
The use of the stimulant had increased by over 6% in America during the same period. It is an area of concern since 6% of the people diagnosed with ADHD are very young children. There have been arguments that the stimulants do not have significant side effects in the children which have been refuted.
There are research studies that have showed stimulants have side effects such as insomnia and anorexia. The stimulants are also being abused by teenagers. There are children and teenagers who are taking the drugs to enhance their cognitive performance yet they do not have ADHD (Mayes, Bagwell and Erkulwater, 155).
This is dangerous as the possible long term effects of the stimulant abuse have not been fully investigated. Researchers are concerned with long term side effects such as cardiovascular effects, reduced growth rates and carcinogenic effects. There have also been arguments against the effectiveness of the stimulant drugs in children by teachers.
There are teachers who feel that the drug makes the children have a zombie look in their eyes. It has also been noted that at times the drug causes the children to become withdrawn and isolated. They are over-interested in tasks that are boring and non-inspiring. It is argued that the drug suppresses the part of the child’s brain that assists with creativity, energy and freedom. Different scholars have suggested consideration of different treatment methods that do not require stimulants.
Conclusion The discussion shows that ADHD is a serious condition that affects the academic and social development of a child if not treated. The symptoms will cause more problems to the individual even later in life. Physicians should adequately diagnose otherwise there will be over diagnosis.
Young children will be exposed to consistent doses of stimulants at a young age. There needs to be more research carried out on the use of adequate instruments in the diagnosis of ADHD. What mechanisms should be employed to ensure that the physicians carry out the assessments properly to prevent misdiagnosis and over diagnosis?
There needs to be further research on alternative treatments of ADHD. Currently, stimulants have been found to be the most effective. More research also needs to be carried out on the diagnosis of ADHD in adults in order to address adults with social and employment challenges.
Works Cited Kube, David, Mario Peterson and Fredrick Palmer. “Attention deficit hyperactivity disorder: Comorbidity and medication use”. Clinical Paediatrics, 41(2002): 461-469. Print.
Kuo, Frances and Andrea Faber. “A Potential Natural Treatment for Attention-Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder: Evidence from a National Study.” American Journal of Public Health, 94.9(2004): 1580-1586.
Mayes, Rick, Catherine Bagwell and Jennifer Erkulwater “ADHD and the Rise in Stimulant Use among Children”. Harvard Review of Psychiatry 16(2008):151–166. Print.
Sciutto, Mark and Michael Eisenberg. “Evaluating the evidence for and against the over diagnosis of ADHD”. Journal of Attention Disorders, 11(2007): 106-113.
Zuvekas, Samuel, Benedetto Vitiello and Grayson Norquist. “Recent trends in stimulant medication use among U.S. children”. American Journal of Psychiatry, 163(2006): 579-585. Print.
Crowdsourcing’s Pros and Cons Research Paper college admissions essay help
Abstract Crowdsourcing has become an established business concept among small and large businesses. While firms of all sizes have applied the concept and derived its values, crowdsourcing has been effective among small businesses and individual entrepreneurs. However, crowdsourcing is an emerging concept with the development in technologies. Businesses should plan adequately for risks and benefits associated with the concept.
Introduction Many forms of businesses have adopted the concept of crowdsourcing as a form of marketing strategy. Such businesses collect data and ideas in order to gain competitive advantages in their business processes. As a result, the idea has proved to be effective form of marketing, but only few firms have realized its potential. Crowdsourcing has demonstrated its effective in promoting business growth, but some critics believe that the strategy can fail due to inherent challenges.
They claim that the crowd may not possess the necessary knowledge and good advice, which businesses can rely on to restructure their strategies. Although some organizations had used crowdsourcing before, the concept gained popularity with the growth in the Internet technologies when businesses noted that they could crowdsource different tasks, which they could not complete indoors through their own employees. In this essay, the focus is on pros and cons of crowdsourcing as a business model.
What is crowdsourcing?
People have defined crowdsourcing as the process of giving work to online communities in order to collect information and complete tasks, i.e., it depends on the power of the crowd. Facebook has relied on the concept of crowdsourcing. Facebook has provided a community of workers who can accomplish tasks through fan pages and other platforms.
People participate in contests where they generate ideas, some are brilliant, and others are not. Wikipedia has also used a similar approach to develop data bank of information by using various people. This shows how firms have exploited crowds to generate new marketing concepts.
Jeff Howe introduced the term, crowdsourcing in 2006 (Howe, 2009). However, some firms had previously relied on the idea to generate new ideas and create new products. In 1936, Toyota used the concept in order to develop its logo. The idea has gained momentum due to increased online activities among people, and companies have taken advantages to recruit such people to generate new ideas. In the recent period, Procter
Walmart Company’s Problems Essay college essay help near me
Table of Contents Introduction
Problems encountered by Walmart
Strategic and operational analysis
Ethics and sustainability issues
Introduction Walmart is an American retail corporation established in 1962 by Sam Walton. It operates large chains of department stores and warehouses where they sell products at discounted prices (Kneer 21). It is the third largest publicly owned corporation in the world. It operates in several countries including the United States, Brazil, Argentina, and Canada. Walmart has been on the receiving end for a long time mainly because of its menial treatment of employees (Kneer 22).
Reasons such as low wages and low prices have been cited as reasons why Walmart has developed an allegedly negative reputation. However, analysts have argued that Walmart has an overall positive effect on the economy and lives of people despite criticisms (Kneer 53). It employs over 2 million workers and is the largest private employer in the world.
Problems encountered by Walmart Walmart encounters several problems that include stiff competition, negative reputation, constraints in business acquisitions and joint ventures, and stringent cultural values in foreign markets (Kneer 25). There is stiff competition from other retail stores that have adapted a low-price strategy.
For example, they are facing stiff competition in North America, Canada, and Mexico. Their competitors include ShopKo, Giant tiger, Soriana, Costco, Meijer, Kmart, and Comercial Mexicana among others (Kneer 27). Small grocery and retail stores have successfully competed with Walmart and established their niche in several regions. In addition, competition in foreign markets is stiff.
For example, it has only been able to dominate 2 % of the German food market owing to stiff competition from other established retailers and grocery stores (Roberts and Berg 29).Stiff competition was the reason that Walmart halted its operations in South Korea. After entering the South Korean market in 1998, Walmart was unable to dominate the market and as a result withdrew in 2006.
Walmart has to deal with negative reputation that stems from its low wages, low prices, and sexual exploitation. Several cases of employee exploitation have been reported. Sex discrimination is rampant in all its stores globally. The issue of sexual exploitation has made it difficult for Walmart to expand to certain countries that have strict cultural values and traditions (Roberts and Berg 33). This issue has caused them management problems that have stalled their expansion program.
Moreover, low wages have created a bad reputation for the retailer. Even though they offer employment to millions of people, their wages are so low that they can hardly sustain workers with big families. The corporation’s management has been reluctant to increase wages. Other problems include strict government regulations in foreign markets, strained relationships with suppliers, cultural differences, and difficulties in acquisition of other businesses (Kneer 31).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Strategic and operational analysis Walmart adapts a low-cost and high volume strategy (Roberts and Berg 45). The basic principle of the strategy is to satisfy customers by offering low prices and exceptional customer service.
The retailer is able to offer low prices because its operating costs are lower than the standard industry costs. Its superior distribution channels give it an advantage over its competitors (Roberts and Berg 46). It is able to achieve exceptional customer service because of low prices, a motivated team of employees, and a highly developed data management system.
The management ensures that the corporation gains market advantage by offering a wide range of products to customers (Roberts and Berg 46). Therefore, Walmart gives an opportunity for customers to do their shopping under one roof. Their operational strategy includes offering their serves in different countries in the world. For example, it operates approximately 4,000 retail stores in the U.S alone.
It is changing its operations strategy by converting some of its retail stores into supermarkets in order to offer a wider range of products (Roberts and Berg 47). In addition, it is expanding its operations by opening small retail stores in urban areas. It has turned to social media and technology to reach out more customers and market its stores.
Ethics and sustainability issues Walmart faces several ethics and sustainability issues. There have been cases of sexual and gender discrimination in several stores across the world. In addition, it has been accused of suppressing employees’ efforts to form unions (Roberts and Berg 55). The management is afraid that if it allows formation of unions, employees will fight to have wages increased. It is unethical to pay low wages despite the high revenue that employees generate for the corporation. Walmart also faces several environmental sustainability issues.
These include offering customers products that support environmental sustainability and conservation, and promoting use of renewable energy (Roberts and Berg 57). It is necessary for the corporation’s management to address these issues in order to guarantee their sustainability in the international market. It has three goals to address its sustainability in the market. These include using renewable energy in its stores, to produce zero waste, and to sell products that do not pollute the environment (Roberts and Berg 58).
Recommendations Walmart should focus its efforts on improving its Human Resource in order to fight the negative image resulting from sexual discrimination. To improve its presence in foreign countries, it should improve its image. An improved image will enable it enter foreign markets easily.
We will write a custom Essay on Walmart Company’s Problems specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This will also involve addressing ethical issues that the corporation encounters. For example, it should consider increasing wages and facilitating formation of unions by employees. Another necessary change would be to focus more on sustainability. Many countries have strict environmental sustainability policies.
The corporation should make sustainability its priority in relation to its operations. Its operations and products should promote environmental conservation and sustainability. Finally, the corporation should consider expanding to smaller regions in order to reach more customers. This could include opening small retail stores in areas populated by low-income earners. This will grow its customer base, improve productivity, and increase revenue and market presence.
Conclusion Walmart is one of the largest retail corporations in the world that has been in existence since 1962. It has faced many challenges and overcome many problems to become the largest private employer in the world. Problems faced by the corporation include negative reputation, environmental sustainability issues, stiff competition, government regulation in foreign markets, and cultural differences. Its operational strategy has enabled it to dominate the retail market for a long time.
Walmart adapts a low-cost and high volume strategy. The basic principle of the strategy is to satisfy customers by offering low prices and exceptional customer service. The retailer offers low prices and quality customer service. Walmart should consider increasing wages, encouraging workers’ unions, and promoting environmental sustainability in its operations. This will effectively enhance its stature as a retail giant in the global market.
Works Cited Kneer, Christian. The Walmart Success Story. New York: GRIN Verlag, 2009. Print.
Roberts, Bryan, and Berg, Natalie. Wal-Mart: Key Insights and Practical Lessons form the World’s Largest Retailer. New York: Kogan Page Publishers, 2012. Print.
Obligation of Corporations in Environmental Conservation Essay essay help: essay help
In any way we may want to look at the subject of environmental conservation, the fact remains that our lives revolve around the environment in which we stay. Everything around us directly affects the quality of life we lead starting from water to the air we breathe.
However, due to endeavors for economic growth that are being carried out by individuals and companies alike, environmental degradation has become imminent. Natural resources are being exploited in a manner that destroys the environment. Moreover, functions of various corporations have proved to be harmful to the environment. They cause pollution and directly or indirectly cause harm to living things whose life depends on the environment.
The effects of environmental degradation are being felt in various parts of the world. Global warming, Ozone layer depletion and water scarcity are all due to environmental degradation. If care is not taken now, a time will come when it will be too late for any meaningful steps to be initiated as far as environmental conservation is concerned. In this regard, corporations as well as individuals have a role to play in ensuring that the environment in protected not only for the present generation, but also for the future ones.
It is important to note that environmental conservation is very crucial for sustenance of human beings. Natural resources are very crucial not only for economical growth, but also for social development of nations. It is important to note that a country with abundant natural resources has a high potential of developing quickly compared to a country that is not well endowed with natural resources. Unfortunately, natural resources will be exhausted one day if the environment is not conserved (Mullerat
The Religious and Political Views of the Epic Poem Essay writing essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Religious Views of Paradise Lost and
Political Views of Paradise Lost
Introduction The poem Paradise Lost by Milton is a piece of art that has been coined wonderfully to pass both political and religious messages. The name Paradise Lost was carefully chosen as a summary of what Milton was talking about in the entire book. According to Sander (64), the way Milton has used diction in this poem, and the way themes come out shows a high level of expertise in this field. The book brings out the historic nature of the creation of mankind.
When man was created, he was supposed to live in heaven with God. He was supposed to enjoy a life free from any toil, pain, death or any other form of suffering. This was what God intended for man. This poem brings this message in a careful and very interesting manner. The poem brings out the cunning nature of Satan. Determined to compete with the power of God, Satan comes out to put a challenge to God. He uses a special creature of God, the mankind.
Paradise Lost skillfully knits religion and politics into one large garment. As Storr (84) observes, Milton has successfully brought together politics and religion into one plate. He has managed to demonstrate that the two are very closely connected. In this poem, it would be easy to see how religion and politics are closely related. From the perspective of Sander (86), some of the facts that are brought out in this poem can either be considered as political or religious.
Depending on the approach one takes in the analysis, major themes may be categorized into the two topics. As this scholar puts it, when the poem is given to a political scientist, he shall see politics on the other hand. On the other hand, when this work is given to a student of religion, he shall see a lot of religious facts. This poem is focused on analyzing the poem Paradise Lost from both the religious and political standpoints.
Religious Views of Paradise Lost and The poem ‘Paradise Lost’ strikes as a religious poem. John Milton brings out the kingdom of God before the fall of man, the process where man fell off with God, and how he was finally sent from Garden of Eden. As Milton says, man was a special creature of God. God considered man a special creature as compared to other creatures.
As such, he was given freedom to rule over other creatures of God. He was given power to eat of all the fruits that were in the Garden of Eden extract the fruit of knowledge. God provided man with everything in the garden. He offered man immortality and every other thing that he would need while in the palace. According to Milton (117), besides any other reason that may exist, one of the reasons why God gave Adam and Eve the instruction not to eat from the fruit was to ensure that mankind obeyed him.
He had created man and offered all that he might need in the Garden of Eden. However, after the rebellion of Satan and other angels who were loyal to him, God wanted to ensure that this special creature do not fall off his glory. He gave the instruction to man in order to ensure that he remained faithful to him. However, it unfortunately happened that Satan had plans against God, and against this special creature of God.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Satan was disguised as a snake, came to Eve and convinced her to eat of the fruit. Milton (78) says that Satan knew that it would be difficult to trick Adam directly. He therefore, chose to use someone who had the capacity to get through to the heart of Adam, and that was Eve. Sure enough, Eve easily fell to Satan’s trick and ate the forbidden fruit. Consequently, Adam was convinced to eat from the fruit of knowledge as demonstrated in the poem.
Of Mans First Disobedience, and the Fruit Of that Forbidden Tree, whose mortal tast Brought Death into the World, and all our woe with loss of Eden, till one greater Man (1.1.1-4)
Milton says that the decision of man to eat from the fruit of life was disobedience. God had given man all the freedom he would have needed in this kingdom. He only left him with one instruction. The instruction was that he was not to eat from the fruit of knowledge. When man committed this sin, God considered it disobedience. Just like Satan who was his servant but rebelled, God considered man as a special creature who had rebelled against Him. Given his nature, God does not tolerate disobedience.
He banished Satan and all other rebellious angels to hell. Man also had to receive a similar treatment. Milton says that this sin brought death and woe to the world. Besides this, man was sent out of the Garden of Eden. Man, unlike Satan, was never given a heavier punishment of being banished to hell (Fromm 28).
When Satan tricked man through Eve, he knew that God would banish man from paradise to hell. In hell, Satan knew that he would have control over the special creature of God. However, this was not to be. Unlike Satan who was keen to continue fighting God for the control of the heaven and earth, man realized that he had sinned. He humbled himself before God and told him that he appreciated the fact that his actions warranted punishment.
His reactions after sinning shows that man remained loyal to God. He was able to realize that Satan was evil minded and therefore, tricked them to eat from the forbidden fruit. His words and actions reaffirmed his trust and loyalty to God. Even after eating from the fruit of knowledge, man still realized that God was the creator, protector and provider. This was the reason why Satan was hiding from God. He had realized suddenly that they were naked.
We will write a custom Essay on The Religious and Political Views of the Epic Poem specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Milton says:
Say first, for Heav’n hides nothing from thy view Nor the deep Tract of Hell, say first what cause Mov’d our Grand Parents in that happy State, Favour’d of Heav’n so highly, to fall off From thir Creator, and transgress his Will For one restraint, Lords of the World besides? (2.1.27-32)
Upon realizing that they were naked, Adam and Eve tried to hide their nakedness from God. However, God told them that under the sun, man could not hide anything from him. He had knowledge of every single activity that was taking place in the garden and any other place in the world. God had to punish man although he had admitted his sin. However, the punishment given was not as great as that which was given to the Satan.
He was not sent to hell. He was only sent from paradise where everything was given by God, to the earth where he was expected to toil in order to earn a living. He was sent from heaven where there were no deaths, diseases, sufferings and all other evils witnessed on earth. The life that was offered in heaven would never be seen to man again in all his life on earth. He had rebelled against God. He had listened to the enemy of God, and ate from the forbidden fruit.
Sander (37) says, “Adam and Eve lived a life in paradise where they lacked nothing. They were under the care of God who provided for all their needs till they sinned.” This scholar says that the glory of paradise was taken from man because of the sin. He was sent to earth where he would face evil power determined to destroy him. The animals that he named after their creation, and controlled when in paradise would turn against him, just like he turned against God.
The serpent, which was a harmless creature in paradise, was given ability to bite and kill man given the opportunity. However, God realized that man could not survive if left alone on earth. He therefore maintained his presence through his trusted angels who watched over man.
Milton (56) says that although God sent man out of the garden, he kept a close eye on him to ensure that he was protected from any harm, especially from Satan and his forces. Milton says that following this sin, God considered man a rebellious creature. Because of this rebellion, the paradise was lost forever.
When God created the law to Adam, it was supposed to make him know how he would rule over other creatures that had been bestowed under his watch. Forsyth (29) says that God never gives laws that are oppressive. God loved His creatures Adam and Eve. For this reason, He could not hide from them anything which was good for them. They were God’s favorite creatures. God gave them the garden where they would find everything they needed without any struggle.
Not sure if you can write a paper on The Religious and Political Views of the Epic Poem by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More God knew that eating from this fruit would harm them. This is proven when Adam and Eve struggled to hide their nakedness from God. All this time man and woman had been naked, but never realized. They never struggled to hide from God. However, this fruit brings shame, struggle and the need to run away from the presence of God. All these are sufferings that God wanted to save Adam from when he gave him the law.
Political Views of Paradise Lost According to Sander (93), poems are always based on issues about the society. This scholar says that although poems are always fiction as the actions would take place in the mind of the author who will then transfer it into a written art, the actions are always based on facts on the society. Poets would use their skills to bring out specific information about the society in a special way. In this poem, Milton brings out how politics manifests itself in the society.
This is brought from the leadership perspective. In this poem, Milton brings in a case that demonstrates revolution from the leadership. When God created man and woman and placed them in the garden, they were supposed to obey the command given by God. Political perspective comes in when Satan challenges power of God. He convinces man to disobey God and challenge His authority.
Who first seduc’d them to that foul revolt? Th’ infernal Serpent; he it was, whose guile Stird up with Envy and Revenge, deceiv’d The Mother of Mankind, what time his Pride Had cast him out from Heav’n, with all his Host Of Rebel Angels, by whose aid aspiring To set himself in Glory above his Peers, He trusted to have equal’d the most High (2.1.33-40)
In this extract, two centers of power are shown to be fighting for control. As shown in this extract, Satan, through the serpent, was determined to win over Humankind because it was the most treasured creature of all. He seduced humankind to revolt against God. The extract shows that Satan had developed an empire by joining forces with other rebel angels.
According to Milton (114), Satan formed a very strong kingdom where he was the ruler. In his kingdom, this scholar says that Satan made a great effort to ensure that he fought against the powers of God. He wanted to reign over the world. These two forces have been in constant battle. They are struggling to rule Humanity.
From the extract, Satan was full of envy towards man, and the need to revenge. Man had been considered as the most precious creature that pleased God. By attacking him and making him part ways with God, Satan knew that he would be left to control mankind (Sander 86).
This scholar says that the mission of Satan was to separate man from God so that he would find his way between the two. By manipulating man to disobey God, Satan knew that mankind would be sent away from Heaven where God would offer full protection. However, by managing to separate them, he would have time to attack man with a lot of ease.
According to Sander (86), in a political environment, powers will always clash while trying to determine which power is stronger. Two empires staying side by side will never be at peace until one exerts its authority and proves that it is stronger. In this poem, we are introduced to two kingdoms.
The first Kingdom is headed by God, and has all the angels that remained loyal to God. The second kingdom is headed by Satan, and has various followers who fell from the first kingdom. Satan himself was an angel under the leadership of God (Milton 73). These two kingdoms are fighting to gain control of the kingdom.
That Glory never shall his wrath or might Extort from me. To bow and sue for grace With suppliant knee, and deifie his power, Who from the terrour of this Arm so late Doubted his Empire, that were low indeed, That were an ignominy and shame beneath This downfall; since by Fate the strength of Gods And this Empyreal substance cannot fail, (3.1.110-117)
From this extract, Milton appreciates the existence of the two kingdoms. He appreciates the fact that the two are very strong kingdoms, but with forces pulling in different directions. While God is determined to see a peaceful society, with humanity living within the freedom allowed, and obeying the rules given, Satan is determined to counter this. He challenges God and uses terror to counter the power of God. Milton finally appreciates the fact that God’s empire is actually beyond any failure.
According to Forsyth (116), the war between God and Satan can be viewed from the political perspective. The argument of this scholar is in support of Milton’s Paradise Lost. This scholar says that when Satan was in the same kingdom in heaven under the leadership of God, he believed that the power of God could be challenged. He envied the power of God. This was despite the fact that he was one of the most trusted angels of God.
However, he wanted to be like God. He wanted to experience how it would be as a leader of a given community. He wanted to create a territory where he would be the leader. For this reason, he rebelled from God. This rebellion did not come because God did something that Satan considered outrageous. It is only that Satan was yearning for power. He wanted to reign, just like God.
Storr (56), in his review of the poem ‘Paradise Lost’, says that Milton presents a struggle for power in those early days. This scholar says that the paradise which was lost was actually the ability to enjoy the benefits of being in a superior kingdom.
This scholar further says that during those early days, the rulers based their ruling strategy on rod and stick. Those who obeyed the stronger power would enjoy the benefits that come with it such as staying in paradise where man would not be subjected to any labor and pain. This story clearly demonstrates that disobedience comes with consequences.
Mankind lost the paradise because of the failure to obey God. As such, he was made to suffer. According to Forsyth (47), the poem Paradise Lost is a narration of the events that took place in the Garden of Eden just before man was sent to earth. This scholar says that religion is about obedience. From religious perspective, people have the responsibility to ensure that they follow the laws and all the regulations put in place by God.
When God made the first law and gave it to Adam, it was supposed to guide him within the Garden of Eden. These laws were not meant to oppress him. The law was not meant to make him foolish before other creatures in this Garden. Other than God and His angels, man was the most intelligent animal.
He was given power to control other creatures on the earth. Man lacked nothing within this garden, and was always under tight security. Just like in an earthly kingdom, this kingdom had laws. These laws always help in defining relationship between one man and another, and between man and nature. This is what this law given to Adam was meant for. The law was to help define the relationship that exists between man and nature, and with God.
God knew why the tree’s fruit was never to be eaten by man. Adam had all the reason to obey this law that was defining how he would relate to nature (Shaffer 57). This law was also a sign of how God wanted Adam to behave with Him. Disobeying this law was a disobedience to God who created the law. Just like in a kingdom, such a behavior could not go unpunished. Being banished from the Garden of Eden was the punishment given.
Conclusion The epic poem ‘Paradise Lost’ by John Milton presents a story of how man came to fall off from paradise. The poem skillfully knits together religion and politics into one garment. Satan is seen determined to challenge the power of God. He fights God directly, but realizes that that is dangerous. He then chooses to fight God through His special creature, man. Again he realizes that man is very loyal to God, and would not disobey Him if he was to approach him.
Canning as he was, Satan found his way into the Garden of Eden. He sneaks into this garden in the form of a snake. Using his oratory skills, Satan manages to convince Eve to eat from the forbidden fruit. Eve goes ahead to eat the fruit without realizing that this is an act of rebellion against God. She takes some to Adam who also eats this fruit of knowledge. They suddenly realize that they were naked, and hide their nakedness from God when they heard him enter the garden. As a result, man is sent to earth from the Garden of Eden.
He is relieved of all the privileges that he enjoyed while he was loyal to the kingdom of God. Now that he had listened to the Kingdom of Satan, he had to experience the suffering that comes with this kingdom. He was to toil in order to eat. He had to protect himself from wild animals in order to survive. He was assigned various tasks that were strenuous just because of this sin. Paradise was lost, and lost forever. He had to stay on earth with all its challenges. This is the message that this epic poem by John Milton brings out.
Works Cited Forsyth, Holly. Gardens of Eden: Among the World’s Most Beautiful Gardens. Carlton, Miegunyah Press, 2009. Print.
Fromm, Erich. On Being Human. New York: Continuum, 1994. Print.
Milton, John. Paradise Lost. London: Vintage Classic, 1758. Print.
Sander, Theresa. Approaching Eden: Adam and Eve in Popular Culture. Lanham: Rowman
Philosophy: David Hume Views on Cause and Effect Essay online essay help: online essay help
According to Hume, it is impossible to possess information about effect and cause. On the contrary, human beings can only possess knowledge regarding opinions. According to the Treatise of Human Nature, Hume asserts that each belief that is subject to justification should be either a matter of fact or relation of ideas. Relation of ideas involves a statement related to reason or mathematics.
Matter of fact can be ascertained through the experiences that human beings go through. According to Hume, all knowledge is as a result of the primary units related to sensory experiences.
Hume asserts that the basic impressions result to simple ideas. Therefore, complicated ideas are as a result of positioning simple ideas (Smith 82). Justifying that a belief is basically knowledge entails defining the impressions that form the foundation of the idea. A majority of the metaphysical ideas do not warrant justification using the strategies proposed by Hume. This implies that there is a close connection between matter of fact and relation of ideas.
According to Hume, human beings hold three beliefs that are unjustifiable. The first unjustifiable belief is concerned with causation ideas from where the global causation principle is derived. In this regard, there are several causes that lead to an event. Making predictions is possible as a result of the global causation principle.
It is imperative to assume an induction principle so as to be able to make a prediction (Smith 65). This involves the belief that the previous nature laws will prevail in the future. There is also an argument that there is an external material or physical world whose existence is independent of human being’s concepts and impressions.
Similar to Berkeley, Hume denies the intelligence associated with substance notions. However, Hume never develops a metaphysical arrangement. On the contrary, his stand is wholly skeptical. Hume asserts that reasoning has a solid foundation on causation.
Therefore, there is a principal concern to link distinct ideas so as to develop a single belief. It is impossible for causation to be as a result of matter of fact or relation of ideas. This is attributed to the fact that human beings elaborate events and experiences using the previous occurrences. In addition, they can use the experiences that other people went through.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More It is impossible to recognize specific effects and causes through the use of reason. On the contrary, experience is the only key thing. For instance, after seeing the sun rising from the East, human beings may assume that it will always rise from the East. However, in case a person has never seen the sun rising, it is impossible to know what to expect. Hence, it worth emphasizing that effect and cause are dependent on previous experiences (Smith 45).
It is impossible for the effect and cause idea to be equivalent to relation of ideas. This is attributed to the fact that reasoning alone is inadequate the reveal the effects and causes associated with a particular occurrence. It is impossible for the causation idea to be a matter of fact since it cannot be revealed through the use of perception.
Therefore, the effect and causation idea has to originate from previous experiences. In addition, it is imperative that two experiences are linked so as to have a solid connection. There exists no demonstrative reasoning that can assist in justifying future predictions.
Works Cited Smith, Norman. The Philosophy of David Hume. London: Macmillian, 1941. Print.
Business Environment in Germany Report best essay help: best essay help
Germany is a country in central Europe with a population of more than 82 million and is considered one of the largest countries of the region. It is a highly developed democratic society with the majority of population practicing Christian religion. It is divided into 16 administrative-territorial regions.
The economy is developing rapidly with an average salary per person being approximately 40000 US dollars. The majority of the population is German and the predominant views and culture are largely European. The capital is Berlin and the current president of the Federation is Angela Merkel. The people have the power to elect the government officials by voting. The political system of the country is divided into federal and regional.
The local governments make it easy to decide what specific laws must be changed or accepted. Germany is very much involved in the peacemaking initiatives all over the world and takes part in anti-terrorism efforts. The country is very much oriented on the service industry but is also well known for its production. It is considered a post industrial country focusing on shipbuilding, electro technical and chemical development (Taberner 57).
It does not have any many natural resources but is rich with coal. The infrastructure is modernized with railroad being one of the major transport systems. Even though it consumes a great part of European energy, the government is planning to move forward with natural energy sources, such as wind, sun, hydro and any other renewable sources. The official language is German but there are several variations in dialects depending on the region.
One of the strongest parts of German culture is the constitution and the acknowledgment of human rights. The Second World War has put a great dent in the nation, as well as the reputation throughout the world but currently, Germany is thought of as one of the advancing nations.
It is also paying off the debt to the countries that were involved in the war, which shows the high level or responsibility and development. The nation is very much oriented to unite all the citizens and industries. The economical spheres of finances, municipal services, logistics and sales were advanced to include common administration and goals.
The high level of life provides people with an advanced social protection through medical, accidents insurance and high pensions. The work environment is very effective for both managers and employees. Insurance funds are being constantly created which guarantees equal rights to all workers. This is very beneficial for all who want to do business, as all necessary conditions are provided.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More German culture is very diverse and no one is forced to participate in anything against their will. Every region and city has its unique set of traditions and differences are very much welcomed. Full freedom of the person is aligned with the political correctness of the nation and this enables people to feel the security and support of the government. Education is on a very high level with every region making its own adjustments (Schroll-Machl 102).
This gives power to the system to select what is best for the community adhering to the standards and unique nature of the population. Sciences are developing with an increased pace and the quest for knowledge is thought to be one of the major focuses of the nation. Overall, Germany has all the conditions for life and development of businesses.
Works Cited Schroll-Machl, Sylvia. Doing Business with Germans: Their Perception, Our Perception. Bristol, United States: Vandenhoeck
Masafi Water Company and Al Ain Water Company Report essay help
The researchers from Worldwatch institute have found out that the consumption of bottled water has gone up to approximately 40% (Wait, 2008).There have been various reasons for this consumption such as, climatic change, raised living standard and population growth etc. According to Saleem, particularly, in Middle East, the consumption of bottled water from 2003 to 2008 has become double (Wait, 2008).
Masafi Company: The establishment of Masafi Company happened in 1976 and now it is a leading company having a strong distribution network globally (Masafi, n.d.). The mineral water is natural which is collected from the mountains of Ras Al Khaima (Masafi Marketing Audit Presentation, 2012).
The rich underground springs of Masafi are the resources for this superior quality bottled water. The company’s use of Poly Ethylene Terephatalate (PET) for packaging can be observed as company’s commitment for the conservation of the environment. The PET bottling plant that has a capacity of producing 34,000 bottles in an hour is well equipped with the advance technology (Masafi: The Leading Producer of the Bottled Mineral Water in the Gulf, n. d.).
Al Ain Mineral Water Company: Masafi’s big competitor is Al Ain Mineral Water Company. In the local UAE market it is the great challenge for Masafi. Al Ain Mineral Water Company has met the standards set by the US Food and Drug Administration. It has been awarded HAACP certificate in 2002.
This company started in the year 1990. Its plant is located in Al Ain city where underground springs of natural, pure, mineral water are in abundance (Field, 2007).
Agthia, the owner of the brand Al Ain Mineral Water has expanded its distribution channels to enhance the growth of their bottled water business. The chief executive of the group, Ilias Assimakopoulos says, “We believe that the water business has quite a growth movement in the UAE, especially in the Northern Emirates, which is the key growth opportunity for us” (Duncan, 2012 Para 4).
The brand name ‘Al Ain’ is popular in the markets of UAE for the fine quality of its pure and natural water that is collected from the untouched Al Ain springs. Al Ain water is primarily sold in the UAE markets and only a small percentage is exported to the adjoining GCC markets (Field, 2007).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The Al Ain Water laboratory use up-to-date equipment for testing water and packaging material to certify the good quality of the product (Al Ain, n.d.).
Comparison: The quality of water is analyzed on the basis of minerals present in it. Also, it is important to check the quality of the plastic of the bottles used for packaging and observe if no chemicals are used for the cleaning of the bottles when they go on the water dispenser (Drinking Water, 2013).
The following picture is the chemical analysis of bottled water brands in the UAE:
Source: FooDiva, 2011
As per the norms NHS has set some standards of using Sodium which should be less than 200 mg per liter and sulphate should not be present more than 250 mg per liter.
Al Ain water has 8mg per liter sodium and 5 mg sulphate present in the bottled water. Masafi has 10mg/liter sodium and 19mg/liter sulphate in its bottled water (Drinking Water, 2013).
Manufacturing of Masafi and Al Ain Water:
We will write a custom Report on Masafi Water Company and Al Ain Water Company specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The resource of Masafi water is the mountain and this is why the water is rich in minerals. The water is collected through many pipes and funnels which are connected to the bottling plant. This plant is generally situated in the nearby area. With the help of the pipes the water is collected and then it is pumped out for filtration.
The water resource and production manager, Pankag Naik describes the procedure that a firmly controlled filtering system carries water through the filters and 0.03-micro-filters in a cooled state. During this final inspection, if something goes wrong, the alarms go off and the procedure is stopped by shutting down the plant. For making the bottles, a small bottle is made first with a little white ball and then it is heated to make it 8cm long.
The next step is to fill the bottles, which is done by fixing the bottles on a conveyer belt with their necks dangling and passed to the the other room where the process of filling water in the bottles takes place. Water is filled into the bottles with high-pressure jet. A 500 ml bottle is filled within 3 seconds. The whole procedure takes place automatically. People are there only to supervise the work. The production is higher during the summer season because of the increased demand of water (Harnan, 2010).
Source: Masafi presentation for Central Europe, 2010, p.22
Source: Masafi presentation for Central Europe, 2010, p.22
The process of making mineral water is different for Al Ain Water Company. The stainless pipes are used for carrying water. Through these pipes the water is carried from the natural springs to the tanks. The tanks are totally made for water storage. Water is taken directly from the source and pumped to the bottling facility. It reduces the risks of contamination that is normally caused during handling and transportation procedure.
Here, bottles and cups are molded by heating PET and then transferred on conveyor belts to get rinsed and filled. Thereafter, these bottles are capped and labeled. The bottles and cups are packed in cartons and stored in the warehouse.
To promote bulk buying and provide convenient handling, Al Ain Water has recently started using plastic shrink-wrapping for sets of bottles (Emirates food stuff and mineral water company, n.d.)
Not sure if you can write a paper on Masafi Water Company and Al Ain Water Company by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Source: Emirates foodstuff and mineral water company, n.d. p.19
Production Line and designing of Masafi and Al Ain water: Masafi has earned its name as brand for packaged mineral water. FMCG industry Masafi has been working for 35 years and has volunteered into the field of flavoured water, chips, tissues and rice. Company’s focus on distinctiveness and superior business quality and the idea to deliver better quality products and meet the global quality standards has made it popular in the region (Masafi, n.d.).
The PET bottles are used for designing and packaging of Masafi mineral water. They are made of plastic but actually the plastic element is 23 percent less in making these bottles. This bottled water is safe and healthy (Masafi Marketing Audit Presentation, 2012).
A new technology has been introduced by the name of oxo-biodegradable technology. In this technology a little amount of metal salts are added to plastics to accelerate the degradation of the plastic in explicit environmental situations (Lukwaro, 2010).
Oxo-Biodegradable Shrink Wrap: this shrink wrap is environmental friendly and it is the first of its kind introduced by Masafi in this industry.
Source: Masafi presentation for Central Europe, 2010, (p.32)
When Al Ain Water started its commercial production with only one bottle line but at present it produces eight different sizes of bottled water products and water cups. The company is provided with ISO 9001 certification. It also produces PET bottle pre-forms for other bottling companies and ice blocks.
Source: Al Ain bottled water, n.d. Para 4
There are two types of formats of 330 ml glass bottle which is offered by Al Ain Water Company: still and sparkling. This exclusive bottle is available in eight designs. Al Ain Water Company has also introduced 5-gallon pack for Abu Dhabi and Al Ain region as per the demands of the local people.
Quality control of Masafi and Al Ain Company: Masafi is very keen in improving its quality control. For which it conducts its internal auditing. It also conducts customers’ survey program to get their feedback.
Al Ain Water Company is also adamant to follow the standards for quality control. The inspection of the water wells takes place periodically to check contamination. Besides the internal quality control procedure, Al Ain Water gets the quality check done by its guarantor, Vittel of France (Owned by Nestle Waters) once in a month.
Conclusion Though Masafi has secured the top most company place among the bottled mineral water companies all over the UAE, yet AL Ain Water Company seems to be a great challenge for Masafi by showing a speedy growth. It has become in a dominant position especially in Abu Dhabi and Al Ain regions.
Works Cited Al Ain bottled water. Web.
Drinking Water 2013. Web.
Duncan, Gillian, Profits flow for Agthia with bottled water rise. 2012. Web.
Emirates foodstuff and mineral water company. Web.
Field, Roger, Water producer taps brand potential. 2007. Web.
Foo Diva 2011. Web.
Harnan, Eugine, “Masafi from the source to market.” The National. 2010. Web.
Lukwaro, Gureni, “Masafi introduces plastic that degrades in two years.” The National. 2010. Web.
Masafi Marketing Audit Presentation 2012. Web.
Masafi: The Leading Producer of the Bottled Mineral Water in the Gulf. Web.
Masafi presentation for Central Europe 2010. Web.
Wait, Isaac 2008, Changing Perceptions: Water Quality and Demand in the United Arab Emirates. Web.
The Issue of Privacy Report college application essay help: college application essay help
Privacy is the concern of many Americans. In his article “Privacy Is Overrated”, David Plotz presents his vision of the issue of privacy in the American society. The author starts with listing the aspects about his private life which cannot be hidden and can be checked by any company or person. However, Plotz belongs to the minority of people who perceive this fact as normal and do not suffer from the ‘privacy paranoia’ (Plotz).
The author is not preoccupied with the aspect of privacy in contrast to many other people who care about the intrusion into privacy. Plotz focuses on several ways in relation to which authorities and companies can realize intrusion into privacy. The author pays attention to the Defense Department’s Office of Total Information Awareness which intends to record the confidential data to prevent terroristic acts. People are against the procedure.
However, Plotz states that this concern is based on hypocrisy paranoia when people protect their personal data, but they also want to know personal information about the others. Thus, the author lists several flaws of privacy focusing on benefits of lack of privacy. Companies really do not care about people’s personal life but they are ignorant. Moreover, crimes can be fought. Plotz concludes that lack of privacy leads to openness, but not to intrusion into privacy (Plotz).
It is possible to agree with the position of the author on the issue of privacy because the lack of confidentiality and privacy is the characteristic feature of the modern world and it is rather difficult to oppose to the well-developed system of recording the personal data at the governmental level with references to privacy protection movements. The next reason to support the idea presented by Plotz is the fact that a lot of recorded and stored data are used by many companies to make the everyday routine activities of the Americans easier and make the life more convenient. Furthermore, one more point is the fact that the lack of privacy in the form of using street cameras, computer search programs, and available credit histories is significant for the effective work of police or other law enforcement agencies.
People’s complaints about the lack of privacy became typical today. However, many persons begin to understand the advantages of the situation. That is why, it is rather irrational to oppose the tendency which became the modern reality, especially when the lack of privacy provides a lot of benefits for the development of the American society.
Moreover, referring to Plotz’s idea that many people want to check the personal data and story of their baby-sitters, it is possible to state that the Americans accepted the possibility to check the data related to the other people, and they are ready to use the advantages of this opportunity, but people are rather hypocritical in relation to their own private information.
Plotz also develops the idea of openness as the concept opposite to privacy (Plotz). From this perspective, openness cannot be threatening for people, but it can contribute to uniting the society.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Every day millions of Americans buy different goods and products using markets and online resources. It is rather easier when companies propose their customers goods according to their personal preferences and can save their time and money proposing appropriate variants. These services are possible if a lot of private information is gathered and analyzed in order to respond to the customers’ expectations. The lack of privacy is the necessary stage in the development of modern consumerist society.
From this point, people’s everyday routine activities become less time-consuming and more effective. In reality, companies are oriented to using the stored data for their business purposes (Goshgarian). Thus, companies do not develop strategies to intrude into the lives of clients to do harm. Moreover, such companies can prevent doing any harm to the persons’ finances when the unusual financial activities are observed.
The next advantage of availability of information which was discussed as confidential earlier is its role for police and other law enforcement agencies. To find a criminal, policemen investigate the volumes of personal information and identify personalities of criminals. Moreover, the systems which are used to gather and store personal information can also work to contribute to the legal procedures.
Thus, the new approach when personal data should be available to law enforcement agencies can be discussed as advantageous to fight terrorism and crime. In spite of the fact a lot of people state that the usage of the recorded private data can be discussed as intrusion into privacy and the violation of definite laws on confidentiality, these people are ready to agree with the actions of authorities when the access to private information is necessary for them to assist in overcoming definite problems.
Looking at the issue from the other perspective, it is possible to agree that authorities and law enforcement agencies gather the private data not to limit and control people, but to regulate the order and protect the society.
Works Cited Goshgarian, Gary. What Matters in America. New York: Longman, 2010. Print.
Plotz, David. “Privacy Is Overrated”. GQ: Gentlemen’s Quarterly 71.9 (2001): 224-225. Print.
We will write a custom Report on The Issue of Privacy specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More
American Detective Novel Comparison Essay essay help site:edu
In life, we often find ourselves being confronted by our past events and choices. Circumstances may force us to tackle with issues that test our love and loyalty for both our family members and friends. This paper seeks to compare two American detective novels. The two novels are The Black Dahlia by James Ellroy and Mystic River by Dennis Lehane.
Through the comparison, the paper will illustrate the similarities between the two novels and highlight on how everything returned to where they started. The article will pinpoint that in The Black Dahlia even as time passes crime continues to be resolved where it began. In Mystic River, even after 25 years the story unravels right where it began.
A major similarity between the two novels is that everything returns to where they started. In The Black Dahlia, even as time passes crime continues to be resolved where it began. During the introductory part of this book, the author introduced two police officers trapped in the Zoot Suit Riots (Ellroy 12). Bleichert was on a mission to save Lee Blanchad.
Later, the two police officers managed to arrest a wanted criminal and sought asylum in an abandoned residence as the riots escalated. At the onset of the novel, the two officers were not working for the same department. As such, Blanchad was a sergeant while Bleichert was a road patrol officer. Some few years later, Bleichert was transferred to work together with Blanchad at the homicide warrant department. While working together, Bleichert met with Kay who leaved with his friend. Later, Kay and Bleichert were engaged.
In the year 1947, the two officers were appointed to investigate on a murder case of Elizabeth Short. During this investigation, Bleichert met with a young girl who looked alike with Elizabeth Short.
It was not long before the two had an affair. While Bleichert was having an affair with the mistress, his relationship with Lee and Kay deteriorated. It was not long before Lee began consuming Benzedrine, which made him to behave unpredictably. Later, Lee confronted with his bosses and disappeared. On the same period, Bleichert did not only break up with her mistress and Kay but also messed up with his assignment.
Because of this, he was demoted from the department. After being demoted, Bleichert embarked on a mission to trace Lee. When he later learned of Lee’s fate, he returned to the town to restore the deteriorating relationship with Kay. It was during this period that he was transferred to work as a lab technician. As a lab technician, he was able to unravel the mysteries of the death of Elizabeth Short and disappearance of Lee.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More As the novel ends, the author notes that Bleichert had gotten back with Kay who was by then pregnant. Through the above illustrations, it is apparent that as time passed the crime was eventually resolved where it began. Equally, through the above illustrations we note that everything returned to its original state. As such, Bleichert broke up with his mistress and got back to her wife. In the same way, the murderer of Elizabeth Short was traced back to Los Angeles.
In the novel Mystic River, even after 25 years, the story unravels right where it began. At the onset of the book, the author introduces to the readers three little boys (Lehane 9).
The boys are later separated after Sean Divine was abducted and raped by pedophiles. Twenty-five years after the incident, Divine had become a homicide detective. On the other hand, Jimmy was an ex-convict who operated a store in the town. The third person by the name Dave was already married and exhibited physiological challenges. The three people were finally united after the murder of Jimmy’s daughter.
Following the death, Divine was appointed to investigate on the murder case. Later, Divine and Jimmy engaged in a disagreement because of the investigations. On the night of the murder, the author notes that Dave arrived home covered in human blood. Through the above illustrations, it is apparent how things returned to their original state. The three friends were united back in Boston through the date of Jimmy’s daughter.
Another similarity between the two books is that the two books focus on the lives of police detectives. As such, in the novels the main characters are police officers who are after resolving mysteries about some crimes in their towns. In the book The Black Dahlia, Ellroy narrates a thrilling story about a constable who has been assigned to investigate the murder of a young girl. With time, the constable becomes so eager to unravel the facts of the young girl’s short life and the causes of her murder.
Through this, the constable is forced to tackle with hard truths about the girl’s relationship. In the book Mystic River, Lehane narrates a fascinating story about a detective who has been assigned to investigate the murder of the death of Jimmy Marcus’ daughter. Just like the detective in the novel The Black Dahlia, Sean Devine investigations untie some facts that force the investigator to face up to his past.
Another similarity that exists between the two books is that they lead to frustrating conclusions. During the introductory parts of these books, the authors illustrate the main characters living together in harmony. Since the two books revolve around detectives, readers will expect the detectives in the two books to solve their cases successfully.
We will write a custom Essay on American Detective Novel Comparison specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Similarly, the readers expect that at the end of the novels the detectives will be satisfied with their investigations. In contracts, the two novels conclude while the detectives are yet to find themselves in agreement with their hardest realities. The Black Dahlia, concludes while Bleichert’s life was in a complete mess.
He had not only been obsessed with his investigations but also with the beauty of the murder victim. In the final chapter, the author notes that Bleichert kept wondering how Elizabeth murder had disrupted their lives. This implies that the novel ended on a sad note. In the novel Mystic River, Devine tries to enforce law and order in his town in vain.
Instead, his ambitions push him to unravel some mysteries from the past. Through these mysteries, Divine loyalty and trust for the family is tested. Just as in the other novel, readers would expect the novel to end on a happy note after the case has been solved and the suspects apprehended. However, the book ends on a sad note. In the last chapter, readers will note that each revelation in the case has been destructive. Notably, the book ended while Divine was more confused than at the beginning of the investigations.
Works Cited Ellroy, James. The black dahlia. New York: Mysterious Press, 1987. Print.
Lehane, Dennis. Mystic River. New York: William Morrow, 2001. Print.